Ai6060S 1

PointSource
Ai 5555
R
PointSource
Ai 6060
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in Oct. ’99
5BO70761
Revision 1
SERVICE
MANUAL
PointSource
Ai 6060
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service
personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well
as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are
advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the
warnings and precautions described here before engaging in
maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and

customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their
property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning
messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient

attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages
using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from

insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning
messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including
danger and caution. The specific point of attention is shown
inside the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is

shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action
required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
•Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified.
Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric
shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is
adequate for the rated current. ..............................................................
•Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding

the copier may cause fire or electric shock. Connecting the earth wire
to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or
electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following:
gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water
pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities. ......................
CAUTION
•Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may
tip over, causing injury. ..........................................................................
•Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire
or electric shock. ....................................................................................
•Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or
near flammable material. This may cause fire. ......................................
•Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to
keep the machine as cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation may
cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..............................
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ...
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped.

Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or
topple, leading to injury. .........................................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner

or developer is accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in
the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately. If it gets into the
eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain
medical attention. ..................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings
and precautions in the copier’s instruction handbook. ...........................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting
machine disassembly. ............................................................................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service

manual and other related brochures. .....................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features

including safety mechanisms and protective circuits. ............................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..............................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service

manual or other related brochure when replacing them. Using a piece
of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. .........
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a

distance or gap for installation of a part, always use the correct scale
and measure carefully............................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a

ground connection. ................................................................................
•Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the
power plug is dust-free. If it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or
electric shock. ........................................................................................
•Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers.

Leaking laser light may damage eyesight. ............................................
•Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high
potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. ............
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as

ties, make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in
rotating sections. ...................................................................................
•Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away

from chains and belts. ...........................................................................
•Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be

extremely hot. ........................................................................................
•Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean.
Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures. ........................
•Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for
routine replacement. ..............................................................................
•Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage

components when removing them; always hold the plug itself. .............
•Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If
necessary, protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item. .......
•Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire
to avoid electric leaks. ...........................................................................
•Remove toner completely from electronic components. ........................
•Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or

damaged. ...............................................................................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors
and wires that were removed, have been refitted correctly. Special
attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and
missing screws. .....................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine
according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling.
Replace with new ones if necessary. .....................................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions

below: ....................................................................................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill.
Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the
covers or turning the main switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause

sparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace, etc. ..........................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power
plug from the wall outlet immediately. ....................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents

such as alcohol, other than the specified refiner; it may generate toxic
gas. ........................................................................................................
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1. PROCESS EXTERNAL SECTION ........................................... 2-C-1
OUTLINE AND COMPOSITION ................................. 1-1 [1] Composition ............................................... 2-C-1
IMAGE READ MECHANISM ...................................... 1-2 [2] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-C-1
[1] Outline ............................................................ 1-2 DRIVE SECTION ................................................... 2-D-1
IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................... 1-3 [1] Composition ............................................... 2-D-1
[1] Outline ............................................................ 1-3 [2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-D-1
[2] Analog Processing ......................................... 1-3 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-D-1
[3] A/D Conversion .............................................. 1-3
[4] M1 (main) Control ...................................... 2-D-3
[4] Shading Correction ........................................ 1-3
[5] M4 (drum) Control ...................................... 2-D-3
[5] Brightness/Density Conversion ...................... 1-4
READ SECTION ..................................................... 2-E-1
[6] AE Processing ............................................... 1-4
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-E-1
[7] Text/Dot Pattern Identification ........................ 1-4
[8] Filtering .......................................................... 1-4 [2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-E-1
[9] Magnification Processing ............................... 1-5 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-E-1
[10] Reversal Processing ...................................... 1-6 [4] M12 (optics drive) Control ........................... 2-E-7
[11] Copy γ Correction .......................................... 1-6 [5] Exposure Control ...................................... 2-E-11
[12] Selector, SGU ................................................ 1-6 [6] Original Read Control ............................... 2-E-12
[13] Write Density Control ..................................... 1-6 [7] APS Control .............................................. 2-E-12
[14] Error Diffusion Processing ............................. 1-6 [8] AES Control .............................................. 2-E-14
[15] Image Compression Processing .................... 1-6 WRITE UNIT ........................................................... 2-F-1
[16] Memory .......................................................... 1-6 [1] Composition ................................................ 2-F-1
[17] Two-beam control .......................................... 1-6 [2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-F-1
IMAGE WRITE ........................................................... 1-7
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-F-2
[1] Outline ............................................................ 1-7
[4] M5 (polygon) Control .................................. 2-F-4
[2] Collimator lens ............................................... 1-8
[5] Image Write Control .................................... 2-F-6
[3] Beam combining prism .................................. 1-8
DRUM UNIT ........................................................... 2-G-1
[4] Compression Prism ........................................ 1-8
[5] Fine Adjustment Prism ................................... 1-8 [1] Composition ............................................... 2-G-1
[6] Polygon mirror ................................................ 1-8 [2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-G-1
[7] fθ lens ............................................................ 1-8 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-G-2
[8] Cylindrical Lenses .......................................... 1-9 [4] PCL/TSL Control ........................................ 2-G-5
[9] Index Sensor .................................................. 1-9 [5] Separation Claw Control ............................ 2-G-5
IMAGE FORMATION ............................................... 1-10 [6] Paper Guide Plate Control ......................... 2-G-6
[1] Charging ...................................................... 1-10 CORONA UNIT SECTION ..................................... 2-H-1
[2] Exposure ...................................................... 1-10 [1] Composition ............................................... 2-H-1
[3] Developing ................................................... 1-10 [2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-H-1
[4] Transfer ........................................................ 1-10 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-H-2
[5] Separation .................................................... 1-11 [4] Charging Control ........................................ 2-H-6
[6] Cleaning ....................................................... 1-11
[5] Transfer/Separation Control ....................... 2-H-7
[7] PCL .............................................................. 1-11
[6] M7 (charging wire cleaning) Control .......... 2-H-8
[7] M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning)
2. MAIN BODY Control ....................................................... 2-H-9
OUTLINE OF THE SYSTEM ................................... 2-A-1 DEVELOPING UNIT ................................................. 2-I-1
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................ 2-A-2
[1] Composition ................................................. 2-I-1
CENTER CROSS-SECTION ................................... 2-A-4
[2] Mechanism ................................................... 2-I-1
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM .................................... 2-B-1
[3] Disassembly/Assembly ................................ 2-I-2
[1] Main Drive ................................................... 2-B-1
[4] M3 (developing drive) Control ...................... 2-I-4
[2] Drum/Developing Drive ............................... 2-B-2
[5] M35 (agitator screw) control ........................ 2-I-5
[3] Paper Feed Drive ........................................ 2-B-3
[6] Developing Bias Control .............................. 2-I-5
[4] ADU Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive .......... 2-B-4
[7] Toner Density Control .................................. 2-I-6
[5] ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance Drive ............ 2-B-5
[8] Dmax Control ............................................... 2-I-7
[6] 1000-Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance
[9] Gradation Correction Control ....................... 2-I-8
Drive ............................................................ 2-B-6
[10] FM30 (developing suction) Control ............. 2-I-9
[7] 1500-Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance
Drive ............................................................ 2-B-7
CONTENTS-1
CONTENTS
TONER SUPPLY UNIT ........................................... 2-J-1 CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................... 2-R-1

[1] Composition ................................................ 2-J-1 [1] Composition ............................................... 2-R-1
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-J-1 [2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-R-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-J-2 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-R-2
[4] Toner Level Detection Control .................... 2-J-3 [4] FM14 (conveyance suction) Control .......... 2-R-4
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT ..................... 2-K-1 [5] SD5 (conveyance) Control ......................... 2-R-4
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-K-1 FIXING UNIT ........................................................... 2-S-1
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-K-1 [1] Composition ................................................ 2-S-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-K-1 [2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-S-1
[4] MC10 (cleaner) Control ............................... 2-K-4 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-S-2
PAPER FEED UNIT ................................................ 2-L-1 [4] Fixing Temperature Control ...................... 2-S-13
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-L-1 OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL ............................... 2-T-1
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-L-1 [1] Parts Through Which Current Flows
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-L-3 When the Main Switch is Turned OFF ........ 2-T-1
[4] Paper Feed Control ................................... 2-L-14 [2] Parts That Operate When the Main
[5] Paper Up-down Control ............................ 2-L-16 Switch is Turned ON ................................... 2-T-1
[6] Paper Size Detection Control .................... 2-L-17 [3] Cooling Fan Control .................................... 2-T-2
[7] No Paper Detection Control ...................... 2-L-19 [4] Operation Panel Control ............................. 2-T-4
LCT-1000 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE [5] Counter Control ........................................... 2-T-5
SECTION ............................................................... 2-M-1 [6] Option Control ............................................. 2-T-6
[1] Composition ............................................... 2-M-1
[2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-M-1
3. DIAGRAMS
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-M-2 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING .............. 3-1
[4] 1000 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING .......................... 3-4
Detection Control ....................................... 2-M-5 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 3-7
LCT-1500 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE JAM LIST .................................................................. 3-11
SECTION ............................................................... 2-N-1 [1] Paper Jam ..................................................... 3-11
[1] Composition ............................................... 2-N-1 [2] Trouble codes ................................................ 3-20
[2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-N-1 LIST OF UNPLUGGED CONNECTOR
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-N-2 (REFERENCE ONLY) .............................................. 3-28
[4] 1500 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper [1] Paper Jamming .............................................. 3-28
Detection Control ....................................... 2-N-5 [2] Trouble codes ................................................ 3-29
LCT PAPER TRAY SECTION ................................ 2-O-1 [3] Others ............................................................ 3-30
[1] Composition ............................................... 2-O-1 CONTROL BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................. 3-31
[2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-O-1 OPERATION BOARD/1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .......... 3-48
OPERATION BOARD/2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .......... 3-51
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-O-2
[4] Tray Up-down Control ................................ 2-O-5
DRUM BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ....................... 3-52
ADU PAPER EXIT/CONVEYANCE SECTION ....... 2-P-1
TONER CONTROL SENSOR BOARD
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-P-1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................. 3-53
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-P-1 TIMING CHART (A4/81/2" × 11", LIFE SIZE, TWO
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-P-2 COPIES, UPPER PAPER FEED) ............................ 3-54
[4] Selector Guide ............................................ 2-P-3 ADU TIMING CHART (A4/81/2" × 11", TWO
[5] ADU Cooling Fan Control ........................... 2-P-4 ORIGINALS, TWO SHEETS SET) ........................... 3-55
ADU PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION ..... 2-Q-1
[1] Composition ............................................... 2-Q-1
[2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-Q-1
[3] Disassembly and Assembly ....................... 2-Q-3
[4] Paper Feed/Reversal Control .................... 2-Q-7
[5] Conveyance Control .................................. 2-Q-8
CONTENTS-1
CONTENTS
4. ADJUSTMENT 47 MODE .................................................................. 4-55

HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION .......... 4-1 [1] 47 /Multi Mode Setting Method ...................... 4-55
[1]Structure ........................................................... 4-1 [2] Initial Setting ................................................ 4-57
ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS .......... 4-1 [3] Adjustment Mode List .................................. 4-57
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT WITH P [4] L Detection Adjustment ................................ 4-57
FUNCTION ................................................................. 4-3 [5] Dmax Level Correction ................................ 4-58
[1] Setting Method of P Function .......................... 4-3 [6] Gamma Correction Level Adjustment .......... 4-58
[2] Checking the Printer Count .............................. 4-3 [7] Input Check List ........................................... 4-59
[3] Checking the Total Count ................................ 4-3 [8] Output Check List ........................................ 4-61
[4] Checking the PM Count/Starting Date ............. 4-3 OTHER ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 4-65
[5] Checking the Drum Count ............................... 4-3 [1] Adjustment for Centering Error .................... 4-65
[6] Checking the Developing count ....................... 4-3 [2] 400% Leading Edge Timing and Black
[7] Checking the Density Shift (text/photo) ........... 4-3 Line Check ................................................... 4-68
[8] Checking the Density Shift (text) ..................... 4-4
[9] Checking the Density Shift (photo) .................. 4-4
[10] Checking the density shift
(INCREASE CONTRAST) ............................. 4-4
[11] Printing user data ........................................... 4-4
25 MODE .................................................................... 4-5
[1] Setting Method ................................................. 4-5
[2] Setting Software DIP SW ................................. 4-5
[3] Setting Tray Size ........................................... 4-12
[4] PM Count Reset ............................................ 4-13
[5] Setting PM Cycle ........................................... 4-13
[6] Data Collection .............................................. 4-14
[7] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced ............ 4-20
[8] Setting Key Operator Password .................... 4-22
[9] Setting EKC Master Key Code ...................... 4-23
[10] Setting Weekly Timer Master Key Code ..... 4-24
[11] Specifying Phone Number of Service
Center .......................................................... 4-25
[12] Setting and Displaying Serial Number ......... 4-26
[13] Displaying ROM Version .............................. 4-27
[14] 25 Mode Adjust Item List ............................. 4-28
36 MODE .................................................................. 4-29
[1] Setting Method ............................................. 4-29
[2] Charging Corona Current Adjustment .......... 4-29
[3] Transfer Current Adjustment ........................ 4-29
[4] Separation (AC) Current Adjustment ........... 4-29
[5] Separation (DC) Current Adjustment ........... 4-29
[6] Developing Bias Adjustment ........................ 4-29
[7] Charging Grid Voltage Adjustment .............. 4-30
[8] Drum Clock / Horizontal Adjustment ............ 4-31
[9] Restart Timing Adjustment ........................... 4-33
[10] Paper Feed Loop Adjustment ...................... 4-34
[11] Leading Edge Original Erasure
Adjustment ................................................... 4-35
[12] Optics Brake Adjustment ............................. 4-35
[13] Centering Adjustment .................................. 4-36
[14] Laser Adjustment ......................................... 4-38
[15] RADF Original Stop Position Adjustment ..... 4-40
[16] Resetting Standard Data .............................. 4-41
[17] Running Test Mode ...................................... 4-41
[18] Test Pattern Output ...................................... 4-42
[19] Test Pattern Density Setting ........................ 4-53
[20] Service Data Output ..................................... 4-53
CONTENTS
5. RADF
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................... 5-1
CENTER CROSS-SECTIONAL DRAWING ............... 5-2
EXTERNALS .............................................................. 5-2
DRIVE SECTION ....................................................... 5-3
PAPER FEED SECTION ............................................ 5-4
[1] Composition ................................................... 5-4
[2] Mechanisms ................................................... 5-4
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ...................... 5-5
[4] Paper Feed Control ...................................... 5-11
CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................... 5-12
[1] Composition ................................................. 5-12
[2] Mechanisms ................................................. 5-12
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................... 5-13
[4] Conveyance Control .................................... 5-16
REVERSAL SECTION ............................................. 5-17
[1] Composition ................................................. 5-17
[2] Mechanisms ................................................. 5-17
[4] Reversal/Exit Control ................................... 5-18
ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................... 5-20
ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING ............ 5-21
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ........................ 5-22
RADF OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ...................... 5-23
RADF CONTROL BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...... 5-24
RADF TIMING CHART (A4/81/2" × 11", ONE SIDE
ORIGINALS, THREE SHEETS SET) ....................... 5-26
RADF TIMING CHART (A4/81/2" × 11", TWO SIDE
ORIGINALS, TWO SHEETS SET) ........................... 5-26
CONTENTS
1. PROCESS
OUTLINE AND COMPOSITION ................................. 1-1
IMAGE READ MECHANISM ...................................... 1-2
[1] Outline ............................................................ 1-2
IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................... 1-3
[1] Outline ............................................................ 1-3
[2] Analog Processing ......................................... 1-3
[3] A/D Conversion .............................................. 1-3
[4] Shading Correction ........................................ 1-3
[5] Brightness/Density Conversion ...................... 1-4
[6] AE Processing ............................................... 1-4
[7] Text/Dot Pattern Identification ........................ 1-4
[8] Filtering .......................................................... 1-4
[9] Magnification Processing ............................... 1-5
[10] Reversal Processing ...................................... 1-6
[11] Copy γ Correction .......................................... 1-6
[12] Selector, SGU ................................................ 1-6
[13] Write Density Control ..................................... 1-6
[14] Error Diffusion Processing ............................. 1-6
[15] Image Compression Processing .................... 1-6
[16] Memory .......................................................... 1-6
[17] Two-beam control .......................................... 1-6
IMAGE WRITE ........................................................... 1-7
[1] Outline ............................................................ 1-7
[2] Collimator lens ............................................... 1-8
[3] Beam combining prism .................................. 1-8
[4] Compression Prism ........................................ 1-8
[5] Fine Adjustment Prism ................................... 1-8
[6] Polygon mirror ................................................ 1-8
[7] fθ lens ............................................................ 1-8
[8] Cylindrical Lenses .......................................... 1-9
[9] Index Sensor .................................................. 1-9
IMAGE FORMATION ............................................... 1-10
[1] Charging ...................................................... 1-10
[2] Exposure ...................................................... 1-10
[3] Developing ................................................... 1-10
[4] Transfer ........................................................ 1-10
[5] Separation .................................................... 1-11
[6] Cleaning ....................................................... 1-11
[7] PCL .............................................................. 1-11
PROCESS
OUTLINE AND COMPOSITION

Image read unit
Charging corona unit Image write unit
Image processing unit Polygon mirror
Developing unit
Fixing unit PCL
TSL
Cleaning Separation
Transfer OPC drum
unit corona unit
corona unit
Fig.1
In this digital copying machine, optical data (light beam) reflected from the original is converted into electrical signals, subjected to
image processing, then converted back into optical data (light beam) and directed onto the drum.
Figure 1 shows the composition of the machine, and Fig.2 an outline of the digital copying process.
Optical data Electrical signal Electrical signal

Original Image read Image processing
Image write
Optical data
PCL Charging Developing
Cleaning Separation ← Transfer corona
Fixing
Fig.2
1-1
PROCESS
IMAGE READ MECHANISM
Light source (halogen lamp) 2nd mirror
1st mirror Lens 3rd mirror
Image sensor
Fig.3
[1] Outline
A halogen lamp is used as the light source, and the light from
the lamp is directed onto the original.
The light reflected off the original is reflected by the 1st, 2nd and
3rd mirrors shown in Fig.1, then passed through the lens and
directed onto the CCD image sensor.
The CCD image sensor consists of 5000 pixels. One pixel is
7 µm in length, and the length on the original that can be read
by one pixel is 63.5 µm.
1-2
PROCESS
PROCESS-1
IMAGE PROCESSING
Brightness/density
CCD image A/D
Shading correction conversion, Copy γ correction
sensor conversion AE processing, Text/
dot pattern
judgement, Filter/
A/D Board magnification
processing
Reversal processing
Write density
Image Processing Board Selector/SGU 2-beam control
control
Image write
Data compression
Error diffusion Memory
and expansion
processing
Electronic RDH
Fig.4
[1] Outline 1. White correction

The analog signal produced by opto-electric conversion by the The voltage output from each pixel of the CCD sensor when
CCD sensor on the A/D board is subjected to analog process- the white reference plate is exposed to the light from the
ing, then A/D-converted, and subjected to image processing. exposure lamp is memorized as the maximum output value
Image processing consists of shading correction, brightness/ for that pixel.
density conversion, AE processing, text/dot pattern judge-
ment, filter/magnification change processing, copy γ correc- 2. Black correction
tion, write density correction, and 2-beam control. In addition, The output voltage from each pixel of the CCD sensor when
error diffusion processing and data compression are carried the exposure lamp is out is memorized as the minimum
out within electronic RDH. output voltage for that pixel.
* Based on the difference between the white and black
[2] Analog Processing data for each pixel memorized in 1 and 2 above, the
calculated result that indicates the number of the step
In the analog processing board, the minute signals from the
corresponding to the image data read from the original is
CCD sensor are amplified and also level-shifted into the A/D
output to an accuracy of 10 bits.
conversion range.
Amplification and level-shifting take place automatically at the (1)
Read width
shading correction timing by an electronic variable resistor,
+3
hence there is no need to perform manual adjustment.
White
0V
[3] A/D Conversion Read voltage Black
The image signals from the analog processing board are
converted one pixel at a time into 9-bit digital signals. (2)
Read width
[4] Shading Correction 512
Shading correction is done to even out the light distribution of White
the CCD sensor. The following correction takes place at the 0
Black
specified timing. After shading correction
(1)····A/D input
(2)····Shading output
Fig.5
1-3
PROCESS
[5] Brightness/Density Conversion [7] Text/Dot Pattern Identification

The signal resulting from shading correction corresponds to In order to copy an original under the optimum conditions, the
the light reflected off the original, hence it is generally called a text/dot pattern identification section judges whether the read
brightness signal. The brightness/density conversion section part is text, dot pattern or a photograph, and uses the results
converts the brightness signal into a density signal, as shown in the subsequent filtering section.
below.
[8] Filtering
Appropriate filtering takes place according to the kind of
255 original and the selected magnification.
(1) Text filter ................ Highlights the light and dark parts
of the original.
(2) Dot pattern filter ..... Reduces moire.
(3) Photograph filter .... Improves the gray scale repro-
duction.
Density
0
Brightness 1024
Fig.6
[6] AE Processing
A density that is suitable for the density of the original is
automatically selected by AE processing, and a suitable copy
made.
1. AE sampling range
(1) Platen mode: B5R width x Original length
1-4
PROCESS-1
PROCESS
[9] Magnification Processing 2. Horziontal magnification change processing

In an analog machine, the vertical magnification is changed by during reduction
changing the scanning speed of the exposure unit, and horizontal As shown in the example of Fig.11, if the pixel data obtained
magnification by changing the position of the lens. In this when the original is read by the CCD is D1 to D 5, the positions
machine, the vertical magnification is changed by changing of the read data when the image is reduced overlap each other
the scanning speed of the exposure unit, and the horziontal as indicated by R1to R5, hence the write positions fail to
magnification by means of electrical image processing. coincide with the read positions.Therefore, the write density is
The read unit of the CCD (63.5 µm) and the write unit of the determined as shown below.
laser (63.5 µm) are equal to each other, and remain unchanged
when the copy image is enlarged or reduced in the horizontal
direction. As a result, write data that corresponds exactly to the
write position when the image is enlarged or reduced in the Original read position D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
horizontal direction sometimes fails to exist.
1. Horizontal magnification change processing

during enlargement Data position when the R1 R2 R3 R4 R5
As shown in the example of Fig.10, if the pixel data obtained image is reduced
when the original is read by the CCD is D1 to D5, the
positions of the read data when the image is enlarged are
E1 to E 5.. However, the following problems will occur if the W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
Write position
write data consists of this read data alone.
(a) There will be a gap between one data and the next,
resulting in gaps in the image.
(b) The data position and write position will not coincide
exactly. Fig.11
Consequently, if read data that corresponds exactly to the
write position fails to exist, as indicated by the dotted lines 3. Density correction
of Fig.10, the write density is determined as shown below. Figure 11 is a graph the vertical axis of which represents
density (256 steps) and the horizontal axis of which represents
position: Here, the distance between E2 and E1 of Fig.10 is set
out on the horizontal axis and divided into 16 steps. If the
position with respect to write data W2 is “ ”, the density S can
be obtained using the following equation.
Original read position D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 E2 – E1

S = E1 + ( )x
16
Data position when E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 255

image is enlarged
E2
Write position W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8
W2
S
Density
Fig.10
E1
0
0 15
Position
Fig.12
1-5
PROCESS-1
PROCESS
[10] Reversal Processing [15] Image Compression Processing

This function reverses the input brightness data in order to This processing function stores compressed image data in the
reverse black and white when the reverse copy mode is memory to enable a large quantity of image data to be stored
selected. when electronic RDH is used.
[11] Copy γ Correction [16] Memory

The copy γ correction function selects the density curve The memory can hold about seventy 8.5 x11 size originals
corresponding to the density selected by the density button on consisting of average word processor text. The number of
the operation panel. The selected density curve is applied to pages will be less than this, if the originals include many
the data that was subjected to filter/magnification change photographs and dot pattern images.
processing.
Suitable density curves are provided for the text, photo and text [17] Two-beam control
photo modes. This function is used to adjust the timing of the laser data from
[12] Selector, SGU the two beams and also to detect and correct any deviation
Selector is a function that switches between the image signal between the two beams.
from the electronic RDH, and the read time image processed
signal.
SGU is a function that generates various test patterns.
[13] Write Density Control

The write density control function converts image data to the
optimum laser exposure based on the characteristics related to
the drum like drum potential, toner density, etc.
1.5
Copy density
0
255
Laser exposure level
Fig.13
[14] Error Diffusion Processing

Error diffusion processing is intended to make efficient use of
the installed memory and also to obtain a satisfactory copy
image.
1-6
PROCESS-1
PROCESS
IMAGE WRITE
CY2 lens
fθ lens unit
Polygon mirror
1st mirror
3rd mirror 2nd mirror
Stepping motor
Compression prism 1 CY1 lens
Collimator lens unit 1 Beam combining prism

Semiconductor laser LD1
Fine adjustment prism 2
Compression prism 2
Glass cover
Collimator lens unit 2

Index mirror Index sensor Fine adjustment
prism 1 Semiconductor laser LD2
2nd mirror
3rd mirror
1st mirror
Fig.14
[1] Outline
Semiconductor laser 1 Semiconductor laser 2
Figure 14 shows the layout of the various parts of the write unit. (LD1) (LD2)
The processed image data is output by semiconductor lasers.
The light output from these lasers is sent via the path shown in
Fig.15 to the OPC drum. Collimator lens unit 1 Collimator lens unit 2
Compression prism 1 Compression prism 2
Fine adjustment prism Fine adjustment prism

1 (sub scanning) 2 (Main scanning)
Beam combining
prism
Cylindrical lens 1 (cy1) Polygon mirror
fθ lens 1st mirror Cylindrical lens 2

unit 2nd mirror (Cy2)
3rd mirror OPC drum
Index mirror Index sensor
Fig.15
1-7
PROCESS
[2] Collimator lens [6] Polygon mirror

Figure 16 shows the function of the collimator lens. This lens This is a multi-sided mirror which converts the laser beam into
is used to form the light which diverges from a point source into a scanning beam. An octagonal mirror is used in this machine.
a parallel beam. Figure 18 shows the appearance of the polygon mirror.
Collimator Parallel
Semiconductor beam
lens
laser
Fig.18
[7] fθ lens
The polygon mirror rotates at a constant angular speed.
Consequently, if a general image forming lens were to be used,
the speed at which the laser beam scans the surface of the
Fig.16 drum would vary at the center and the both edge of the drum,
as shown in Fig.19.
[3] Beam combining prism

This prism causes the beams from the two semiconductor
lasers mounted at right angles to each other to be output in the
same direction. Laser beam
Drum;
Scanning
speed falls as
Semiconductor laser 1 beam
approaches
center of
Image forming lens drum.
Polygon
mirror
Fig.19
Beam combining prism An fθ lens is used to maintain the scanning speed constant
over the entire length of the drum.
Semiconductor laser 2
Fig.17
Laser beam
[4] Compression Prism

Drum;
This prism shapes the beam radiated from each semiconduc- Scanning
tor laser, and adjusts the height in the up-down direction. speed is
constant.
[5] Fine Adjustment Prism
This prism performs fine adjustment of the beam radiated from fθ lens Cylindrical
Polygon lens
each semiconductor laser in the left-right and up-down direc- mirror
tions.
Fig.20
1-8
PROCESS
PROCESS-1
[8] Cylindrical Lenses

Two lenses, cylindrical lens 1 (Cy1) and cylindrical lens 2
(Cy2), are used to eliminate the tilt error of the polygon mirror.
Cylindrical lenses 1 and 2 are installed before and after the
polygon mirror, as shown in Fig.21. The laser beam is focused
on the polygon mirror by means of cylindrical lens 1, and the
light reflected off the polygon mirror is once again focused on
the drum by means of cylindrical lens 2.
The optical relationship between the polygon mirror and the
drum face with respect to cylindrical lens 2 is that of image and
object. Consequently, even if the polygon mirror is tilted, the
light path is corrected by cylindrical lens 2, ensuring that the
beam is scanned along the same line.
Cylindrical lens
Semiconductor 1 (Cy1) f θ lens
Mirror
laser
Collimator lens Polygon Cylindrical lens

mirror 2 (Cy2)
Drum
Fig.21
[9] Index Sensor

This sensor is intended to determine the leading edge write
position for each scan in the axial direction of the drum, and
also to determine the positions of the two beams.
1-9
PROCESS
IMAGE FORMATION
[1] Charging [3] Developing
Charging corona unit
Fig.22 Fig.24
A negative charging method using a Scorotron is employed. A Negatively charged toner adheres to the parts of the surface of
constant negative voltage is applied to the charging plate and the drum where charge was erased during the exposure
back plate in order to maintain the potential of the drum process.
constant.
[2] Exposure [4] Transfer
Drum
Transfer
corona unit
TSL
Fig.23 Fig.25
Exposure is performed by means of the laser beams, causing The transfer corona unit causes the toner on the drum to be
the charge on the drum to be erased. Two laser beams are transferred to the paper by means of a discharge from the back
used to write (exposure) two lines of image data at a time. of the paper.
The TSL improves the transfer of the toner and the separation
of the paper.
1 - 10
PROCESS
[5] Separation [7] PCL
PCL
Drum
Separation corona unit
Fig.26 Fig.28
The separation corona unit erases the charge on the paper by The PCL erases the potential remaining on the surface of the
applying an AC discharge from the back of the paper, thus drum.
enabling the paper to separate from the drum under its own
weight.
[6] Cleaning
Cleaning blade
Toner collecting roller
Drum
Fig.27
Toner remaining on the drum is removed by the cleaning blade.
1 - 11
CONTENTS
2. MAIN BODY DEVELOPING UNIT ................................................. 2-I-1

OUTLINE OF THE SYSTEM ................................... 2-A-1 [1] Composition ................................................. 2-I-1
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................ 2-A-2 [2] Mechanism ................................................... 2-I-1
CENTER CROSS-SECTION ................................... 2-A-4 [3] Disassembly/Assembly ................................ 2-I-2
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM .................................... 2-B-1 [4] M3 (developing drive) Control ...................... 2-I-4
[1] Main Drive ................................................... 2-B-1 [5] M35 (agitator screw) control ........................ 2-I-5
[2] Drum/Developing Drive ............................... 2-B-2 [6] Developing Bias Control .............................. 2-I-5
[3] Paper Feed Drive ........................................ 2-B-3 [7] Toner Density Control .................................. 2-I-6
[4] ADU Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive .......... 2-B-4 [8] Dmax Control ............................................... 2-I-7
[5] ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance Drive ............ 2-B-5 [9] Gradation Correction Control ....................... 2-I-8
[6] 1000-Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive . 2-B-6 [10] FM30 (developing suction) Control ............. 2-I-9
[7] 1500-Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive . 2-B-7 TONER SUPPLY UNIT ........................................... 2-J-1
EXTERNAL SECTION ........................................... 2-C-1 [1] Composition ................................................ 2-J-1
[1] Composition ............................................... 2-C-1 [2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-J-1
[2] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-C-1 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-J-2
DRIVE SECTION ................................................... 2-D-1 [4] Toner Level Detection Control .................... 2-J-3
[1] Composition ............................................... 2-D-1 CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT ..................... 2-K-1
[2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-D-1 [1] Composition ................................................ 2-K-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-D-1 [2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-K-1
[4] M1 (main) Control ...................................... 2-D-3 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-K-1
[5] M4 (drum) control ....................................... 2-D-3 [4] MC10 (cleaner)control ................................ 2-K-4
READ SECTION ..................................................... 2-E-1 PAPER FEED UNIT ................................................ 2-L-1
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-E-1 [1] Composition ................................................ 2-L-1
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-E-1 [2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-L-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-E-1 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-L-3
[4] M12 (optics drive) Control ........................... 2-E-7 [4] Paper Feed Control ................................... 2-L-14
[5] Exposure control ....................................... 2-E-11 [5] Paper Up-down Control ............................ 2-L-16
[6] Original Read Control ............................... 2-E-12 [6] Paper Size Detection Control .................... 2-L-17
[7] APS Control .............................................. 2-E-12 [7] No Paper Detection Control ...................... 2-L-19
[8] AES Control .............................................. 2-E-14 LCT-1000 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION ...... 2-M-1
WRITE UNIT ........................................................... 2-F-1 [1] Composition ............................................... 2-M-1
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-F-1 [2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-M-1
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-F-1 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-M-2
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-F-2 [4] 1000 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper Detection Control ... 2-M-5
[4] M5 (polygon) Control .................................. 2-F-4 LCT-1500 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION ...... 2-N-1
[5] Image Write Control .................................... 2-F-6 [1] Composition ............................................... 2-N-1
DRUM UNIT ........................................................... 2-G-1 [2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-N-1
[1] Composition ............................................... 2-G-1 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-N-2
[2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-G-1 [4] 1500 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper Detection Control .. 2-N-5
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-G-2 LCT PAPER TRAY SECTION ................................ 2-O-1
[4] PCL/TSL Control ........................................ 2-G-5 [1] Composition ............................................... 2-O-1
[5] Separation claw control .............................. 2-G-5 [2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-O-1
[6] Paper Guide Plate Control ......................... 2-G-6 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-O-2
CORONA UNIT SECTION ..................................... 2-H-1 [4] Tray up-down Control ................................ 2-O-5
[1] Composition ............................................... 2-H-1 ADU PAPER EXIT/CONVEYANCE SECTION ....... 2-P-1
[2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-H-1 [1] Composition ................................................ 2-P-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-H-2 [2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-P-1
[4] Charging Control ........................................ 2-H-6 [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-P-2
[5] Transfer/Separation Control ....................... 2-H-7 [4] Selector Guide ............................................ 2-P-3
[6] M7 (charging wire cleaning) control ........... 2-H-8 [5] ADU cooling Fan control ............................. 2-P-4
[7] M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning) Control .. 2-H-9
CONTENTS
ADU PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION ..... 2-Q-1

[1] Composition ............................................... 2-Q-1
[2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-Q-1
[3] Disassembly and Assembly ....................... 2-Q-3
[4] Paper Feed/Reversal Control .................... 2-Q-7
[5] Conveyance Control .................................. 2-Q-8
CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................... 2-R-1
[1] Composition ............................................... 2-R-1
[2] Mechanisms ............................................... 2-R-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly .................. 2-R-2
[4] FM14 (conveyance suction) Control .......... 2-R-4
[5] SD5 (conveyance) Control ......................... 2-R-4
FIXING UNIT ........................................................... 2-S-1
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-S-1
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-S-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ................... 2-S-2
[4] Fixing Temperature Control ...................... 2-S-13
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL ............................... 2-T-1
[1] Parts Through Which Current Flows When the Main Switch is Turned OFF ... 2-T-1
[2] Parts That Operate When the Main Switch is Turned ON ....... 2-T-1
[3] Cooling Fan Control .................................... 2-T-2
[4] Operation Panel Control ............................. 2-T-4
[5] Counter Control ........................................... 2-T-5
[6] Option Control ............................................. 2-T-6
This section covers the structure, functions, operation and method of
disassembling and assembling the machine.
Observe the following precautions when performing disassembly and
assembly work.
1. Be sure to unplug the power cord before working on the machine.
2. Perform all reassembly work by reversing the order in which the
component was disassembled, unless otherwise specified.
3. Do not lose small parts (screws, etc.) or insert them in the wrong
place.
4. Install all parts completely before operating the machine.
5. Do not loosen the screws indicated as disallowed for removal.
MAIN BODY
OUTLINE OF THE SYSTEM
Finisher F-8220
Video interface kit
Key counter
Large capacity tray

ST-3500
Printer controller
Tandem kit Network card
2-A-1
MAIN BODY
BODY-1
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. Type Special functions: Sheet/Cover Interleave, Chapter,
Type: Console type Combination (2-in-1, 4-in-1, 8-in-
(floor-mounted type) 1, overlay), Booklet, Transpar-
Copying method: Indirect electrostatic method ency Interleave, Image Insert,
Original table method: Fixed Book Copy, Mixed Original, Text
Photosensitive Photo Enhance (text/photo/pen-
material: OPC cil), Reverse Image, Repeat,
Sensitizing method: Laser writing method Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Lay-
Resolution: Copier 400 DPI out, Thin/Thick Paper, Image
Printer 600 DPI Shift, Non-image Area Erase,
Paper feed method: Two stacked trays (500 sheets x memory function, density moni-
2, 80 g/m2 ) (21lb) tor, single step, density shift, print-
Multi by-pass tray (100 sheets, ing function, copy reservation,
80 g/m2) (21lb) original rotation, weekly timer, job
LCT (1000 sheets/1500 sheets, memory
80 g/m2) (21lb)
3. Copy Paper
2. Functions Plain paper High quality paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Originals: Sheets, books, solid objects (16lb to 24lb)
Original size: Max A3/11" × 17" Special paper * Label paper
Copy size: A3 to A5/11" × 17" to 51/2" × 81/2" (By-pass feed * OHP film
Magnification (By-pass feed * Recycled paper
only)
Fixed magnifications: 100%, 200%, 155%, 129%, 77%, only) * High quality paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2,
65%, 50% 13lb to 16lb) (91 g/m2 to 130 g/m2, 24lb
Special ratio to 34lb)
magnifications: 3 modes
Zoom magnification: 33% to 400% (1% steps) 4. Options
Vertical magnification: 33% to 400% (1% steps) Finisher (F-8220)
Horizontal Large capacity tray (ST-3500)
magnification: 33% to 400% (1% steps) Key counter
(In the very high mode, how- Printer controller
ever, the magnification range is Network card
65% to 400%) Video interface kit
Warm-up time: Approx. 7 minutes Tandem kit
(20°C/68°F, rated voltage)
First copy time (seconds) 5. Particulars of Machine
Size A4/81/2" × 11" Power source: 120 V AC ±10%, 60 Hz , 20A
Manual 3.9
AE 4.4 Power consumption: Max 2100 W (230 V)/1800 W
APS 3.9 (120 V) (when all options are
connected)
Continuous copy speed (life size, copies/minute) Weight: Approx. 208 kg/457.6 lbs (main
body 194 kg/426.8 lbs, RADF
Size A4/81/2" × 11" 14 kg/30.8 lbs)
A4/81/2" x 11" 60
Number of
continuous copies: 1 to 999
Copy density selection: AES, manual
Arbitrarily set density (2 modes)
2-A-2
MAIN
MAINBODY-1
BODY
Machine dimensions
28 " 28.6" 43.1"
6. Maintenance
Maintenance interval: Every 150,000 copies
7. Copy Materials
Developer
Toner
Drum: OPC drum (φ 80 mm)
8. Machine Operating Environment

Temperature:10 to 30°C/50 to 86°F
Humidity: 10 to 80% RH
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
2-A-3
MAIN BODY
CENTER CROSS-SECTION
Charging
Exposure lamp corona unit ADF
Cleaning section
PCL
Image read unit
Image write unit

Image processing section
Developing unit
Fixing unit
Paper feed section
Upper tray
ADU paper exit/

conveyance unit
Conveyance unit
2nd paper feed unit
Lower tray
Transfer corona unit

ADU paper feed/
conveyance section
TSL
Separation corona unit

LCT-1000 tray
LCT-1500 tray
2-A-4
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

[1] Main Drive
Conveyance belt
Toner conveyance screw
Main Motor
(M1)
Cleaner clutch
2nd paper feed roller (MC 10)
Timing belt
2nd paper feed MC

(MC3)
2-B-1
[2] Drum/Developing Drive
Drum
Drum motor (M4)
Agitator wheel
Developing sleeve
Agitator screw motor (M35)
Developing drive motor (M3)
Agitator screw
2-B-2
[3] Paper Feed Drive
Upper tray motor (M17)

Lower tray motor
(M18)
By-pass roller
By-pass paper feed roller
Double feed
prevention roller
Paper feed rollers
Feed rollers
B Double feed
prevention rollers
2-B-3
[4] ADU Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive
Timing belt
Paper exit rollers Timing belt
ADU timing CL (CL153)
Timing belt
Timing belt
Paper exit rollers
ADU reversal CL
(CL152)
ADU paper feed motor

(M151)
Conveyance roller
ADU paper feed CL

(CL151) Reversal roller
2-B-4
[5] ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance Drive
Paper exit rollers
Timing belt
A
Conveyance rollers
Timing belt
2-B-5
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM-1
DIAGRAM
[6] 1000-Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive
Conveyance roller (upper)
Conveyance (CL 3)
Paper feed roller

Conveyance roller
(lower)
Feed roller
Double feed
prevention roller
LCT first feed MC

(CL 1)
2-B-6
DRIVE
DRIVE SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
DIAGRAM-1
[7] 1500-Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive
Timing belt
Horizontal conveyance
rollers Paper feed roller
C
Feed roller
Timing belt
Double feed prevention roller
LCT 1st paper feed CL (CL2)
LCT paper feed motor (M140)
2-B-7
EXTERNAL SECTION
EXTERNAL SECTION
[1] Composition
Main switch
Operation panel
ADF
Left side
upper
cover Front door
By-pass feed
Paper exit tray table
Paper feed
Upper tray
and
Lower tray conveyance
ADU door
conveyance
ADU Right side
door
upper cover Rear cover
LCT-1000 LCT
Left side tray conveyance door
lower cover
LCT-1500 Outer I/F connector

Right side lower cover
tray
[2] Disassembly and Re-assembly

Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
from the power outlet.
Caution: When replacing the ozone filter, fix the new filter (2) Pull forward the ozone filter (K) and remove it.
securely to the inside of the main body.
1. Replacing the ozone filter (K)
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the nine set screws, then remove the rear
cover.
ADF
Ozone
Set screw
filter (K)
Set screws
Set screws Set screws (3) Re-install the ozone filter in the opposite sequence to
Set screw
removal.
Set screw
2-C-1
EXTERNAL SECTION
2. Replacing the developing suction filter 3. Replacing the dust proof filter
a. Procedure a. Procedure
(1) Remove the rear cover. (1) Open the ADF.
(2) Remove the lock, open the filter box, and remove the (2) Remove the two set screws, then remove the glass
developing suction filter. holder.
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove the original
stopper plate.
(4) Remove the platen glass.
Set screws
Developing
suction filter Original
stopper plate Platen
glass
Filter box
Glass
holder
(3) Re-install the suction filter in the opposite sequence to Set screws
removal.
(5) Remove the two set screws, and remove the upper
cover (center).
Set screw
Set screw
Upper cover (center)
2-C-2
EXTERNAL SECTION
(6) Remove the dustproof filter, then install the new

dustproof filter.
Dust proof
filter
(7) Install the other parts in the reverse sequence to

removal.
2-C-3
DRIVE SECTION
DRIVE SECTION
[1] Composition
Drum motor (M4)
Agitator screw motor (M35)
Main motor (M1)

Developing drive motor (M3)
Drum drive unit
[2] Mechanisms a. Procedure

(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body. (Refer to
Mechanism Method "Drum unit section".)
*1 Drum drive Gear drive (dedicated motor) (2) Remove the nine set screws, then remove the rear
*1 Developing sleeve drive Gear drive (dedicated motor) cover.
*1 Developing agitator drive Gear drive (dedicated motor) (3) Remove the three set screws, then remove the fly-
2nd paper feed drive Timing belt + gear drive wheels (three).
conveyance drive Timing belt + gear drive
Fixing and exit drive Timing belt + gear drive
ADU lead-in drive Timing belt + gear drive
Toner recycle Timing belt + gear drive
*1: Separation of the different parts of the drive system

The drum, developing sleeve and developing agitator of
this machine are driven by separate motors in order to
improve the serviceability of the drum unit and also to
improve the developing performance.
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly Set screws

1. Removing and Re-installing the Main Motor
Unit Flywheels
Caution: Be sure to remove the drum carriage before remov-
ing or re-installing the main motor unit.
If you leave the drum carriage installed, the cleaning
blade is likely to be damaged because the drum will
turn when you remove or re-install the flywheel.
2-D-1
DRIVE
DRIVE SECTION
SECTION-1
(4) Disconnect the relay connector and the four connec- (4) Remove the four set screws, then remove the paper
tors (CN16, 204, 205 and 324), then remove the cable feed drive plate.
from the wiring clamp.
(5) Remove the four set screws, slide the main motor unit Set screws Paper feed drive plate
to the right, then pull it forward and remove it. Set screw
Caution: DO NOT strike the main motor unit against the drum
drive gear when removing or re-installing it.
Slotted hole
Guide screw
Set screws
Connector (CN16)
Main motor
unit
Connector
(CN204, 205)
(5) Remove the poly slider and the paper feed input gear.
Drum Relay
drive gear Connector Caution: Do not forget to re-install the poly slider when re-
installing the paper feed input gear.
Set screw
Set screw (6) Remove the bearing and developing drive gear, then
Connector (CN324)
pull out the pin remaining in the paper feed drive shaft.
(6) Re-install the main motor unit in the opposite sequence (7) Remove the main body drive belt from the drive pulley.
to removal. (8) Remove the E ring from the paper feed drive shaft, then
remove the drive pulley.
2. Replacing the paper feed drive shaft and Fixing (9) Remove the paper feed drive shaft, then pull out the pin
input gear remaining in paper drive shaft.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the main motor unit. Bearing
(2) Remove the three set screws, then remove the fixing Developing drive gear
drive plate. Paper feed drive shaft
(3) Remove the fixing input gear.
Pins
E ring
Set screws Fixing input
gear Poly slider Drive pulley
Fixing drive
plate
Paper feed
input gear
Main body drive belt
(10) Re-install the above parts in the opposite sequence to

removal.
2-D-2
DRIVE
DRIVESECTION-1
SECTION
[4] M1 (main) Control [5] M4 (drum) Control
40VDC 88-5 24VDC 99-2

PGND 88-3 PGND 99-5
DCPS
DCPS
M1 5VDC 30-A8 M4
5VDC 30-A1 SGND 30-A9
M1 CONT 30-A3 M4 CONT 30-A10
M1 PLL 30-A4 M4 H/L 30-B6
SGND 30-A5 M4 CLK 30-A11
M1 CLK 30-A2 M4 PLL 30-A12

CB CB
M1 (main) is controlled by the CB (control board). M4 (drum) is controlled by the CB (control board).
1. Operation 1. Operation
M1 is a 40 V drive DC motor which drives the ADU paper M4 is a 24 V drive DC motor which drives the drum and the
exit/conveyance, toner recycle, conveyance, 2nd paper cleaning guide roller. M4 is PLL-controlled by reference
feed and fixing sections. M1 is PLL-controlled by feedback Signal and feedback signal from a speed sensor installed
signals from a speed sensor installed inside M1 itself, inside M4 itself, maintaining it at a constant speed.
maintaining it at a constant speed. M4 goes ON when the Copy button is pressed, and goes
M1 goes ON when the Start Print is pressed, and goes OFF OFF again when the final copy has been exited.
again when the final copy has been exited.
During warm-up, M1 rotates, causing the fixing roller to 2. Signals
rotate. a. Input signal
(1) M4PLL (M4 → CB)
2. Signals [L] is output when M4 reaches the specified speed.
a. Input signal
(1) M1 PLL (M1 → CB) b. Output signals
M1 rotation monitoring signal (1) M4CONT (CB → M4)
[H]: Abnormal stop or rotation M4 drive control signal
[L]: Normal rotation [L]: M4 ON
[H]: M4 OFF
b. Output signals (2) M4 H/L (CB → M4)
(1) M1 CONT (CB → M1) M4 rotational speed switchover signal
M1 drive control signal Normally [H]: 370 mm/sec
[L]: M1 ON [L]: 185 mm/sec
[H]: M1 OFF (3) M4CLK (CB→M4)
(2) M1 CLK (CB → M1) Reference clock signal for controlling the speed of M4
M1 rotational speed control reference clock signal
2-D-3
READ SECTION
READ SECTION
[1] Composition
Exposure unit
CCD unit
Front
Optics cooling fan (FM2)

Optics drive wire
A/D converter board

V mirror unit (ADB)
(2nd and 3rd mirrors)
Optics rail (R)
[2] Mechanisms [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly

1. Screws that must not be removed
Mechanism Method
a. The 14 set screws of the CCD unit
Light source Halogen lamp (170 W)
Exposure Light source shift slit exposure
Scanning 1st, 2nd and 3rd mirror shift Screws that must Screws that must
A/D converter
not be removed not be removed
Lamp power supply Lamp cord board (ADB)
Cooling of optics Cooling of intake air using a fan
Screws that must

not be removed
Screws that must
not be removed
2-E-1
READ SECTION
2. Removing and Re-installing the CCD Unit (4) Remove the eight set screws, then remove the lens
Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged light blocking cover 1.
Set screws
Caution: Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing
the CCD unit. (For details, refer to "Adjustment
section".)
Set
a. Procedure screws
(1) Remove the glass holder plate, original stopper plate, Set
platen glass and upper cover (center). screws
(2) Remove the two set screws, then remove the glass
stopper plate.
Set screws
Lens light
blocking
cover 1
(5) Remove the left side upper cover.

(6) Disconnect the connector (CN49).
(7) Remove the eight set screws, then remove the fan
mounting plate.
Glass stopper plate Connector (CN49) Set screws
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove the lens light
blocking cover 2.
Set screws
Set screws Set screws
Fan mounting plate
Lens light
blocking cover 2
2-E-2
READ SECTION
(8) Disconnect the two connectors (CN420 and 412). 3. Replacing the Exposure Lamp
Caution:
1. Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
Electronic RDH
2. DO NOT touch the glass of the exposure lamp with
bare hands.
Caution:
1. Be sure to install the exposure lamp with the maker's
mark facing the front side of the main body.
2. The nipple on the exposure lamp must face the paper
feed side.
3. Be sure to check the image after installing the expo-
sure lamp. (For details, refer to "Adjustment section".)
Connector (CN420) a. Procedure

(1) Remove the glass holder plate, original stopper plate,
Connector (CN412) platen glass and the upper cover (center).
(2) Move the exposure unit to the notch on the main frame
fitted on the paper exit side.
(9) Remove the two set screws, then remove the CCD (3) Remove the two set screws, then remove mirror sup-
unit. port plate 2.
Mirror support plate 2
Set screws
Reflector mirror 1
Exposure lamp
CCD unit
Spring Set screws
Lamp terminal
(10) Re-install the CCD unit in the opposite sequence to

(4) To prevent the exposure lamp from dropping out, insert
removal.
a sheet of paper from beneath reflector mirror 1 and
wrap it around the exposure lamp.
(5) Remove the spring, then slide the lamp terminal to the
rear and remove the exposure lamp. (Lift out the lamp
while holding it with the paper that you wrapped around
it.)
(6) Re-install the exposure lamp in the opposite sequence
to removal.
2-E-3
READ SECTION
4. Removing and Re-installing the Exposure Unit (3) Move the exposure unit to the notch in the main body
Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged frame on the paper exit side.
from the power outlet. (4) Remove the set screw, then remove the wiring fixing
Caution: plate and disconnect the connector (CN384).
1. Use a optics positioning jig when installing the expo- (5) Remove the four set screws, then remove the expo-
sure unit. sure unit.
2. Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing
the exposure unit. (For details, refer to "Adjustment Set screw
section".)
Connector
(CN384)
a. Removal procedure
(1) Remove the glass holder plate, original stopper plate,
platen glass and upper cover (center).
(2) Remove the seven set screws, then remove the opera-
tion panel and disconnect three connectors (CN219,
Set screws
223 and 383).
Wiring fixing
plate Set screws
Set screws
Connector
Connector (CN223)
(CN383)
Exposure unit
b. Re-installation procedure
(1) Insert the Optics positioning jig into the exposure unit
mounting position from the front.
Operation Connector
(2) Slide the exposure unit to the paper feed side until it
panel (CN219)
touches the Optics positioning jig.
Set screws
(3) Install the exposure unit on the optics wire using the
four set screws.
Exposure unit
Optics positioning jig
2-E-4
READ SECTION
5. Installing the optics wire (6) Move the V mirror unit to the paper feed side, then
Caution: insert the Optics positioning jigs from the front so as to
1. When winding the wire around the pulley, be sure to fix the V mirror unit. Ensure that the jigs pass through
run the wire tightly to ensure that it does not ride up the the V mirror unit.
side of the pulley. (7) Insert the Optics positioning jigs to the exposure unit
2. When re-tensioning or replacing the optics wire, be mounting position from the front.
sure to use the optics positioning jig.
3. Be sure to perform image adjustment after replacing or
re-installing the wire. (For details, refer to "Adjustment
V mirror unit
section".) Exposure unit
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the exposure unit.
(2) Remove the glass stopper plate.
(3) Remove the six set screws, then remove the front door.
(4) Disconnect the two connectors (CN381 and 388).
(5) Remove the five set screws, then remove the front
cover/lower.
Connector
(CN388)
Connector Optics
(CN381) positioning jigs
Front cover/lower
Set
screws
Set screws
Front door
Set screws
2-E-5
READ SECTION
(8) The exposure unit mounting piece is installed on the Caution:

optics wire in advance. The position of the mounting 1. Ensure that there is a metal bead at the end of the outer
piece differs depending upon whether it is on the front wire, and a wire terminal at the end of the inner wire.
or the rear wire. Use the wire that has the shorter length 2. Pull out the outer wire from the top of the drive pulley
from the metal bead at the end to the mounting piece, in the paper exit direction, and pull out the inner wire
at the rear. from the bottom of the drive pulley in the paper feed
(9) Place the metal bead at the mid-point of each optics direction.
wire in the mounting hole of the drive pulley, then wind
five turns around the pulley to the outside, and four
turns to the inside, starting from this point.
Five turns Four turns Four turns

9 9 Five turns
Wire stopper
Metal bead
10
Front Rear
Metal bead
Metal bead
Pulley 1 Optics wire (rear)

V mirror unit Pulley 11
Drive pulley
Metal bead
Rear
it
e un ce
su
r pie
x po nting Wire
E ou stopper Pulley 3
m
Metal bead
Spring
Optics wire (front)
Pulley 2
V mirror unit
Wire stopper
Spring fixing plate
13
Set screws
Spring fixing plate
10 Metal bead
Exposure unit
Wire stopper Metal bead mounting piece Lug terminal 8
Short Metal bead Optics wire (rear)

Pulley
V mirror unit
11 Optics wire (front)
Long
2-E-6
READ
READSECTION-1
SECTION
(10) After winding the outer wire, fix it to the wire stopper via [4] M12 (optics drive) Control
the outer side of pulley 1 and the V mirror pulley.
Note: There are two grooves in the wire stopper. Ensure that
M12 CLK 223-1 224-1 M12 DRIVE C 225-1
the outer groove is at the rear and the inner groove at 223-2 224-2 M12 DIR M12 DRIVE A 225-2
the front. M12 MODE 0 223-3 224-3 M12 DRIVE B 225-3
(11) Pass the inner wire through the notch in the wire M12 MODE 1 223-4 224-4 M12 MAG A' 228-1
M12 MODE 2 223-5 224-5 M12 MAG A 228-2
stopper, reverse it at pulley 2, then pass it around the M12 F/R 223-6 224-6 M12 MAG B' 228-3
inside of the V mirror pulley and also around pulley 3, M12
M12 CONT 223-7 224-7 M12 MAG B 228-4
in that sequence, and attach the wire terminal to the M12 BRAKE 223-8 224-8 M12 MAG C' 228-5
M12 NCR 223-9 224-9 M12 MAG C 228-6
spring fixing plate. At this time, temporarily fix the 223-10 224-10 M12 LD SGND 228-7
spring fixing plate with the set screw. 5VDC 228-8
(12) Install the other wire using the same procedure. M12 FG 228-9
(13) Slacken each screw that was temporarily fixed, then

226-5 78-1 SGND
install the spring on the spring fixing plate and fix each
226-1 78-2 40VDC
screw once again. 226-2 78-3 PGND
226-3 78-4 24VDC
226-4 78-5 PGND
OPMDB DCPS1
5VDC 9-A3 72-3

PS3 9-A4 72-2
PS3
73-3
PS4 9-A5 73-2
PS4
66-3
PS5 9-A6 66-2
PS5
74-3
PS7 9-A7 74-2
PS7
5VDC 9-B8 77-3

PS1 22-A2 77-2
PS1
67-3
PS8 22-A4 67-2
PS8
76-3
PS2 9-A2 76-2
PS2
CB
M12 (optics drive) is driven by the OPMDB (optics motor drive

board), and is controlled by the CB (control board).
Related signals are PS1 (optics overrun), PS2 (optics ADF-
AE), PS3 (shading), PS4 (paper restart), PS5 (optics return),
PS7 (optics timing) and PS8 (platen glass sensor).
1. Operation
a. Operation of M12
M12 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is driven using
a 3-phase bipolar method. The current flowing through the
windings is switched according to the position of the rotor
which is detected by a sensor (magnetic sensor) inside the
motor.
2-E-7
READ SECTION
b. Scanning operation of the exposure unit f. Other operations

Scanning speed (1) During copying
a) When manual density has been selected
Magnification Scanning speed 1 During a platen copy operation
Forward 370 mm/sec (life size)
Return 1520 mm/sec
c. Position of each sensor (Setting a original) (Exposure unit)
Exposure scan
Press Copy button
PS3 PS7 PS5 PS4 PS2 PS1
d. Home position sensor of the exposure unit

If the exposure unit is not in the home position when the
main switch is turned ON, M12 rotates at low speed in the 2 During an ADF copy operation
reverse direction until PS7 (optics sensor) and PS5 (optics
return) are turned ON, thus detecting the fact that the optics (Original conveyance) (Exposure unit)
unit is in the home position.
e. Shading correction read operation

1st original feed
At the position where PS3 (shading) goes ON, the light Exposure scan
Stop
reflected from the white reference plate installed under-
neath the glass stopper plate is read. 2nd original feed
Exposure scan
Stop
Home position
PS3 (PS7 and PS5 ON)
b) AES mode
Shading correction 1 During a platen copy operation
read operation
(Setting a original) (Exposure unit)

L1 ON
Copy button pressed AES scan

L1 OFF
Exposure scan
2-E-8
READ SECTION
2 During an ADF copy operation (1-1) b) AES mode
(Original conveyance) (Exposure unit) (Original conveyance) (Exposure unit)
1st original feed

Prescan AES scan
Copy button pressed
Stop
AES scan
Stop
Exposure scan (rear half)
Exposure scan
2nd original feed
AES scan
Stop
Exposure scan (front half)
Exposure scan
Stop
3 During an ADF copy operation (1-2, 2-1, 2-2) 2. Signals

a. Input signals
(Original conveyance) (Exposure unit) (1) PS1 (PS1 → CB)
Exposure unit overrun detection signal
1st original feed [L]: The exposure unit is in the overrun position.
AES scan
Stop [H]: The exposure unit is not in the overrun position.
(2) PS2 (PS2 → CB)
Stop The brake is applied to M12 after the specified period
Exposure scan from when PS2 goes ON during the return scan of the
Stop
exposure unit. Also, when the ADF (1-1 mode) is used,
2nd original feed AES read starts when PS2 goes ON.
Stop AES scan [L]: Exposure unit detected
[H]: Exposure unit not detected
(3) PS3 (PS3 → CB)
Exposure scan White reference plate read position detection signal
[L]: The exposure unit is in the white reference plate
read position.
[H]: The exposure unit is not in the white reference
plate read position.
(4) PS4 (PS4 → CB)
(2) Book copy mode
The timer that determines the 2nd paper feed start
a) When manual density has been selected
timing starts when PS4 goes ON during the forward
scan of the exposure unit.
(Setting a original) (Exposure unit)
[L]: Exposure unit detected
(5) PS5 (PS5 → CB)
Exposure scan (rear half) This signal is used to detect the return position and also
Copy button pressed the home position of the exposure unit.
Exposure scan (front half) [H]: Exposure unit not detected
(6) PS7 (PS7 → CB)
This signal is used to detect the return position and also
the home position of the exposure unit.
(7) PS8 (PS8 → CB)
This signal is used to detect the original glass is set or
not.
[L]: Original glass detected
[H]: Original glass not detected
2-E-9
READ SECTION
(8) M12 PLL (OPMDB → CB) (2) M12 CONT (CB → OPMDB)
[L] is output when M4 reaches the specified speed. M12 ON/OFF control signal
(9) M12 MAG A/A' (M12 → OPMDB)
M12 MAG B/B' (M12 → OPMDB) [L]: M12 ON
M12 MAG C/C' (M12 → OPMDB) [H]: M12 OFF
These are the output signals from the sensors (mag- (3) M12 CLK (CB → OPMDB)
netic sensors) contained in M12. OPMDB detects the M12 rotational speed control reference clock signal
position of the rotor of the motor by means of these (4) M12 F/R (CB → OPMDB)
signals, and switches over the M12 DRIVE A to C Signal used to control the rotational direction of M12
output. [L]: Forward operation
(10) M12 FG (M12 → OPMDB) [H]: Return operation
This is a feedback signal from the rotational speed (5) M12 BRAKE (CB → OPMDB)
sensor contained in M12. It is compared with the M12 M12 brake control signal
CLK signal from the CB, and the output voltage ad- (6) M12 NCR (CB → OPMDB)
justed so that the feedback signal becomes the same M12 brake control signal
as the M12 CLK signal, thus controlling the rotational (7) M12 MODE 0, 1, 2 (CB → OPMDB)
speed of M12. M12 rotational speed control signal
Eight rotational speed modes are activated by combi-
b. Output signals nations of these three signals.
(1) M12 DRIVE A, B, C (OPMDB → M12)
This is the M12 drive signal. While M12 is rotating,
voltages are output sequentially from M12 DRIVE A to
C, and applied to M12.
The voltage from each output that is applied to M12
consists of the pulses shown below. The pulse width
of this output changes according to the rotation condi-
tion of M12, as shown in the figure, and as a result the
RMS value of the voltage applied to M12 changes,
causing the speed to be regulated.
M12 DRIVE A
M12 DRIVE B
M12 DRIVE C
2 - E - 10
READ SECTION
[5] Exposure Control 2. Signals

a. Input signals
(1) L1 FB (CVR → CB)
This signal informs the CB of the lit or unlit state of L1.
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF or broken
L1 CONT 60-A2 29-2 AC (H) 380-1 AC (H)
(2) RL1 INHIBIT (CVR → CB)
60-A4 29-3 L1 FB AC (C) 380-3 AC (C)
60-A1 29-1 RL INHIBIT f1 This signal turns OFF RL1 if an abnormality occurs in
CVR H/L 60-A3 29-4 L1 DRIVE 1 385-3 L1 the machine.
60-A10 29-5 24VDC L1 DRIVE 2 385-1
[L]: Abnormal
60-A5 29-6 SGND
CVR [H]: Normal
CB
b. Output signal
(1) L1 CONT (CB → CVR)
24VDC 60-B10
RL DRIVE 60-B9
RL1 This is a control signal which turns L1 ON and OFF.
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF
(2) CVR H/L (CB → L1)
CVR output voltage switching signal
[L]: Low output
Power is supplied to L1 (exposure) from the CVR (exposure [H]: High output
lamp regulated power supply) and is controlled by the CB (3) L1 DRIVE1, 2 (CVR → L1)
(control board). L1 drive signal
(4) RL1 DRIVE (CB → CVR → RL1)
1. Operation This signal controls RL1.
a. L1 light intensity control This signal becomes [H] and turns off RL1 if an abnor-
The light intensity from L1 is determined by the output mality occurs in the machine.
voltage from the CVR circuit.
Rated output: 53 V DC
b. Protection from abnormality
* Hardware timer circuit
If L1 remains ON for about 40±18 seconds or longer for
some reason or other, the hardware timer in the CVR
operates, turning RL1 (main) OFF. As a result, power to
the AC loads including L1 is cut off.
* Temperature fuse
If L1 exceeds a certain temperature, f1 (optics tempera-
ture fuse) melts, cutting off the current to L1. (f1 melting
temperature: 121°C/250°F)
2 - E - 11
READ SECTION
[6] Original Read Control [7] APS Control
481-A1 425-A1 420-40 411-1 5VDC 9-B8

PS6 9-B4
143-3
PS44 9-B5 143-2
PS44
CCD 137-3
PS45 9-B7 137-2
PS45
481-A12 425-A12 ADB
5VDC 22-A5
481-B1 425-B1
PS40 22-A6
134-3
PS41 22-A8 134-2
PS41
420-1 411-40 130-3

PS42 22-B1 130-2
PS42
481-B12 425-B12
CB
CB IPB
The original is read by the ADB (A/D converter board) and the APS takes place as a result of the signal read by the APS
CCD sensor installed on the ADB. sensor being sent to the CB (control board) when the original
cover is opened and closed.
1. Operation Related signals are PS45 (APS timing 1) and PS44 (book
The light reflected off the exposed original passes through a detection).
lens to the CCD sensor. The analog voltages that correspond
to the input light intensity are A/D-converted in the ADB, and 1. Operation
output to the IPB (image processing board). a. APS detection operation
APS detection is an operation that detects the paper size
a. Original read operation according to the particular ON/OFF combination of (APS
The original read timing is as follows. (long)), PS42 (APS (inner)).
(1) During a platen copy operation The APS sensor consists of LEDs and photosensors. APS
When PS4 (paper feed restart) goes ON. detection takes place as a result of the light emitted from
(2) During an ADF copy operation each LED being reflected off the original and received by
When the exposure unit is +2 mm toward the paper the photosensor.
feed side from the position at which PS4 goes ON.
The relation between each sensor and the paper size is
shown below.
Paper exit side
PS41
PS42
Photosensor
LED
2 - E - 12
READ SECTION
(3) PS45 (PS45 → CB)

Original cover opening/closing detection signal
Activates or deactivates the APS function.
APS sensor C C
[L]: ON (APS function activated)
Paper size PS41 PS42
[H]: OFF (APS function deactivated)
A3/11" x 17" ON ON
B4/81/2" x 14" ON OFF
A4R/81/2" x 11"R OFF OFF
B5R/81/2" x 51/2"R OFF OFF
A4/81/2" x 11" OFF ON ADF
B5/81/2" x 51/2" OFF OFF
PS45 goes ON
b. APS detection timing
APS detection takes place when PS45 goes ON or PS44
goes OFF.
APS detection stops when PS45 goes OFF or PS44 goes
ON.
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) PS41 (PS41 → CB)

Paper size detection signal
[L]: Paper is detected. (4) PS44 (PS44 → CB)
[H]: Paper is not detected. Original cover state detection signal
(2) PS42 (PS42 → CB) This signal is used to detect the raised state of the rear
Paper size detection signal part of the original cover when a book or other thick
[L]: Paper is detected. original is being copied.
[H]: Paper is not detected. When the rear part of the original cover is in a raised
state, PS44 is OFF, and [H] is output.
[L]: ON (APS function deactivated)
[H]: OFF (APS function activated)
2 - E - 13
SECTION
READ SECTION-1
[8] AES Control (2) ADF mode (1-1)

The read operation takes place from the point at which
PS2 (ADF-AES) goes ON during the return scan of the
481-A1 425-A1 420-40 411-1 exposure unit, either while the original is being con-
veyed through the ADF or after the original has been
placed in it.
<AES sampling range>
CCD (B5R/81/2" × 51/2"R width –20) × L
481-A12 425-A12 ADB
481-B1 425-B1
B5R/
420-1 411-40 81/2" × 51/2"R
width –20
481-B12 425-B12
CB IPB
S L
AES control takes place during an AES scan as a result of the L: Document travelling distance while the exposure
CCD sensor reading the original density and selecting the most unit moves between PS2 sensor and PS5/PS7
suitable copy γ correction curve. sensors in back-scan operation.
AES processing is done by the IPB (image processing board). S: Scan-start position varies with magnification ratio.
1. Operation
a. AES detection operation (3) ADF mode (1-2, 2-1, 2-2)
(1) During a platen copy operation The density of the original is read during the AES scan
When the Start Print button is pressed, an AES scan after the original has been placed in the ADF.
takes place, and the density is measured over the <AES sampling range>
range shown below. (B5R/81/2" × 51/2"R width –20) ×
<AES sampling range> (B5R/81/2" × 51/2"R width –20)
With APS detection:
(Document width –20) × (Document length –20)
Without APS detection:
(B5R/81/2" × 51/2"R width –20) ×
(B5R/81/2" × 51/2"R width –20) B5R/
81/2" × 51/2"R
width –20
10mm
B5R/81/2" × 51/2"R
width –20
10 mm
2 - E - 14
WRITE
WRITE
UNIT-1
UNIT
WRITE UNIT
[1] Composition
Index mirror
Collimator lens unit 1 Cylindrical lens 2
Index sensor board 3rd mirror
Laser driver board 1 Polygon mirror
Cylindrical lens 1
fθ lens
Laser driver board 2
Collimator lens
unit 2
Polygon driver board
2nd mirror
Beam combining prism
[2] Mechanisms CY2 lens

Mechanism Method fθ lens unit
*1 Scan Polygon mirror Polygon mirror
(Rotational speed: 21850 rpm)
2nd mirror
(400 dpi standard mode)
3rd mirror
Light source Laser diodes (two)
(Output: Max 35 mW)
Stepping motor
*2 Positioning Index sensor fine
CY1 lens
adjustment prism
*3 Laser beam combining Beam combining prism Compression Beam
prism combining prism
Semiconductor Fine adjustment
*1: Path of laser beam laser LD1 prism
The light output to each semiconductor is sent to the OPC Compression
drum via the collimator lens, compression prism, fine Glass cover prism
adjustment prism, beam combining prism, cylindrical lens Collimator
Index mirror lens unit
1, polygon mirror, fθ lens, 1st mirror, 2nd mirror, cylindrical
lens 2, and the 3rd mirror.
Fine adjustment
Index sensor prism Semiconductor
OPC drum 3rd mirror laser LD2
2nd mirror
1st mirror
2-F-1
WRITE UNIT-1
UNIT
*2: Positioning [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly

Each laser beam is positioned by the compression prism 1. Removing and Re-installing the Write Unit
and the fine adjustment prism. Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
This is not adjustable in the field. from the power outlet.
Warning:
*3: Combining the laser beams (1) Do not energize the write unit when it is not in the
The two laser beams are output at right angles with respect correct position.
to each other. The beam combining prism causes them to (2) Do not remove the cover from the write unit other
be output in the same direction. than to clean the polygon mirror.
If the laser beam gets into your eyes, you may lose
your sight.
(3) DO NOT remove the write unit for at least two
Semiconductor laser 1 minutes after turning OFF the main switch.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the glass holder plate, original stopper plate
and platen glass.
(2) Remove the two set screws, then remove the board
cover.
Beam combining prism

Set screws
Semiconductor laser 2
Board cover
(3) Remove the 11 set screws, then remove the board

protection cover.
Set screw
Set screws
Board
protection
cover
Set
screws
Set screws
Set screws
2-F-2
WRITE UNIT
(4) Disconnect the four connectors (CN421, 422, 423 and (7) Remove the eight set screws, then remove the write
424) from the image processing board (IPB). unit cover.
Image processing board (IPB)
Write unit cover
Set
screws
Connector Connector Set screw

Connector (CN421) Set screws
(CN422)
(CN424) Connector
(CN423)
(5) Slacken the five set screws, then remove the upper (8) Disconnect the connector (CN95).
cover on the right side. (9) Slacken the two set screws, then pull out the write unit.
(6) Remove the relay connector and the two set screws,
then remove the bypass-feed base.
Write unit
Connector
(CN95)
Relay
connector Set screws
Set screw
Set screw
Bypass-feed bese
(10) Re-install the write unit in the opposite sequence to
removal.
2-F-3
WRITE UNIT
2. Removing and Re-installing the Electronic RDH [4] M5 (polygon) Control

Board
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the top cover on the left side. (four screws)
M5 CONT 322-2 320-2 M5 DRIVE A 321-1
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN49). M5 CLK 322-3 320-3 M5 DRIVE B 321-2
(3) Remove the eight set screws, then remove the fan 322-4 320-4 M5 RDY M5 DRIVE C 321-3
mounting plate. M5 BREAK 322-6 320-5 M5 MAG A' 321-5

M5 MAG A 321-6
M5
CB M5 MAG B' 321-7
M5 MAG B 321-8
Connector (CN49) Set screws M5 MAG C' 321-9
PGND 88-3 320-6 M5 MAG C 321-10
40VDC 88-5 320-7 V MAG - 321-11
24VDC 99-2 320-8
DCPS PMDB
M5 (polygon) is driven by the PMDB (polygon driver board),

and is controlled by the CB (control board).
1. Operation
Fan mounting plate a. M5 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is driven
using a 3-phase bipolar method. The current flowing
through the windings is switched according to the
(4) Remove the set screw, then remove the board support position of the rotor which is detected by a sensor
piece 1. (magnetic sensor) inside the motor.
(5) Remove the two set screws, then pull out and remove This motor rotates the polygon mirror, causing the laser
the electronic RDH board. beams from LDB1 and 2 (laser diode boards 1 and 2) to
be scanned in the axial direction of the drum. The speed
of the motor is maintained constant by PLL control.
Electronic RDH board b. M5 is powered by 40 V DC. The rotational speed is as
Board support piece 1 follows.
State of the machine Rotational speed
During copy High speed (21,850rpm)
One of the following four speeds can
be selected using the "25" mode.
During idling • 21,850 rpm *
• 14,000 rpm *
• 11,024 rpm *
• 8,000 rpm *
• Stop *
Set screws * If the item marked * is selected, the rotational speed of

M5 switches over after the lapse of the specified time
Set screw
from the end of the copy process. The specified time can
be selected using the "25" mode among below.
(6) Re-install the electronic RDH in the opposite sequence (15 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec, 120 sec)
to removal.
2-F-4
WRITE UNIT
2. Signals d. PMDB output signal

a. CB output signals (1) VMAG- (PMDB → M5)
(1) M5 CONT (CB → PMDB) GND line to the rotor position sensors (magnetic sen-
This signal controls the ON/OFF state of M5. sors) contained in M5
L: M5 ON (2) M5 DRIVE A to C (PMDB → M5)
H: M5 OFF This is the drive output signal for M5. While M5 is
(2) M5 CLK (CB → PMDB) rotating, voltages are output sequentially from M12
This is a reference clock signal for PLL-controlling M5 DRIVE A to C, and applied to M5.
in the PMDB. The voltage from each output that is applied to M5
(3) M5 BREAK (CB → PMDB) consists of the pulses shown below. The pulse width
Signal which brakes M5 of this output changes according to the rotation condi-
L: Brake OFF tion of M5, as shown in the figure, and as a result the
H: Brake ON RMS value of the voltage applied to M5 changes,
b. CB input signal causing the speed to be regulated.
(1) M5 RDY (PMDB → CB)
This signal indicates the rotation condition of M5.
L: Specified rotational speed M5 DRIVE A
H: If the specified speed has not been reached
c. PMDB input signal M5 DRIVE B
(1) M5 MAG A/A' (M5 → PMDB)
(1) M5 MAG B/B' (M5 → PMDB) M5 DRIVE C
(1) M5 MAG C/C' (M5 → PMDB)
These are output signals from the position sensors
(magnetic sensors) contained in M5. The PMDB
detects the position of the rotor of the motor by means
of these signals, and switches over the M12 DRIVE A
to C output.
2-F-5
WRITE UNIT
[5] Image Write Control
425-A2 481-A2 IP REQ M40 PWR A 424-1

RESET 425-A3 481-A3 M40 PWR B 424-2
425-A4 481-A4 INDEX M40 DRIVE A 424-3
425-A5 481-A5 TXA 1 M40 DRIVE A' 424-4
M40
MEE V/V 425-A6 481-A6 M40 DRIVE B 424-5
M V/V 425-A7 481-A7 M40 DRIVE B' 424-6
M CLK CHG 425-A8 481-A8
DCORR 425-A9 481-A9 LD1 APC CONT 1 421-3 440-3
I YOBI 1 425-A10 481-A10 LD1 APC CONT 2 421-4 440-4
CB 425-B1 481-B1 IPB LD1 VIDEO 421-5 440-5
RXA 0 425-B2 481-B2 LD1 ALM 421-7 440-7
425-B3 481-B3 TXA 0 LD1 IRCLK 421-8 440-8 LDB1
RXA 1 425-B4 481-B4 LD1 INC 421-9 440-9
MTN V/V 425-B6 481-B6 LD1 U/D 421-10 440-10
MAPC CAL 425-B7 481-B7 LD1 C/S 421-11 440-11
MIND CHG 425-B8 481-B8 LD1 LPR 421-12 440-12
CORR 425-B9 481-B9
425-B10 481-B10 O YOBI 1 LD2 APC CONT 1 422-3 441-3
LD2 APC CONT 2 422-4 441-4
LD2 VIDEO 422-5 441-5
442-3 423-3 M INDEX 1 LD2 ALM 422-7 441-7
INDEXSB 442-5 423-5 M INDEX 2 LD2 IRCLK 422-8 441-8 LDB2

442-7 423-7 S INDEX 1 LD2 INC 422-9 441-9
442-9 423-9 S INDEX 2 LD2 U/D 422-10 441-10
423-11 HLVL LD2 C/S 422-11 441-11
423-12 IPR LD2 LPR 422-12 441-12
450-A1 428-B1 420-40 411-1
450-A50 428-B50 ADB

E-RDH 450-B1
RDH IFB 428-A1
420-1 411-40
450-B50 428-A50
IPB
The analog image data from the CCD sensor is A/D-converted 1. Operation
by the ADB (A/D converter board), then sent to the IPB (image a. Image processing
processing board) where it is data-processed. The processed The following processing is done by the IPB (image process-
image data is converted into laser beam and applied to the ing board).
drum with the control signals from the CB. There are two (1) Shading correction
lasers which are used to write two lines of image data in a <Implementation timing>
single scan. The write start position of each laser is detected a) White correction
by the INDXSB (index sensor board). The E-RDH (electronic * When the machine is switched ON
RDH) can store digitized image data. Various editing func- * Every 1000 copies
tions can be carried out based on this data. b) Black correction
* When the Copy button is pressed
(2) Brightness/density conversion
(3) AES processing
(4) Text/dot pattern judgement
(5) Filtering
(6) Magnification change processing
(7) Copy γ correction
(8) Write density control
2-F-6
WRITE
WRITE
UNIT-1
UNIT
The following processing is performed by the E-RDH determines the laser write start timing for each scan in
(electronic RDH processing board). the axial direction of the drum.
a) Error diffusion processing
b) Data compression and de-compression b) Direction of rotation of drum
c) Image rotation 1) When very high is selected
d) Combination (2-in-1, 4-in-1, 8-in-1) When PS4 (paper feed start) is ON.
The write operation takes place under instructions from the
CB after the above processing has been completed. 2) When data is output from the E-RDH memory
When the copy paper reaches the specified
b. Write position
The IPB (image processing board) sends image data one * In the case of paper feed from the tray, LCT or
pixel at a time to LDB1 and LDB2 in accordance with control ADU:
signals from the CB (control board). After the specified period from when PS18 (no
LDB1 and LDB2 cause the lasers to emit at a time period feed) goes ON
corresponding to the image data. This laser light is applied * In the case of by-pass paper feed:
to the drum. After the specified period from the start of by-
(1) APC (automatic adjustment of laser beam intensity) pass paper feed
The CB monitors the laser drive current at fixed inter- (3) Laser beam position correction
vals, and maintains the light intensity at the correct a) Axial direction of drum
value. The index sensor detects the deviation of the
APC takes place at the following timing. positions of the 2 beams. This error is corrected by
a) Before Dmax/gradation correction changing the timing of the light emission from the
b) When the Start Print button is pressed laser.
c) After each two copies during a continuous copy b) Direction of rotation of drum
operation The index sensor detects the deviation of the
d) When the front door is opened and closed. positions of the 2 beams, and M40 (laser correction
motor) changes the angle of the fine adjustment
Note: MPC prism of laser LD1, thus adjusting the beam in the
MPC is the data (00-99 steps)stored in the NVRAM in up-down direction.
main body, which determines LD output power to be
adjusted later by APC. 2. Signals
Can be read out by 47-036, 47-037. a. CB output signals
MPC value is sent from CB to IPB in case of a) or (1) MEE V/V (CB → IPB)
b) in (1). This signal determines the scanning area in the sub
scanning direction during the pre-scanning operation
(2)Write Timing (AES control). The period during which this signal is [L]
a) Axial direction of drum is judged as the scanning range.
In this machine, the INDEX signal from INDEXSB (2) MS V/V (CB → IPB)
This signal determines the scanning range in the sub
scanning direction during the exposure scan. The
INDEX period over which this signal is [L] is judged as the
scanning range.
Laser (3) DC 0 RR (CB → IPB)
ouintput 1 Black data collection trigger used when shading col-
lection is taking place.
Laser output Image area (4) I YOBI 1 (CB → IPB)
2 a b c d e
Spare input port
1st scan 2nd scan
(5) RXA 0, 1 (CB → IPB)
Data that is transferred serially from the CB to the IPB
(6) MTN V/V (CB → IPB)
Symbol Description This signal determines the patch output range in the
a When laser goes ON during 1st scan sub scanning direction while Dmax is being measured.
b When index sensor goes ON The period during which this signal is [L] is judged as
b–c The timing at left is controlled by counting the the patch output range.
c–d LD1 IRCLK and LD2 IRCLK signals. It differs (7) MAPC CAL (CB → IPB)
d–e depending upon the paper size. APC and PWM calibration trigger signal
2-F-7
WRITE UNIT
(8) MIND CHG (CB → IPB) (13) LD2 IRCLK (IPB → LDB2)
This signal selects the index signal. LD2 APC clock signal
[H]: External index signal (14) LD2 DACK (IPB → LDB2)
[L]: Internal index signal LD2 MPC signal
(9) CORR (CB → IPB) (15) LD2 DI (IPB → LDB2)
White data collection trigger used when shading cor- LD2 MPC signal
rection is taking place (16) LD1 LOAD (IPB → LDB1)
(10) RESET (CB → IPB) LD2 MPC signal
Processing CPU reset signal (not used) (17) HLVL (IPB → INDEXSB)
5 VDC for monitoring power supply
b. CB input signal
(1) IP REQ (IPB → CB) d. IPB input signals
Processing board communications enable signal (1) LD1 ALM (LDB1 → IPB)
(2) INDEX (IPB → CB) Signal which indicates an abnormality in the laser drive
Write system index signal current
(3) TXA 0, 1 (IPB → CB) [H]: Normal
Data that is transferred serially from the IPB to the CB [L]: Abnormal
(4) MPR (IPB → CB) (2) LD2 ALM (LDB2 → IPB)
Image processing board power supply monitoring sig- Signal which indicates an abnormality in the laser drive
nal (connector check) current
(5) O YOBI 1 (IPB → CB) [H]: Normal
Spare output port [L]: Abnormal
(3) M INDEX 1, 2 (INDEXSB → IPB)
c. IPB output signal Index signal for detection of main scanning skew
(1) M40 PWR A (IPB → M40) (4) S INDEX 1, 2 (INDEXSB → IPB)
M40 A phase drive signal Index signal for detection of sub scanning skew
(2) M40 PWR B (IPB → M40) (5) IPR (INDEXSB → IPB)
M40 B phase drive signal INDEXSB power supply monitoring signal (connector
(3) M40 DRIVE A/A' (IPB → M40) check)
M40 A phase drive pulse signal [H]: Normal
(4) M40 DRIVE B/B' (IPB → M40) [L]: Abnormal
M40 B phase drive pulse signal (6) LD1 LPR (LDB1 → IPB)
(5) LD1 APC CONT 1, 2 (IPB → LDB1) LD1 power supply monitoring signal (connector check)
APC (laser light intensity automatic adjustment) of [H]: Normal
LD1 takes place according to the combination of [L]: Abnormal
these two signals. (7) LD2 LPR (LDB2 → IPB)
(6) LD1 VIDEO (IPB → LDB1) LD2 power supply monitoring signal (connector check)
LD1 laser image data [H]: Normal
(7) LD1 IRCLK (IPB → LDB1) [L]: Abnormal
LD1 APC clock signal
(8) LD1 DACK (IPB → LDB1)
LD1 MPC signal
(9) LD1 DI (IPB → LDB1)
LD1 MPC signal
(10) LD2 LOAD (IPB → LDB2)
LD2 MPC signal
(11) LD2 APC CONT 1, 2 (IPB → LDB2)
APC (laser light intensity automatic adjustment) of
LD2 takes place according to the combination of
these two signals.
(12) LD VIDEO (IPB → LDB2)
LD2 laser image data
2-F-8
DRUM UNIT
DRUM UNIT
[1] Composition
Charging corona unit Drum
Developing unit
PCL
Charging
corona unit
PCL
Cleaning unit
Separation claws
Separation claw solenoid
Drum
Developing unit
Cleaning unit
Transfer and separation corona unit

TSL
[2] Mechanisms *2: Ratchets

The thick paper conveyance ability has been improved by
Mechanism Method the use of five ratchets on the board cover.
Carriage supply Fixed rail
PCL LED
Drum
*1 Auxiliary separation Separation claws
*2 Conveyance auxiliary Ratchet wheel
Separation
The drum unit of this machine is an integral assembly claw
consisting of the drum, and also the charging corona Swing clutch
unit, developing unit, cleaning unit, toner recycle unit
and the PCL which are installed around the drum.
*1: Auxiliary separation

Three separation claws separate the paper from
the drum and prevent paper jamming. These
claws are pressed against the drum or removed
from it by the ON/OFF operation of the separation
claw solenoid (SD4). Board Cover Swing block
Also, while the swing clutch installed in the swing
block is turning one revolution, the separation Ratchets Separation claw
solenoid (SD4)
claws slide about 7 mm, preventing a specific part
of the paper from becoming dirty and also prevent-
ing the drum from being scratched.
2-G-1
DRUM UNIT-1
UNIT

1. Removing and Re-installing the Drum Unit Drum cover
Caution:
1. The drum in this machine is much more sensitive than
the drums used in previous machines. Before pulling
out the drum unit, therefore, be sure to place the drum
cover over it and store the drum carriage in a dark
place.
2. Be careful not to rotate the drum when installing or
removing the drum unit. if you rotate the drum in the
direction opposite to the direction in which it rotates
during a copy operation, you risk damaging the clean- Set screws
Conveyance lever
ing blade.
3. Do not touch the separation claw when installing or
removing the drum unit.
(4) Remove the three set screws, then slowly pull the
a. Procedure
drum unit forward. (Raise the toner recycle unit then
(1) Open the front door, slacken the set screw, release the
remove the set screw at the center of the drum.)
lock plate of the toner supply unit, then pull forward the
Caution: There is a possibility of the drum rotating in reverse,
toner supply unit and fix it in place.
so retain the cleaner idler gear to prevent the drum
from rotating.
Toner supply unit
Set screw Set screws
Toner recycle unit
Lock plate
Drum unit
(2) Release the conveyance lever. Cleaner idler gear

(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove the drum
cover. (5) Re-install the drum carriage in the opposite sequence
to removal.
2-G-2
DRUM
DRUM
UNIT-1
UNIT
2. Removing and Re-installing the Drum

Caution:
1. Be careful not to touch the drum or the cleaning blade Drum fixing coupling
with bare hands, or damage these parts. Cleaner idler gear
2. When leaving the drum to stand, be sure to place the
drum cover over it and store it in a dark place.
3. When re-installing the drum, cleaning blade and guide
roller, apply setting powder to the entire surface of the
drum and also to the cleaning blade regardless of
whether or not the parts are new or old types. In
addition, apply toner to both ends of the cleaning
blade.
4. After applying setting powder to the drum, carry out the
following work before installing the drum unit on the Drum
main body.
1) To ensure that the toner density is correct, before
installing the drum to the drum unit, discharge the
surface of γ detection sensor and the Dmax sensor
on the control board by using a piece of cloth (5) Re-install the drum in the opposite sequence to re-
moistened with alcohol, thus preventing toner from moval.
adhering to the sensors.
2) After installing the drum to the drum unit, with the 3. Removing and Re-installing the Separation
charging corona unit and the developing unit re- Claws
moved, insert the centering jigs into both sides of Caution:
the drum, then turn the drum one revolution. This 1. Take care not to damage the drum when removing the
prevents setting powder from scattering onto the separation claws.
charging corona unit, and other parts, and also 2. Be careful of the direction and position of the separa-
prevents image defects. tion claws when re-installing the claws.
5. When installing the drum, be careful of the orientation 3. Do not touch the cleaning blade or the drum with the
of the drum. The end of the drum with the wider non- bare hands.
image area is the front. a. Procedure
6. When installing a new drum, be sure to enter code 91 (1) Remove the drum carriage from the main body.
of the 47 mode and reset the process counter (drum (2) Remove the drum from the drum carriage.
counter). (For details, refer to "Adjustment section".) (3) Remove the spring.
(4) Remove the three set screws, then remove the swing
a. Procedure block and swing clutch.
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body. (5) Remove the separation claw unit.
(2) Remove the charging corona unit, developing unit and
cleaning blade from the drum unit. (For the sequence
of removing these parts, refer to "Charging corona unit, Separation claw unit
Developing unit and cleaning/recycle unit section".) Swing clutch
(3) Remove the cleaner idler gear and the drum fixing
coupling.
Note: Before removing the drum, in order to prevent the toner

from dropping, rotate the cleaner idler gear/B
counterclockwise and remove the toner remaining be-
tween the drum and guide roller.
If the toner cannot be removed, rotate the drum clock-
wise a bit, then detach the drum keeping the toner in Spring Set screws
place.
Swing block
(4) Gently lift out the drum while holding it at both ends to
ensure that you do not damage the photosensitive
surface.
2-G-3
DRUM UNIT
(6) Remove the spring and the E ring from the separation 5. Removing and Re-installing the PCL
claw unit. a. Procedure
(7) Remove the three set screws of the claws (one screw (1) Remove the charging corona unit. (Refer to "Corona
each), then remove the three claws. unit section" for the method of removing the PCL.)
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN20) from the drum board.
(3) Push the front and rear hooks of the PCL cover inward,
then lift out the PCL.)
Connector (CN20)
Set screws
E ring Charging wire

cleaning motor (M7)
Separation claws
PCL
Spring
(8) Re-install the separation claws in the opposite se-

quence to removal.
4. Removing and Re-installing the Separation

Claw Solenoid Press-fit Ass'y
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the drum and separation claw unit from the (4) Re-install the PCL in the opposite sequence to re-
drum unit. moval.
(4) Remove the two set screws, then remove the separa-
tion claw solenoid press-fit ass'y.
Connector (CN34)
Separation claw
solenoid press-fit
ass'y Set screws
(5) Re-install the press-fit ass'y in the opposite sequence

to removal.
2-G-4
DRUM UNIT
[4] PCL/TSL Control [5] Separation Claw Control
24VDC 5-A3 21-5 24VDC 20-1

PCL CONT 5-A4
PCL 24VDC 5-B9
SD4
21-6 PCL CONT 20-2
SD4 DRIVE 5-B10
DB
24VDC 62-B1
TSL
TSL CONT 62-B9
CB
CB
The PCL (precharging exposure lamp) and TSL (transfer sync The separation claws are driven by SD4 (separation claws),
exposure lamp) consist of LEDs which are controlled by the CB and are controlled by the CB (control board).
(control board).
1. Operation
1. Operation During the separation discharge, SD4 goes ON, causing
PCL goes ON and OFF in synchronism with M1 (main), and the separation claws to touch the drum in order to help
TSL goes ON and OFF in synchronism with M4 (drum). separate the paper from the drum.
2. Signals
2. Signals a. Output signal
a. Output signals (1) SD4 DRIVE (CB → SD4)
(1) PCL CONT (CB → DB → PCL) SD4 drive control signal
PCL ON/OFF control signal [L]: SD4 ON
[L]: PCL ON [H]: SD4 OFF
[H]: PCL OFF
(2) TSL CONT (CB → TSL)
TSL ON/OFF control signal
[L]: TSL ON
[H]: TSL OFF
2-G-5
DRUM UNIT
[6] Paper Guide Plate Control
24VDC 62-A1 84-1

PGND 62-A2 84-2
GP
GP CONT 62-B11 84-8
CB HV1
A constant voltage is applied to the paper guide plate in order

to prevent toner from adhering to it.
1. Operation
a. ON/OFF timing
ON and OFF in synchronism with M4 (drum).
b. Applied voltage
–500 V DC
2. Signal
a. Output signal
(1) GP CONT (CB → HV1)
Controlling ON/OFF of the voltage applied to the
paper guide plate
[L]: Voltage applied.
[H]: Voltage not applied.
2-G-6
CORONA
CORONA
UNITUNIT
SECTION-1
SECTION
CORONA UNIT SECTION

[1] Composition
<Charging corona unit> <Transfer and separation corona unit>
Charging wire cleaning

motor (M7)
Drum board
Plunging prevention plate
Charging wire cleaning knob
Separation
corona unit
PCL Transfer
corona unit
Transfer and separation
wire cleaning motor (M8)
[2] Mechanisms *1: Cleaning the charging corona wires

The charging corona unit has a wire cleaner. The charging
Mechanism Method wire cleaning motor causes the charging wire cleaning
*1 Charging Scorotron (DC negative corona discharge) block to move back and forth, removing dirt from the wires.
Charge wire: Tungsten 0.06 mm dia.
(gold-plated skin path)
Grid control: Stainless steel plate Charging wire
With automatic wire cleaner cleaning motor (M7)
*2 Transfer DC positive corona discharge Charging wire
Charge wires: Tungsten 0.06 mm dia. cleaning block
With automatic wire cleaner
Charging wires
Separation AC corona discharge
Charge wires: Tungsten 0.06 mm dia.
With automatic wire cleaner
2-H-1
CORONA UNIT SECTION
*2: Cleaning the transfer and separation wires 2. Removing and Re-installing the Transfer and
The transfer and separation corona unit has a wire cleaner. Separation Corona Unit
The transfer and separation wire cleaning motor causes Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
the transfer and separation wire cleaning blocks to move from the power outlet.
back and forth, removing dirt from the wires. a. Procedure
(1) Open the front door, and release the conveyance
Transfer and separation lever.
wire cleaning motor (M8)
(2) Remove the set screw, then remove the transfer and
separation corona unit cover.
Transfer wire cleaning block

corona unit
Transfer wire
Separation wire
cleaning block
Separation wires
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly Set screw

Conveyance lever
1. Removing and Re-installing the Charging Transfer and separation
Corona Unit corona unit cover
(4) Remove the set screw, then pull forward and remove
a. Procedure
the transfer and separation corona unit.
(3) Lift out the charging corona unit.
Set screw

corona unit
Connector (CN168)
Connector (CN21)
(5) Re-install the transfer and separation corona unit in the

opposite sequence to removal.
(4) Re-install the charging corona unit in the opposite

sequence to removal.
2-H-2
CORONA
CORONA
UNIT
UNIT
SECTION-1
SECTION
3. Removing and re-installing the Plunging (3) Remove dirt from the charging control plate by gently
Prevention Plate dabbing it with a piece of cloth moistened with drum
a. Procedure cleaner, then remove any remaining dirt with a blower
(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit brush.
(2) Push in the six hooks at the rear of the back plate while (4) Re-install the charging control plate in the opposite
grasping them with a pair of tweezers, and remove the sequence to removal.
plunging prevention plate.
5. Replacing Charging Wire Cleaning Block B
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the charging corona unit.
Plunging prevention plate
(2) Remove the charging control plate.
(3) Remove the two set screws of the charging corona unit
(front).
(4) Lift out and remove charging wire cleaning block B
together with the spark arrestor plate (front).
Set screws
Spark arrestor plate (front)
Hooks
Charging wire
Hooks cleaning block B
(3) Re-install the plunging prevention plate in the opposite

4. Cleaning the charging control plate Charging corona unit (front)

a. Procedure
(1) Remove the charging corona unit.
(2) Remove the two springs, then slide the charging con-
trol plate toward the charging wire cleaning motor and
remove it. (5) Re-install charging wire cleaning block B in the oppo-
site sequence to removal.
Narrow
Wide
Charging wire control plate
Springs
2-H-3
CORONA UNIT SECTION
6. Replacing the Charging Wire 7. Replacing Charging Wire Block A

(1) Remove the charging corona unit. (1) Remove the charging corona unit.
(2) Remove the charging control plate. (2) Remove the charging control plate.
(3) Remove the charging wire cleaning block B (3) Remove the charging wire cleaning block B.
(4) Remove the set screw, then remove the spark arrestor (4) Remove the charging wires.
plate (rear). (5) Turn the charging corona unit upside down, then
remove the stop ring, and remove the charging wire
cleaning block A.
Spark arrestor plate (rear)
motor (M7)

block A (rear)
Set screw Stop ring
(6) Re-install charging wire cleaning block A in the oppo-

(5) Remove the spring, then remove the charging wires. site sequence to removal.
Charging wire
cleaning motor (M7) 8. Replacing the Transfer and Separation Wire
Cleaning Blocks
a. Procedure
Charging wire
(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit.
(2) Remove the spark arrestor plate (front).
(3) Lift out and remove the the transfer wire cleaning block
and separation wire cleaning block.
Spark arrestor plate (front)
Charging wire
cleaning block A
Spring
(6) Re-install the charging wires in the opposite sequence

to removal.
Transfer and
separation
wire cleaning
Separation wire motor (M8)
Transfer wire cleaning block cleaning block
(4) Re-install the transfer and separation wire cleaning

blocks in the opposite sequence to removal.
2-H-4
CORONA UNIT SECTION
9. Replacing the Transfer and Separation Wires 10.Removing/Re-installing the TSL unit
(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit. (1) Remove the 2nd paper feed unit from the main body
(2) Remove the plunging prevention plate. (Refer to the item on the paper feed section for the
(3) Remove the spark arrestor plate (front). method of removing the 2nd paper feed unit).
(4) Remove the transfer wire cleaning block and the (2) Disconnect the TSL connector, CN (89).
separation wire cleaning block. (3) Remove the lead wires behind the transfer exposure
(5) Remove the spark arrestor plate (rear). cover.
(6) Remove the spring from each wire, then remove each (4) Remove the two set screws, then remove the transfer
wire. Each wire comes away together with the support exposure cover.
rubber. (5) Remove the two set screws, then remove grounding
plate (A).
Spark arrestor Spark arrestor (6) Remove the TSL unit from the 2nd paper feed unit.
plate (rear) plate (front)
Support rubber
Transfer wire Transfer wire set screws
cleaning block TSL unit
Springs
Transfer exposure
cover
set screws
Separation CN (89)
wire cleaning
Plunging prevention block
plate Separation
wires Support rubbers
Transfer and
separation wire Grounding plate (A)
cleaning motor 2nd paper feed unit
(M8)
(7) Re-install the transfer and separation wires in the

opposite sequence to removal.
(7) Re-install the TSL unit in the opposite sequence to
removal.
2-H-5
CORONA UNIT SECTION
[4] Charging Control (3) G SHIFT (CB → HV1)

The charging grid voltage output level is controlled by
analog signals from the CB.
G SHIFT output range 4 to 10 V

Grid voltage output range –500 to –900 V
24VDC 62-A1 84-1 CHARGING
PGND 62-A2 84-2
GRID
C CONT 62-A4 84-4
C SHIFT 62-A5 84-5
G SHIFT 62-A7 84-7

GP CONT 62-B11 84-8
62-A9 84-9 F SIG
CB HV1
HV1 (high voltage unit 1), which controls charging, operates by

means of control signals from the CB (control board), and
outputs a high voltage to the charging wires.
1. Operation
a. Charging
A Scorotron charging method is used. 24 V DC input from
the CB is raised to a negative DC high voltage which is then
discharged.
b. Charging correction by means of the grid voltage
The grid voltage is output from HV1 to the charging plate.
2. Signal
a. Input signal
(1) F SIG (HV1 → CB)
[L] is output when the spark detection circuit operates
and forcibly turns OFF the charging output.
b. Output signals
(1) C CONT (CB → HV1)
Charging and grid voltage ON/OFF control signal
[L]: Charging and grid voltage ON
[H]: Charging and grid voltage OFF
(2) C SHIFT (CB → HV1)
The charging corona unit output level is controlled by
means of analog signals from the CB.
C SHIFT output range 4 to 10 V
Charging output range –600 to –1500 µA
2-H-6
CORONA UNIT SECTION
[5] Transfer/Separation Control (3) S CONT (CB → HV2)

Separation corona unit ON/OFF control signal.
When this signal is [L], the separation corona unit is
ON.
(4) S SHIFT (AC) (CB → HV2)
Separation corona unit output level control signal.
62-B10 87-3 S SIG SEPARATION
This signal controls the separation corona unit output
S SHIFT (DC) 62-B8 87-5 level (AC component) using analog signals from the
S SHIFT (AC) 62-B7 87-6
TRANSFER CB.
S CONT 62-B6 87-7
T SHIFT 62-B5 87-8
T CONT 62-B4
S SHIFT (AC) output range 4 to 10 V
87-9
62-B3 87-10 T SIG Separation AC voltage
4.4 to 5.7 kV
PGND 62-B2 87-11 output range
24VDC 62-B1 87-12
CB HV2 (5) S SHIFT (DC) (CB → HV2)

Separation corona unit output level control signal.
This signal controls the separation corona unit output
level (DC component) using analog signals from the
CB.
Transfer and separation is controlled by the CB (control board) S SHIFT (DC) output range 4 to 10 V
and HV2 (high voltage unit 2). Separation DC bias voltage
0 to –40 –0 µA
output range
1. Operation
a. Transfer
A positive DC high voltage is used for transfer.
b. Separation
An AC high voltage is used for separation.
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) T SIG (HV2 → CB)
[L] is output when the transfer spark detection circuit
operates.
(2) S SIG (HV2 → CB)
[L] is output when the separation spark detection circuit
operates.
b. Output signals
(1) T CONT (CB → HV2)
Signal which turns the transfer corona unit ON/OFF.
When this signal is [L], the transfer corona unit is ON.
(2) T SHIFT (CB → HV2)
Transfer corona unit output level control signal.
This signal controls the transfer corona unit output
level using analog signals from the CB.
T SHIFT output range 4 to 10 V

Transfer current output range –50 to –600 µV
2-H-7
CORONA UNIT SECTION
[6] M7 (charging wire cleaning) Control 2. Signals

a. Output signals
(1) M7 DRIVE 1,2 (CB → M7)
M7 drive signals
The drive direction of M7 is controlled by changing over
the drive current direction of these two signals.
M7 DRIVE 1 30-B7 21-1 M7 DRIVE 1 39-1 Status M7 DRIVE 1 M7 DRIVE 2

M7 DRIVE 2 30-B6 21-2 M7 DRIVE 2 39-2
M7 Cleaning forward stroke H L
Cleaning return stroke L H
When stopped L L
CB DB
M7 (charging wire cleaning) is driven by the CB (control board)

via the DB (drum relay board).
1. Operation
a. M7 is used to drive the charging wire cleaning unit. Also,
the drive voltage and rotational speed of M7 are as
follows.
Drive voltage: 12 V DC
b. Cleaning of the charging wire takes place if the fixing
temperature is less than 50°C/122°F when the machine
is switched ON.
c. Cleaning operation
The home position of the cleaning unit is on the front side
of the machine. The cleaning unit operates as follows.
Home position Rear
Cleaning (forward)
Cleaning (return)
Home position (forward stroke)
Home position (return stroke)
2-H-8
CORONA UNIT SECTION
[7] M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning) 2. Signals

Control a. Output signals
(1) M8 DRIVE 1,2 (CB → M8)
M8 drive signals
The drive direction of M7 is controlled by changing over
the drive current direction of these two signals.
Status M8 DRIVE 1 M8 DRIVE 2
M8 DRIVE 1 30-B9 Cleaning forward stroke H L
M8 DRIVE 2 30-B10
M8 Cleaning return stroke L H
When stopped L L
CB
M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning) is controlled by the CB

(control board).
1. Operation
a. M18 is used to drive the transfer/separation wire cleaning
unit. The drive voltage and rotational speed of M8 are as
follows.
Drive voltage: 12 V DC
b. Cleaning of the transfer/separation wire takes place if the
fixing temperature is less than 50°C/122°F when the
machine is switched ON.
c. Cleaning operation
The home position of the cleaning unit is on the front side
of the machine. The cleaning unit operates as follows.
Home position Rear
Cleaning (forward)
Cleaning (return)
Home position (forward stroke)
Home position (return stroke)
2-H-9
DEVELOPING UNIT
DEVELOPING UNIT
[1] Composition
Developing regulating plate
Developing unit cover Splash prevent sheet

bridge (upper)
Developing sleeve
Toner density sensor

(TDS)
Developing sleeve Agitator wheel
Toner suction duct Agitator screws
[2] Mechanism 2. Flow of developer

The developer inside the developing unit is supplied to the
Mechanism Method
developing sleeve by the agitator wheel, and maintained at
Developing 2-component developer
a constant thickness by the developing regulation plate
Developing bias DC bias
(bristle height regulation plate). The developer remaining
Developer agitation Main agitator
on the developing sleeve is returned to the agitator screw.
Auxiliary agitator
Developer
1. Developing unit drive Drum regulation plate Agitator wheel
The drive for the developing unit is divided into the drive for
the developing sleeve and that for the agitating section.
These parts are driven by the developing drive motor (M3)
and the agitator screw motor (M35), respectively.
Agitator screws
Toner suction duct
2-I-1
DEVELOPING UNIT
[3] Disassembly/Assembly 3. Replacing the developer

1. Screws that must not be removed Caution:
(1) The two set screws of the developer regulation plate 1. When replacing the developer, take care that dirt does
(2) The set screw for adjusting the magnet angle not become mixed with it.
2. If the developing sleeve is rotated, the developing gear
rotates in the counterclockwise direction. NEVER
rotate the developing gear in the clockwise direction.
Screws that must not be removed
Developing sleeve
Developing gear
Screws that must not be removed
2. Removing and Re-installing the Developing

Unit
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body. a. Procedure
(2) Release the developing push pressure levers (front (1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
and rear). Then, disconnect the density sensor con- (2) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
nector. (3) Release the hooks on the developing unit cover, then
(3) Disconnect connector CN50, then raise the toner recy- lift up and remove the cover.
cle pipe.
(4) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
Developing unit cover
toner recycle pipe Developing unit
CN50 Hooks
Developing push pressure lever
(5) Re-install the developing unit in the opposite sequence

to removal.
2-I-2
DEVELOPING UNIT
(4) Tilt the developing unit, then rotate the developing gear (8) Rotate the developing gear in the counterclockwise
in the counterclockwise direction until all of the devel- direction, and confirm that the developer bristles along
oper adhering to the inside of the developing unit and the entire length of the developing sleeve.
the magnet roller is discharged.
Developing sleeve
Developing gear
Developing gear
Agitator gear
(9) Install the developing cover, then install the developing

(5) Supply fresh developer evenly from the top of the unit on the drum unit.
agitator screw.
(6) Rotate the agitator gear counterclockwise until all of
the developer enters the developing unit.
(7) Repeat steps (5) and (6) until all of the developer has
been supplied to the developing unit.
Developer
2-I-3
DEVELOPING
DEVELOPING UNIT-1
UNIT
4. Removing and Re-installing the Toner Control [4] M3 (developing drive) Control
Board Unit
a. Procedure
(2) Remove the three set screws, then remove the board
cover. 40VDC 88-4
(3) Remove the three set screws, then remove the toner DCPS PGND 88-2
control board unit.

(4) Disconnect the connector (CN19) from the toner con-
trol board. M3
5VDC 65-B3
Set screws SGND 65-B4
CB M3 CONT 65-B5
M3 CLK 65-B6
Board cover M3 H/L 65-B7
M3 LD 65-B8
Drum unit
Toner control
board unit M3 (developing drive) is controlled by the CB (control board).
1. Operation
M3 is a 40 V drive DC motor which drives the developing
sleeve. M3 is PLL-controlled by feedback signals from a
speed sensor installed inside M3 itself, maintaining it at a
Set screws constant speed.
Connector (CN19)
M3 goes ON after the specified time from when the Copy
button is pressed, and goes OFF again after the specified
(5) Re-install the toner control board unit in the opposite time from the completion of charging control.
2. Signals
a. Input signal
(1) M3 LD (M3 →CB)
[L] is output when M3 reaches the specified speed.
b. Output signals
(1) M3 CONT (CB → M3)
M1 drive control signal
[L]: M1 ON
[H]: M1 OFF
(2) M3 CLK (CB → M3)
M3 rotational speed control reference clock signal
(3) M3 H/L (CB → M3)
M3 rotational speed control gain switching signal
[L]: Low speed range
[H]: High speed range
2-I-4
DEVELOPING UNIT
[5] M35 (agitator screw) Control [6] Developing Bias Control
24VDC 62-A1 84-1 BIAS

24VDC 99-2
PGND 62-A2 84-2
PGND 99-5
B CONT 62-A3 84-3
B SHIFT 62-A6 84-6
DCPS 62-A9 84-9 F SIG
M35
M35 PLL 30-A6
M35 DRIVE 30-A7
CB HV1
CB
M35 (agitator screw) is controlled by the CB (control board). The developing bias is controlled by the CB (control board) via
HV1 (high voltage power supply 1).
1. Operation
M35 is a 24 V DC motor which drives the agitator screw and 1. Operation
the agitator wheel. M35 is PLL-controlled using feedback The developing bias is applied to the sleeve in synchronism
signals from the speed sensor installed inside M35, main- with M3 (developing drive).
taining it at a constant speed.
M35 goes ON when the Start Print is pressed, and goes 2. Signals
OFF again when the last copy has been exited. a. Output signals
If the upper fixing roller does not reach the set temperature (1) B CONT (CB → HV1)
within the specified time from the start of warmup, M35 Developing bias ON/OFF control signal.
goes ON/OFF in synchronism with M1 (main) until comple- When this signal is [L], the developing bias goes ON,
tion of warmup because recycle section is operated by M1. and a high voltage is output.
(2) B SHIFT (CB → HV1)
2. Signals This signal controls the output level of the developing
a. Input signal bias by means of analog signals from the CB.
(1) M35 PLL (M35 → CB)
[L] is output when M35 reaches the specified speed. B SHIFT output range 2 to 8 V
b. Output signal Bias voltage output range –440 to –700 V DC
(1) M35 CONT (CB → M35)
[L]: M35 ON
[H]: M35 OFF
2-I-5
DEVELOPING UNIT
[7] Toner Density Control (2) During a copy operation

The relationship between the TDS output voltage
(TDS ANG) and the toner supply time is as follows.
TDS output voltage Toner supply time

M10 PLL 30-B11 99-2 24VDC 2 V or lower 0 sec
M10 DRIVE 30-B12 99-5 PGND
M10 2 to 2.11 V 0.24 sec
2.12 to 2.19 V 0.48 sec
2.20 to 2.29 V 0.72 sec
2.30 to 2.37 V 0.96 sec
M35 PLL 30-A6 2.38 to 2.45 V 1.20 sec
M35 DRIVE 30-A7
M35
2.46 V or higher 1.80 sec
DCPS 2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) TDS ANG (TDS → CB)
TDS CONT 5-A5
An analog voltage proportional to the toner density is
12VDC 5-A6
TDS ANG 5-A7
TDS output.
SGND 5-A8 (2) M10 PLL (M10 → CB)
CB
(3) M35 PLL (M35 → CB)
b. Output signals
The toner density is controlled by the TDS (toner density (1) TDS CONT (CB → TDS)
sensor), M35 (agitator screw), M10 (toner supply) and the CB TDS output voltage adjustment signal
(control board). Output voltage adjustment: 4.9 to 9.8 V
(2) M10 CONT (CB → M10)
1. Operation M10 drive control signal
a. Toner density detection Toner is supplied when M10 is ON.
The TDS detects the density of the toner in the developing [L]: M10 ON
unit using an L detection method, and outputs an analog [H]: M10 OFF
voltage signal that is proportional to the density to the CB. (3) M35 CONT (CB → M35)
The CB compares the detected voltage with the reference M35 drive control signal
voltage corresponding to the initial density of the devel- [L]: M35 ON
oper, and judges the necessity of supplying toner. [H]: M35 OFF
b. Toner supply operation
M10 is driven by 24 V DC supplied from the DCPS (DC
power supply).
(1) When the power is switched ON
M35 (agitator screw) starts to rotate as soon as the
machine is switched ON, then after 4 minutes the toner
density is read. This density is compared with the initial
density of the developer, and if the density is low, toner
supply takes place.(recovered until its initial density)
2-I-6
DEVELOPING UNIT
[8] Dmax Control 2. Signals

a. Input signals
(1) Dmax sig (TCSB → CB)
Output voltage of the Dmax value detection sensor on
5VDC 30-A8 99-2 24VDC the TCSB
SGND 30-A9
MA CONT 30-A10
99-5 PGND
Reference voltage: 1.5 V
M4 H/L 30-B6 M4 (2) Dmax MONI (TCSB → CB)
M4 CLK 30-A11 This is the monitor signal for light reflected from the
M4 PLL 30-A12
drum surface (no toner). The voltage impressed on the
Dmax detection LED is corrected (calibration) by γ/
Dmax LED V ref.
5VDC 65-B3
SGND 65-B4
88-4 40VDC
Reference voltage: 6 V
88-2 PGND
M3 CONT 65-B5 <Implementation timing>
M3 CLK 65-B6 M3 Calibration takes place before Dmax correction.
(3) M3 LD (M3 → CB)
M3 H/L 65-B7
M3 LD 65-B8
(4) M4 PLL (M4 → CB)
DCPS
12VDC 5-B1 19-2
Dmax LED CONT 5-B2 19-3 b. Output signal
5-B3 19-4 Dmax MONI
(1) Dmax LED CONT (CB → TCSB)
5-B5 19-6 Dmax Sig
SGND 5-B6 19-7 The control signal used to turn on and off the LED for
γ/Dmax LED V ref 5-A11 19-10 PD1 of TCSB.
CB TCSB (2) γ/Dmax LED V ref (CB → TSCB)
DC voltage is supplied to LED of PD1 by this line.
CB changes this voltage until Dmax MONI signal
becomes 6 V.
Dmax control is done by the TCSB (toner control sensor
(3) M3 CLK (CB → M3)
board), M4 (drum), M3 (developing drive), and so on. These
M3 speed control gain switchover signal
parts are controlled by the CB.
(4) M4CONT (CB → M4)
1. Operation
[L]: M4 ON
Dmax control is intended to align the maximum density for
[H]: M4 OFF
each machine with the reference level.
(5) M4 H/L (CB → M4)
(1) Contents of implementation
M4 rotational speed switchover signal
Latent images are created several times at the maxi-
Normally [H]: 370 mm/sec
mum exposure, the images are developed while the
(6) M4CLK (CB → M4)
rotational speed of the sleeve is varied, then each
Reference clock signal for controlling the speed of M4
density is read by the PD1 on the TCSB.
The rotational speed of the sleeve when the density
reaches the reference level is memorized as the opti-
mum sleeve speed, then subsequently developing is
carried out at this sleeve speed until Dmax correction
takes place next.
(2) Implementation timing
1) When the power is switched ON
2) At 500 copies
3) At 1000 copies
2) Every 1000 jobs
2) Every 3000 jobs (see *1)
*1: Can be changed with the 25 Mode software switch.
2-I-7
DEVELOPING UNIT
[9] Gradation Correction Control (1) Contents of implementation

Exposure is performed while the laser exposure is
varied over several steps, and development is per-
formed at the sleeve speed resulting from Dmax cor-
5VDC 30-A8 99-2 24VDC
SGND 30-A9 99-5 PGND
rection.
M4 CONT 30-A10 Subsequently, each density is read by PD2 on the
M4 H/L 30-B6 M4 TCSB, and the toner density and the gradation charac-
M4 CLK 30-A11
M4 PLL 30-A12 teristics of the toner density detected.
The gradation characteristics obtained here are used
as the correction values for the laser exposure amount.
5VDC 65-B3 88-4 40VDC
(2) Implementation timing
SGND 65-B4 88-2 PGND a) When the power is switched ON
M3 CONT 65-B5
b) Every 3000 jobs (see *1)
M3 CLK 65-B6 M3
M3 H/L 65-B7 *1: Can be changed with the 25 Mode software switch.
M3 LD 65-B8
2. Signals
DCPS a. Input signal
(1) γ sig/MONI (TCSB → CB)
5-A12 19-1 γ sig/MONI
This is the output voltage from the gradation sensor
12VDC 5-B1 19-2
DRUM JAM CONT 5-B4 19-5
(PD2) on the TCSB and the monitor signal for the light
SGND 5-B6 19-7 reflected from the drum surface (no toner).
5-B7 19-8 DRUM JAM
The voltage impressed on the Dmax detection LED is
γ LED CONT 5-B8 19-9
γ/Dmax LED V ref 5-A11 19-10
corrected (calibration) by γ/Dmax LED V ref.
CB TCSB Reference voltage: 9 V.
<Implementation timing>
To be performed before gradation correction.
(2) DRUM JAM (TCSB → CB)
Gradation correction control is done by the TCSB (toner control
This signal detects a jam caused by paper wrapping
sensor board), M4 (drum), M3 (developing drive). These parts
around the drum. If it is more than 4.3 V, the CB judges
are controlled by the CB.
that a jam has occurred.
(3) M3 LD (M3 → CB)
1. Operation
The gradation characteristics of the toner density versus
(4) M4 PLL (M4 → CB)
exposure amount at the image forming section of each
machine is detected, and gradation correction processing
carried out in order to obtain a linear relation between the
b. Output signal
original density and the copy density.
(1) γ LED CONT (CB → TCSB)
ON/OFF control signal for the gray scale detection
LED
[L]: LED ON
[H]: LED OFF
(2) γ/Dmax LED V ref (CB → TCSB)
The power supply line for the LED of PD2 on the TCSB.
Copy density
The voltage value is adjusted so the γ MONI signal will

be 9 V DC.
(3) DRUM JAM CONT (CB → TCSB)
This signal controls the ON or OFF state of the wrap-
ping jam detection LED.
[L]: LED ON
[H]: LED OFF
(4) M3 CONT (CB → M3)
0 Original density 255 M1 drive control signal
[L]: M1 ON
[H]: M1 OFF
2-I-8
DEVELOPING
DEVELOPING
UNIT-1
UNIT
(5) M3 CLK (CB → M3) [10] FM30 (developing suction) Control

Reference clock signal for controlling the speed of M3
(6) M3 H/L (CB → M3)
M3 rotational speed control gain switching signal
[L]: Low speed range
[H]: High speed range
(7) M4CONT (CB → M4) PGND 99-4

[L]: M4 ON
DCPS
[H]: M4 OFF
(8) M4 H/L (CB → M4)
M4 rotational speed switchover signal FM30 DRIVE 65-A1
FM30 LD 65-A2
FM30
Normally [H]: 370 mm/sec
FM30 H/L 65-A3
(9) M4 CLK (CB → M4)
Reference clock signal for M4 speed control CB
FM30 (developing suction) is controlled by the CB (control

board) .
1. Operation
FM30 is a 24 V DC motor.
It goes ON and OFF in synchronism with M1 (main).
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) FM30 LD (FM30 → CB)
[L] is output when FM30 reaches the specified speed.
(2) FM30 DRIVE (CB → FM30)
Drive control signal for FM30
[L]: FM30 OFF
[H]: FM30 ON
(3) FM30 H/L (CB → FM30)
FM30 rotational speed control signal.
This signal is always [L].
2-I-9
TONER SUPPLY
TONER UNIT-1
SUPPLY UNIT
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

[1] Composition
Toner supply door

Toner box
Toner supply motor

(M10)
Toner level detecting sensor (TLD)
Shutter
[2] Mechanisms *2: Toner supply shutter

When installing the toner cartridge, move the toner supply
Mechanism Method unit forward. This causes the toner supply port to close,
*1 Toner supply Screw conveyance preventing leakage of toner. When you return the toner
Toner level detection Piezoelectric method 185g±50g supply unit to the main body (normal position), the toner
Toner agitating Agitator plate supply port coincides with the developing unit.
Toner box Capacity 1330g
*2 Toner leakage Toner supply shutter
prevention
*1: Toner supply

a. The rotational force of the toner supply motor is trans-
mitted via gears to the toner conveyance screw and the
toner agitator shaft, causing the shaft to rotate.
b. The toner that has been agitated by the agitator plate
installed on the toner agitator shaft is supplied to the
developing unit.
Shutter
Toner supply port
2-J-1
TONER SUPPLY UNIT-1
UNIT
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly (4) Close the toner supply unit, then remove the E ring.
1. Removing and Re-installing the Toner Supply (5) Pull the shaft out toward the bottom, then remove the
Unit toner supply unit.
a. Procedure
(1) Open the front door, slacken the set screw, release the
lock of the toner supply unit, then swing the toner E ring
supply unit out.
(2) Slacken the set screw shown at top left of the figure,
and remove the set screw shown at bottom right, then
remove the cover of the toner supply unit.
Shaft
Set screw
(6) Re-install the toner supply unit in the opposite se-

Set screw quence to removal.
(slacken)
Toner supply unit cover
(3) Disconnect the two connectors (CN17 and 14).
Connector (CN17)
Connector (CN14)
2-J-2
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[4] Toner Level Detection Control
12VDC 22-B3
TLD 22-B4 TLD
SGND 22-B5
OB CLOCK 3-B3 212-4

OB DATA 3-B4 212-5 OB1
OB LATCH 3-B5 212-6
CB
Toner level detection control is done by the TLD (toner level

detecting sensor) and the CB (control board).
1. Operation
a. Toner level detecting sensor
A piezoelectric device is used as the TLD.
When the level of toner in the toner box becomes low, the
“supply toner” signal is output to the CB. As a result, a
message is displayed on the LCD (VFD1, VRD2) con-
nected to OB2 (operation board 2).
b. Detection timing
The detection timing is as follows.
* When the machine is switched ON
* When the front door is opened and closed
* During a copy operation
2. Signals
a. Input signal
(1) TLD (TLD → CB)
When the level of toner in the toner box becomes low,
this signal becomes [L], and a message is displayed on
the LCD connected to OB2.
2-J-3
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE
CLEANING/TONER UNIT-1
RECYCLE UNIT
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT

[1] Composition
Toner recycle screw

Cleaning blade
Toner guide
roller
Toner conveyance
screw
Cleaning blade
[2] Mechanisms 3. Once the drum has been coated with setting powder,
carry out the following work before installing the drum
Mechanism Method unit on the main body.
Drum cleaning Cleaning blade 1) To ensure that the toner density is correct, before
(weight type) installing the drum to the drum unit, discharge the
Toner recycle Screw conveyance to the surface of γ detection sensor and the Dmax sensor
developing unit on the control board by using a piece of cloth
(Weight load application method) moistened with alcohol, thus preventing toner
Toner collection Toner guide roller from adhering to the sensors.
2) After installing the drum to the drum unit,with the
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly charging corona unit and the developing unit re-
1. Removing and Re-installing the Cleaning Blade moved, insert the centering jigs into both sides of
Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged the drum, then turn the drum one revolution. This
from the power outlet. prevents setting powder from scattering onto the
Caution: charging corona unit and also prevents image
1. Do not touch the edge of the cleaning blade with bare defects.
hands. 4. Take care that the blade spacer mounted on the
2. When installing the drum, cleaning blade and toner cleaning blade shaft at the back does not drop out.
guide roller, coat the entire surface of the drum and
also the cleaning blade with setting powder, regardless
of whether the drum and cleaning blade are new or old
type parts. Also, apply toner to both edges of the
cleaning blade.
2-K-1
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT
a. Procedure (6) Remove the set screw, then remove the cleaning blade
(1) Open the front door, then remove the drum unit. from the blade mounting plate.
(2) Remove the charging corona unit. (7) Remove the blade spacer from the cleaning blade.
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove the cleaner
cover.
Cleaning blade
Cleaner cover Blade spacer
Blade mounting
plate
Set screw
Set screws
(8) Re-install the cleaning blade in the opposite sequence

to removal.
(4) Remove the blade shaft retainer.

(5) Lift out the blade mounting plate.
Caution: Take care that the blade spacer does not drop out.
Blade mounting plate
Blade spacer
Blade shaft
retainer
2-K-2
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE
CLEANING/TONER UNIT-1
RECYCLE UNIT
2. Removing and Re-installing the Guide Roller Note: Before removing the drum, rotate cleaner idler gear B
Caution: counterclockwise in order to prevent toner from drop-
1. When installing the guide roller, it is necessary to set ping to the bottom of the unit, and also remove any
the drum accurately in the center position. When the toner between the drum and the guide roller.If the toner
drum used in this machine is removed, the drive shaft cannot be removed, rotate the drum clockwise a bit,
remains in the main body, hence it is necessary to then detach the drum while keeping the toner in place.
center the drum using the two jigs inside the drum
cover.
(3) Remove cleaner idler gear and the two springs.
Jig (small)
Jig (large)
Cleaner idler gear
Springs
Drum cover
2. When installing the drum, cleaning blade and guide (4) Remove the left and right set screws (one each), then
roller, coat the entire surface of the drum and also the remove the left and right shaft positioning pieces.
cleaning blade with setting powder, regardless of (5) Lift out the guide roller.
whether the drum and cleaning blade are new or old
type parts. Also, apply toner to both edges of the
cleaning blade.
3. Once the drum has been coated with setting powder, Set screw
carry out the following work before installing the drum Guide roller
unit on the main body.
1) To ensure that the toner density is correct, before
installing the drum to the drum unit, discharge the
surface of γ detection sensor and the Dmax sen-
sor on the control board by using a piece of cloth
moistened with alcohol, thus preventing toner
from adhering to the sensors.
2) After installing the drum to the drum unit, with the Shaft positioning piece
charging corona unit and the developing unit
removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides
of the drum, then turn the drum one revolution.
This prevents setting powder from scattering onto Shaft positioning piece
the charging corona unit and also prevents image Set screw
defects.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit.
(2) Remove the charging corona unit, blade mounting
plate, developing unit and drum from the drum unit.
2-K-3
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT-1
UNIT
(6) Clean any toner that has dropped off the guide roller. [4] MC10 (cleaner) Control
(7) Install the drum, then insert the centering jigs into both
ends of the drum.
MC10 DRIVE 30-B2

Drum 24VDC 30-B1 MC10
CB
Jig (large)
MC10 (cleaner) is driven by the CB (control board).
1. Operation
Jig (small)
MC10 uses a 24 V DC solenoid which goes ON and
OFF in synchronism with M4 (drum).
(8) Install the guide roller and the two shaft positioning 2. Signal
pieces, and temporarily fix these parts with the two set a. Output signal
screws, leaving the screws loose. (1) MC10 DRIVE (CB→ MC10)
(9) Install the two springs and bring the guide roller and the MC10 drive control signal
drum into contact with each other, then fully tighten the [L]: MC10 ON
two set screws that you temporarily inserted. [H]: MC10 OFF
(10) Remove the centering jigs from the ends of the drum,
and store them inside the drum cover.
removal.
2-K-4
PAPER FEED UNIT
PAPER FEED UNIT

[1] Composition
2nd paper feed clutch
2nd paper feed roller By-pass feed roller

By-pass feed roller
Feed roller
Upper tray
motor
Paper feed motor Paper feed roller

By-pass plate Lower tray
motor
Double feed
prevention roller
By-pass paper feed Paper feed roller
solenoid Feed roller
By-pass clutch 1st paper feed solenoid

Conveyance clutch (upper)
(upper) Paper feed
clutch (upper)
Conveyance 1st paper feed solenoid

clutch (lower) (lower)
Paper lift-up plate
Paper feed
clutch (lower)
Paper lift-up plate
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method Mechanism Method
Paper stack Tray (2-stage) 2nd paper feed Registration roller, 2nd paper feed
*1 Paper lift pressure Swivel roller clutch
reduction Multi tray paper Feed roller, by-pass paper feed sole-
*2 Paper lift-up Paper lift-up plate feed noid
Double feed prevention Torque limiter *4 Paper size Tray detection switch
*3 Tray loading Front loading detection (upper Tray: contact switches.)
1st paper feed Feed roller, 1st paper feed sole- (lower Tray: Write paper size to
noid memory.)
*5 Remaining paper Index sheet
indication
2-L-1
PAPER FEED UNIT
*1: Swivel roller *3: Paper up-down base release operation

The paper feed direction and the Tray loading direction are When the tray is being removed, the projection on the right
at right angles to each other. Consequently, if the feed side of the tray strikes the paper up-down base release
roller is fixed, it will touch the paper when the Tray is lever, causing the paper lift-up gear to be disengaged by
removed, resulting in possible paper jamming. To prevent the gear coupling lever. As a result, the up-down base falls
this, the swivel roller (paper feed roller) is designed so that under its own weight.
it drops down and touches the paper only when paper feed
is taking place.
Paper feed swivel plate
Paper feed roller
Paper feed solenoid

Tray projection
Up-down
base release
lever
*2: Paper lift-up
When the paper feed tray is installed, the paper lift-up plate
is moved by the tray motor, paper feed idler gear and the
paper lift-up gear, causing the paper in the tray to be fed *4: Paper size detection
automatically to the paper feed position. The side guide and rear guide of the upper tray move,
causing the paper size detection knob to move as well. As
a result, the switch on the detection board is turned ON/
OFF. In this way, paper size detection takes place auto-
Swivel roller matically.
Paper
Paper lift-up plate
Paper size detection knob
2-L-2
PAPER
PAPERFEED
FEEDUNIT-1
UNIT
*5: Remaining paper indication [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly

The amount of paper remaining in the tray can be checked 1. Removing and Re-installing the Paper Feed
roughly by looking through the remaining paper indicator Unit
window. Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
The remaining paper detection lever moves along with the from the power outlet.
up-down motion of the tray, and the index sheet is caused a. Procedure
to slide by a tension spring. (1) Open the front door, then pull out the upper/lower tray
in the forward direction.
(2) Slacken the five set screws, then remove the right side
Tension spring
Tray upper cover.(You must open the by-pass feed plate in
order to remove one of these screws.)
(3) Slacken the two screws, then remove the right side
lower cover.
Set screws Set screw

Index sheet (behind by-pass
feed)
Remaining paper
detection lever
Right side
upper cover
Set screws
Right side lower cover
(4) Disconnect the two connectors (CN7 and CN144) from

the control board, then remove the paper feed cable
from the cord clamp.
(5) Remove the four set screws, then remove the paper
feed unit.
Set screws
Set screws Connector

(CN144)
Paper feed and

conveyance door
Connector
(CN7)
(6) Re-install the paper feed unit in the opposite sequence

to removal.
2-L-3
PAPER FEED UNIT
2. Removing and Re-installing the By-pass Feed (4) Remove the by-pass feed roller from the paper feed
Base drive shaft.
a. Procedure (5) Remove the stop ring, then remove the paper feed
(1) Remove the paper feed unit. roller.
(2) Remove the two set screws, disconnect the conector (6) Remove the rubber (paper feed rubber, paper supply
then remove the by-pass feed base. rubber) from each roller.
Paper feed rubber

By-pass feed base By-pass feed roller
Paper supply rubber
By-pass
paper feed
roller
Set screw Stop ring
Set screw
Connector
(3) Re-install the by-pass feed table in the opposite (7) Re-install the above parts in the opposite sequence to
sequence to removal. removal.
3. Replacing the Rubber of the By-pass Feed 4. Replacing the rubber (paper supply rubber) of
Roller/By-pass Paper Feed Roller the by-pass feed double feed prevention roller
(1) Remove the paper feed unit. (1) Remove the by-pass paper feed unit.
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN233) of the paper feed (2) Remove the by-pass feed base.
clutch (B). (3) Cut the three wiring bands so as to free the wiring.
(3) Remove one stop ring from the by-pass feed drive
shaft, then pull out the by-pass feed drive shaft from the
Wiring bands
paper feed clutch (B) side.
Stop ring Wiring
By-pass feed
drive shaft
E ring
Paper feed
clutch (B)
By-pass feed top plate
CN233
2-L-4
PAPER FEED UNIT
(4) Remove the four set screws, then remove the by-pass (8) Remove the E ring of front side, then remove the
feed top plate. double feed drive gear (white).
(9) Remove the bearing and double feed drive gear (black).
Set screws (at opposite side as well)
< Front of paper feed unit >
Bearing
Double feed drive gear

(white)
By-pass feed top Double feed drive

plate gear (black)
E ring
(5) Grasp the base of the SK binder of the wires with radio
pliers, then push the SK binder outward and remove it.
(6) Remove the four set screws, then free the by-pass (10) Remove the two stop rings, bearing and pin, then
feed bottom plate. remove the torque limiter and the double feed preven-
(7) Lift the by-pass feed bottom plate using the shaft side tion roller.
as a pivot.
Torque limiter Paint mark

SK binder Double feed
Shaft prevention
roller
Pin
Stop ring
Bearing
Stop ring
By-pass feed
bottom plate
Set screws (at opposite side as well)

removal.
Caution: Ensure that the mounting direction of the rubber is
correct.
2-L-5
PAPER FEED UNIT
5. Replacing the 1st Paper Feed Solenoids (upper (3) Remove the two set screws, then remove the 1st paper
and lower) feed solenoid.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
Set screws
Paper feed unit
1st paper feed

solenoid
(upper)
1st paper feed

solenoid
(lower)
1st solenoid

removal.
(2) Remove the two set screws and the connector (CN122
or CN 123) of the solenoid then remove the solenoid.
CN (122/123)
Set screw
2-L-6
PAPER FEED UNIT
6. Replacing the Rubber of the Upper Paper Feed (6) Pull out the three stop rings, the three shaft bearings,
Roller and the Feed Roller the paper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of
a. Procedure the paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller.
(1) Remove the paper feed unit. (7) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber A and
(2) Raise the paper lifting plate while pushing the up-down the double feed prevention rubber).
base lever.
Paint mark
(3) Remove the three set screws, then remove the upper
cassette rail (front).
Double feed prevention rubber
Set screws Feed roller
Paper feed drive belt
Blue mark
Stop ring
Bearing
Bearing Stop ring
Feed rubber/A
Cassette rail (front) Paper feed roller Bearing

Paper lifting plate Set screw Paper feed
Up-Down base lever Blue mark Stop ring reference
actuator
(4) Remove SD1 (1st paper exit SD (upper tray)). (8) Re-install the rubber in the opposite sequence to
(5) Remove the two Stop rings, then shift the left and right removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the upper on each rubber.)
stage 1st paper feed roller unit. Note:
1. Confirm that the mounting direction of each roller and
rubber is correct.
2. Be sure to return the paper lifting plate to its original
position.
(When returning the lifting plate, push the up-down
base release lever.)
Stop ring Shaft Feed roller

bearing
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller Stop ring
2-L-7
PAPER FEED UNIT
7. Replacing the Rubber of the Upper Stage Paper 8. Replacing the Rubber for the Lower Paper Feed
Feed Double Feed Prevention Roller (double Roller and the Feed Roller
feed prevention rubber) a. Procedure
a. Procedure (1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(1) Remove the paper feed roller. (2) Remove the upper cassette rail (front).
(2) Remove the upper stage cassette rail (front). (3) Remove the three set screws, then remove the lower
(3) Remove the two stop rings, then remove the feed roller cassette rail (front).
unit. (Refer to the description of replacing the upper
stage paper feed roller and the feed roller rubber.)
(4) Remove the two set screws, then pull out the shaft and
remove the paper feed prevention roller together with Set screws
the paper feed reversal gear.
Paper feed prevention roller Set screw

(Double feed prevention rubber)
Stop ring Paint mark
Paper feed
reversal gear
Shaft
Stop ring
Cassette rail (front)
(4) Remove SD2 (1st paper exit SD (lower tray)).

(5) Remove the two stop rings, then shift the left and right
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the lower
stage 1st paper feed roller unit.
(5) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the
double feed prevention roller.
stop ring
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark Shaft bearing
on the rubber.)
correct.
Paper feed roller
Shaft
stop ring bearing
2-L-8
PAPER FEED UNIT
(6) Pull out the three stop rings, the three shaft bearings, 9. Replacing the Lower Stage Paper Feed Double
the paper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of Feed Prevention Roller (double feed prevention
the paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller. rubber)
(7) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber A and a. Procedure
the double feed prevention rubber). (1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the upper and lower cassette rails (front).
Paint mark (3) Remove the two stop rings, then remove the feed roller
unit. (Refer to the description of replacing the lower
stage paper feed roller and the feed roller rubber.)
(4) Remove the two set screws, then pull out the shaft and
Feed roller
remove the paper feed prevention roller together with
Paper feed drive belt the paper feed reversal gear.
Blue mark
Paper feed prevention roller

Stop ring (Double feed prevention rubber)
Stop ring Paint mark
Bearing
Bearing Stop ring Paper feed
reversal gear
Shaft
Feed rubber/A
Stop ring
Paper feed roller Bearing

Paper feed
Blue mark Stop ring reference
actuator
(8) Re-install the rubber in the opposite sequence to

removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on each rubber.)
correct. (5) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the
on the rubber.)
correct.
2-L-9
PAPER FEED
PAPER FEED UNIT
UNIT-1
10.Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch 11.Removing and Re-installing the 2nd Paper Feed
a. Procedure Unit
(1) Remove the paper feed unit. Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
(2) Disconnect each connector (CN234 and CN464). from the power outlet.
(3) Remove the intermediate conveyance clutches (MC8 a. Procedure
and MC9) while pulling the claw outward, (1) Remove the drum unit, transfer/separation unit, and
paper feed unit.
Claw Intermediate conveyance
clutch (MC9) (2) Remove the flywheel.
(4) Remove the 1set screw, then remove the rotation
stopper of the 2nd paper feed clutch (MC3).
Caution: DO NOT touch the drum drive gear with a screw-
driver when removing the set screws.
Set screw
Connector
(CN464) Rotation
stopper
Rotation
Connector stopper
(CN234) Intermediate
conveyance clutch Drum drive gear
(MC8)

removal.
(Push the end of the clutch rotation stopper against the
plate.) 2nd paper feed clutch (MC3)
Connector (CN86)
(5) Loosen the set screw, then remove the 2nd paper feed
clutch and the gear.(Clutch and gear are one-part.)
Set
screw
2nd paper feed clutch (MC3)
2 - L - 10
PAPER FEED UNIT
(6) Remove the three intermediate connectors (CN42, 71

and 85). 12.Removing and Re-installing the Upper Tray
(7) Remove the set screw. a. Procedure
(1) Withdraw the upper tray, then remove the three set
screws.
set screw
Set screws
Connector (CN42)
Connector (CN71)
Connector (CN85)
Upper tray Set screw

(8) Remove the set screw on the front , then pull out and
remove the 2nd paper feed unit.
(2) Withdraw the upper tray further, then lift it out.
(3) Re-install the upper tray in the opposite sequence to
removal.
13.Removing and Re-installing the Lower Tray

a. Procedure
(1) Withdraw the lower tray, then remove the three set
screws.
(2) Withdraw the lower tray further, then lift it out.
Set screws
Set screw
2nd paper feed unit
(9) Re-install the 2nd paper feed unit in the opposite

Lower tray Set screw
(3) Re-install the lower tray in the opposite sequence to

removal.
2 - L - 11
PAPER FEED UNIT
14.Replacing the Paper Feed Regulating Gear A 15.Replacing the Registration Roller (Upper/Lower)
(1) Remove the paper feed unit. (1) Remove the 2nd paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the connector (CN464) from the intermediate (2) Remove the set screw, then remove the roller knob.
conveyance clutch. (3) Remove the two E rings from each registration roller.
(3) Remove the intermediate conveyance clutch (MC9)
while pulling the claw outward. E rings
E ring
Intermediate conveyance
Claw
clutch (MC9)
E ring
Set screw
Connector
(CN464)
Roller knob
(4) Remove the two (front and rear) paper registration

springs.
(4) Remove the E ring then remove the paper feed regu- Caution: When installing and removing the registration
lating gear A. springs, ensure that the hooks on the ends of the
registration spring are engaged with each other.
(5) Remove the paper registration gear (upper) and the
two bearings (upper), then remove the registration
roller (upper).
Paper feed
regulating
gear A Paper registration
gear (upper)
Bearing (upper)
Registration
roller (upper)
E ring
Bearing (upper)
Paper registration
spring(White)

removal. (Push the end of the rotation stopper of the
clutch against the plate.) Paper registration spring (Black)
2 - L - 12
PAPER FEED UNIT
(6) Remove the paper registration bearing (rear) and

paper registration bearing (lower).
(7) Remove the two bearings (lower), then remove the
registration roller (lower).
Pin
Paper Registration
registration roller (lower)
bearing (lower)
Paper
registration
bearing (rear)
Bearing
(lower)
Bearing (lower)

removal.
Caution:
1. You cannot install the paper registration spring with the
front (black) and rear (white) ends reversed.
2. The paper registration plate (lower) must enter the
paper registration bearing groove. Also, the groove
side of the bearing must be on the inside.
Paper feed
registration plate
(lower)
Groove in paper
registration bearing
3. Each flange of bearing (upper) and bearing (lower)

must face outward.
2 - L - 13
PAPERFEED
PAPER FEEDUNIT
UNIT-1
[4] Paper Feed Control
40VDC 88-5
DCPS PGND 88-3
M140
52-1 7-B11 SGND
CB 5VDC 120-A1
PS11 52-2 11-B8 PS11 M140 CONT 120-A2

52-3 11-A11 5VDC M140 PLL 120-A3
SGND 120-A4
13-1 M140 CLOCK 120-A5
PS18 13-2 7-B5 PS18

13-3
SD1 DRIVE 7-A6
141-1 24VDC 7-A5
SD1
PS19 141-2 7-B6 PS19
SD2 DRIVE 7-A7
141-3 SD2
46-1 6-A1 SGND SD3 DRIVE 7-A8

SD3
PS14 46-2 6-A2 PS14
46-3 6-A3 5VDC
MC5 DRIVE 7-A9
MC5
32-1 6-A4 SGND
PS30 32-2 6-A5 PS30 MC6 DRIVE 7-A10

32-3 6-A6 5VDC
MC6
MC7 DRIVE 7-A12

MC7
6-A8 MC3 DRIVE
MC3
6-A7 24VDC MC8 DRIVE 7-B12
MC8
6-B11 SD5 DRIVE MC9 DRIVE 144-4

SD5 6-B10 24VDC
MC9
The 1st paper feed takes place as a result of the transmission 1. Operation
of drive force from M140 (paper feed) via MC5 (1st paper feed a. 1st paper feed operation timing
(upper)), MC6 (1st paper feed (lower)) and MC7 (by-pass (1) 1st copy start
paper feed) to the respective paper feed rollers. At this time, Timing that is determined by the P counter from when
the paper feed rollers are not touching the paper, hence the the charging corona unit goes ON
swivel roller and the by-pass plate are moved up and down by (2) 2nd copy start
SD1 (1st paper feed (upper), SD2 (1st paper feed (lower)) and After the specified period from when PS14 (registra-
SD3 (by-pass paper feed), causing each roller to touch the tion) goes ON for the 1st copy
paper. Control of each roller is done by the CB (control board). (3) OFF timing
The 2nd paper feed is done by MC3. Related signals are PS11 Specified count on the P counter
(conveyance door), PS14 (registration), PS18 (no feed), PS19
(optics sync), PS20 (pre-feed (upper)), PS21 (pre-feed (lower)) b. Intermediate conveyance control
and PS30 (by-pass). The paper fed from the upper and lower trays is conveyed
to the 2nd paper feed section by the drive force of M140 via
MC8 (conveyance 1) and MC9 (conveyance 2). This
conveyance section is also used for feeding paper from the
ADU and LCT. However, it not used for by-pass paper
feed.
(1) MC8 ON timing
When PS20 or PS21 is ON
(2) MC8 OFF timing
After the specified period from when PS20 or PS21
goes OFF.
2 - L - 14
PAPER
PAPERFEED
FEEDUNIT-1
UNIT
c. 2nd paper feed control (6) PS19 (PS19 → CB)

The paper conveyed to the 2nd paper feed section stops During continuous paper feed from the LCT/ADU, the
after the specified period from when PS14 goes ON (loop CB checks the state of PS18 (no feed) when the paper
formation). reaches the specified position past PS19, and if the
(1) MC3 ON timing previous sheet of paper is still at PS18, the CB tempo-
1) Direct exposure scan copying rarily stops paper feed.
(When very high mode is selected) Paper feed restarts after the trailing edge of the previ-
After the specified period from when PS4 (paper ously fed paper has passed PS18 (no feed).
feed restart) goes ON
2) Copying in the E-RDH mode
(Except very high mode) b. Output signals
After the specified period from when PS18 goes (1) SD1 DRIVE (CB → SD1)
ON, or after the specified period from when MC7 SD1 drive control signal
(by-pass paper feed) goes ON [L]: SD1 ON
[H]: SD1 OFF
2. Signals (2) SD2 DRIVE (CB → SD2)
a. Input signals SD2 drive control signal
(1) PS11 (PS11 → CB) [L]: SD2 ON
Conveyance door open/close detection signal [H]: SD2 OFF
[L]: Door is closed (3) SD3 DRIVE (CB → SD3)
[H]: Door is open SD3 drive control signal
(2) PS18 (PS18 → CB) [L]: SD3 ON
When the tray, LCT or ADU is used, the image data [H]: SD3 OFF
from the E-RDH determines the laser write timing. (4) SD5 DRIVE (CB → SD5)
Laser write starts after the specified period from when SD5 drive control signal
PS18 goes ON. [L]: SD5 ON
Also, during LCT or ADU paper feed, when the paper [H]: SD5 OFF
turns PS19 (optics sync) ON, the CB checks the ON or (5) MC5 DRIVE (CB → MC5)
OFF state of PS18, and if PS18 was turned ON by the MC5 drive control signal
previous sheet of paper, the CB stops the paper [L]: MC5 ON
momentarily at the predetermined position after PS19 [H]: MC5 OFF
ON. After the paper has passed PS18, paper feed (6) MC6 DRIVE (CB → MC6)
restarts. MC6 drive control signal
[L]: Paper is detected [L]: MC6 ON
[H]: Paper is not detected [H]: MC6 OFF
(3) PS14 (PS14 → CB) (7) MC7 DRIVE (CB → MC7)
Paper detection signal used for detecting the paper MC7 drive control signal
feed temporary stop position [L]: MC7 ON
PS14 goes ON and outputs [L] when paper is detected [H]: MC7 OFF
at the paper feed temporary stop position. (8) MC8 DRIVE (CB → MC8)
(4) PS30 (PS30 → CB) MC8 drive control signal
Jam detection sensor [L]: MC8 ON
[L]: Paper is detected [H]: MC8 OFF
[H]: Paper is not detected (9) MC9 DRIVE (CB → MC9)
(5) PS20/21 (PS21/21 → CB) MC9 drive control signal
Sensor which determines the operation timing of MC8 [L]: MC9 ON
(conveyance CL) (paper is conveyed as far the 2nd [H]: MC9 OFF
paper feed section)
MC8 goes ON when PS20 or PS21 is ON.
2 - L - 15
PAPER FEED UNIT
(10) M40 CONT (CB → M140) [5] Paper Up-down Control

M40 ON/OFF control signal
[L]: M40 ON
[H]: M40 OFF
M17 DRIVE 7-A1
(11) M140 PLL (CB→ M140) 24VDC 7-A2
M17
M140 PLL speed stabilizing signal
(12) M140 CLK (CB → M140) M18 DRIVE 7-A3
M18
24VDC 7-A4
M140 speed instruction signal
SGND 7-B11 58-1
PS16 7-B3 58-2 PS16
5VDC 7-A11 58-3
59-1
PS17 7-B4 59-2 PS17
59-3
327-1
PS20 7-B9 327-2 PS20
327-3
328-1
PS21 7-B10 328-2 PS21
328-3
CB
When a paper feed tray is loaded, M17 (upper tray) or M18

(lower tray) goes ON for a fixed period, raising the bottom plate
in the tray.
Related signals are PS16 (upper tray upper limit detection),
PS17 (lower tray upper limit detection), PS20 (upper tray set
detection) and PS21 (lower tray set detection).
1. Operation
a. ON timing
M17 or M18 is turned ON by the paper size detecting
sensor.
b. ON timing
M17 or M18 is turned OFF by PS16 or PS17 going ON.
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) PS16 (PS16 → CB)
Upper tray upper limit detection signal
The paper in the upper tray is raised by M17, and when
it reaches the upper limit position this signal becomes
[L].
(2) PS17 (PS17 → CB)
Lower tray upper limit detection signal
The paper in the upper tray is raised by M18, and when
it reaches the upper limit position this signal becomes
[L].
2 - L - 16
PAPER FEED UNIT
b. Output signals [6] Paper Size Detection Control

(1) M17 DRIVE (CB → M17)
[L]: M17 ON
[H]: M17 OFF
(2) M18 DRIVE (CB → M18) TMP 1 60-B1
M18 drive control signal TMP 2 60-B2
[L]: M18 ON 0 60-B3
PAPER SIZE 1 60-B4

[H]: M18 OFF RETURN 2 60-B5
3 60-B6
PAPER SIZE
DETECTION
BOARD
SGND 7-B11 462-1

PS22 144-1 462-2 PS22
5VDC 7-A11 462-3
465-3
VR1 144-3 465-2 VR1
465-1
CB
The size of the paper in the upper tray is detected as a result

of the matrix circuit in the CB (control board) detecting the
signal from the paper size detection board. The size of paper
in the by-pass feed tray is detected by the CB according to the
combination of PS22 (by-pass feed paper size detection) and
VR1 (by-pass paper size detection).
1. Operation
a. Tray (upper) paper size detection
The paper size detection board has four switches which
detect the position of the rear guide in the tray (upper). The
paper size is detected according to the particular ON-OFF
combination of these switches.
Paper size A B C D
A3/11" × 17" OFF OFF OFF ON
B4/81/ 2" × 10" ON OFF OFF ON
A4/81/2" × 11" OFF ON OFF ON
B5/81/ 2" × 51/2" OFF ON ON OFF
B6 OFF OFF ON OFF
A4R/81/ 2" × 11"R ON ON ON OFF
B5R/81/2" × 51/2"R OFF ON OFF OFF
The relation between the state of the switches on the paper
size detection board and the paper size is shown below.
b. Tray (lower) paper size setting

The size of paper in the tray (lower) is set in the 25 mode.
(Refer to the Adjustment section.)
2 - L - 17
PAPER FEED UNIT
c. Detection of size of paper in the by-pass feed tray. 2. Signals

The size in the lengthwise direction of the paper in the by- a. Input signals
pass feed tray is detected by the ON/OFF state of PS22, (1) PAPER SIZE RETURN 0 to 3 (Paper size detection
and the size in the widthwise direction is detected by the board → CB)
resistance of VR1 which varies according to the position of Paper size detection switch ON/OFF signal
the guide on the tray. (2) PS22 (PS11 → CB)
By-pass feed tray lengthwise direction paper size
detection signal
[L]: B4/14" size or larger
[H]: A4R/11" size or less
(3) VR1 (VR1 → CB)
By-pass feed trays widthwise direction paper size
detection signal
b. Output signals
(1) TEMP 1 (CB → Paper size detection board)
Upper tray paper size detection timing pulses
(2) TEMP 2 (CB → Paper size detection board)
Lower tray detection timing pulses
2 - L - 18
PAPER FEED UNIT
[7] No Paper Detection Control
SGND 7-B11 44-1

PS12 7-B1 44-2 PS12
5VDC 7-A11 44-3
45-1
PS13 7-B2 45-2 PS13
45-3
47-1
PS15 7-B7 47-2 PS15
47-3
CB
No paper detection takes place by PS12 (upper tray no paper

detection), PS13 (lower tray no paper detection) and PS15 (by-
pass no paper detection) which are controlled by the CB
(control board).
1. Operation
a. No paper detection control
When a paper feed tray or the by-pass feed tray becomes
empty, PS12, PS13 or PS15 goes ON. As a result, the
corresponding LED on OB1 (operation board 1) lights, and
a message is displayed on the LCD (VFD1, VFD2) con-
nected to OB2 (operation board 2).
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) PS12 (PS12 → CB)
Upper tray no paper detection signal
[L]: No paper in tray
[H]: Paper in tray
(2) PS13 (PS13 → CB)
Lower tray no paper detection signal
[H]: Paper in tray
(3) PS15 (PS15 → CB)
By-pass feed tray no paper detection signal
[H]: Paper in tray
2 - L - 19
LCT-1500 TRAY
LCT-1000 PAPER
TRAY FEED/CONVEYANCE
PAPER SECTION-1
FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION
LCT-1000 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION

[1] Composition
Conveyance roller (upper)

LCT conveyance PS (PS144)
LCT Conveyance CL (CL3) Feed roller
Paper feed swivel plate
LCT paper feed SD (SD141)
No paper detecting actuator

Paper feed roller
Upper limit detection actuator
[2] Mechanisms *1: Roller swiveling

To prevent the 1st paper feed roller from touching the paper
Mechanism Method and causing a paper jam when the paper tray is being
*1 Feed Roller swiveling removed, the paper feed roller is designed so that it drops
1st paper feed 1st paper feed roller, paper feed down and touches the paper only when paper feed is taking
solenoid, paper feed clutch place.
Double feed prevention Torque limiter This operation takes place as a result of the LCT paper feed
No paper detection Photosensor solenoid driving the paper feed swivel plate.
Paper size detection None
Paper conveyance Roller conveyance
Conveyance drive Timing belt
Feed roller
LCT paper feed
SD (SD141)
Paper feed roller
2-M-1

1. Removing and Re-installing the 1000 Tray
Shaft bearing
Paper Feed/Conveyance Section
a. Procedure
(1) Withdraw the LCT1000 tray tray in the forward direc-
tion. Stop ring
(2) Slacken the five set screws, then remove the right side
upper cover.
(3) Slacken the two set screws, then remove the right side Shaft bearing
lower cover.
(4) Disconnect the two intermediate connectors (CN722,
728).
(5) Remove the four set screws, then remove the LCT1000
paper feed/conveyance section. Stop ring
Paper feed roller
LCT1000 tray paper feed/

conveyance section
CN722
(3) Pull out the three E rings, the three shaft bearings, the
paper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of the
paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller.
(4) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber A and
the double feed prevention rubber).
Paint mark
CN728
Feed roller
Set screws
LCT 1000 tray Paper feed drive belt
Blue mark
(6) Re-install the 1000 tray paper feed/conveyance sec-

Stop ring
tion in the opposite sequence to removal.
Bearing
2. Replacing the Rubber of the Paper Feed Roller Bearing Stop ring
and the Feed Roller
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the LCT1000 paper feed/conveyance sec- Feed rubber/A
tion.
(2) Remove the two stop rings, then shift the left and right Paper feed roller Bearing
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the paper Paper feed
feed roller unit. Blue mark Stop ring reference
actuator

on each rubber.)
2-M-2
3. Replacing the Rubber of the Double Feed (4) Remove the three Stop rings, then pull out the shaft,
Prevention Roller and remove the double feed prevention roller.
a. Procedure (5) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the
(1) Remove the LCT1000 paper feed/conveyance sec- double feed prevention roller.
tion.
(2) Slacken the two set screws, then remove the LCT Stop rings
conveyance door.
Paint mark
Set screw
Double feed
prevention roller
Double feed prevention Shaft

rubber
LCT conveyance door (6) Re-install the rubber in the opposite sequence to
Set screw
removal.
(3) Remove the two set screws, and remove the double correct.
feed prevention roller. (When re-installing the double
feed prevention roller, insert the two projections on the
double feed prevention roller unit into the square holes,
and push them downward to fix them in place.
Double feed prevention roller unit
Push-down
direction
Set screw Set screw
2-M-3
4. Replacing the Paper Feed Clutch 5. Replacing the Solenoid

(1) Remove the LCT1000 paper feed/conveyance sec- (1) Remove the LCT1000 paper/conveyance section.
tion. (2) Disconnect the solenoid connector (CN721).
(2) Disconnect the connectors (CN720 and CN730) of the (3) Remove the set screw, then remove the solenoid
paper feed clutch. pulling piece together with the spring.
(3) Remove the paper feed clutch while pulling the claw
Connector
outward. (CN721)
Claw
Paper feed
clutch
Set screw
Connector
(CN720)
Solenoid pulling
Paper feed piece
clutch Spring
Connector
(CN730)
(4) Remove the two set screws, the remove the solenoid.

removal.
Caution: Do not forget to fix the clutch to prevent it from
rotating.
Solenoid
Set screws

removal.
2-M-4
[4] 1000 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper b. No paper detection control

Detection Control When there is no more copy paper in the LCT1000 tray,
PS141 goes ON, and a message is displayed on the
indicating board via OB1 (operation board 1).
CL3 DRIVE 120-B9 CL3 78-2 24VDC 2. Signals
a. Input signals
CL1 DRIVE 120-B10
(1) PS141 (PS141 → CB)
CL1
No paper detection signal from the 1000 tray
[H]: No paper in tray
SD141 DRIVE 120-B11 SD141 [L]: Paper in tray
SGND 83-B1 723-1
(2) PS144 (PS144 → CB)
PS141 83-B4 723-2 PS141 Paper passage detection signal from the 1000 tray
5VDC 83-B5 723-3
conveyance section.
727-1
This signal is [L] while paper is passing through the
PS144 83-B8 727-2 PS144 1000 tray conveyance section.
CB 727-3
(3) PS210 (PS210 → CB)
726-1 1st paper feed detection signal from the 1000 tray.
PS210 83-B9 726-2 PS210 This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.
726-3
5VDC 120-A1 88-5 40VDC b. Output signals

M140 CONT 120-A2 88-3 PGND (1) M140 CONT (CB → M140)
M140 PLL 120-A3 M140 M140 ON/OFF control signal
SGND 120-A4
M140 CLOCK 120-A5 [H]: M140 OFF
DCPS [L]: M140 ON
(2) M140 PLL (CB → M140)
PLL control clock signal for M140
The 1st paper feed from the 1000 tray takes place as a result (3) M140 CLOCK (CB→ M140)
of the transmission of the rotational force of M140 (LCT paper
feed) by means of CL1 (LCT 1st paper feed (1000)). The paper (4) CL1 DRIVE (CB → CL1)
feed roller does not touch the paper at this time, so SD141 (LCT ON/OFF drive signal for CL1
1st paper feed (1000)) swivels, bringing the paper feed roller [H]: CL1 OFF
into contact with the paper. [L]: CL1 ON
The fed paper is conveyed to the paper feed unit by drive force (5) CL3 DRIVE (CB → CL3)
from M140 which is transmitted to the conveyance roller via ON/OFF drive signal for CL3
CL3 (LCT conveyance). [H]: CL3 OFF
M140, CL1, CL3 and SD141 are driven by the CB (control [L]: CL3 ON
board). Related signals are PS141 (LCT no paper detection (6) SD141 DRIVE (CB → SD141)
(1000)), PS144 (LCT conveyance (1000)), and PS210 (LCT ON/OFF drive signal for SD141
pre-feed (1000)). [H]: SD141 OFF
[L]: SD141 ON
1. Operation
a. 1st paper feed operation timing
(1) Start of paper feed for 1st copy
Timing determined by the P counter from when the
charging corona unit goes ON
(2) Start of paper feed for 2nd copy
After the specified period from when PS14 (registra-
tion) goes ON during the 1st copy operation.
(3) OFF timing
Specified count on the P counter
2-M-5
LCT-1500 TRAY
LCT-1500 PAPER
PAPER SECTION-1

[1] Composition
Feed roller
LCT paper feed SD (SD140)
Horizontal conveyance rollers
Upper limit detection actuator
Paper feed
roller
No paperdetection actuator
[2] Mechanisms *1: Roller swiveling

To prevent the 1st paper feed roller from touching the paper
Mechanism Method and causing a paper jam when the paper tray is being
*1 Feed Roller swivel removed, the paper feed roller is designed so that it drops
1st paper feed 1st paper feed roller, paper feed down and touches the paper only when paper feed is taking
solenoid place.
Double feed prevention Torque limiter This operation is takes place as a result of the LCT paper
No paper detection Photo sensor feed solenoid driving the paper feed swivel plate.
Paper size detection None
Paper conveyance Roller conveyance
Conveyance drive Timing belt
Paper feed roller
Feed roller
LCT paper feed SD Paper feed swivel plate

(SD140)
2-N-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly (3) Remove the two stop rings, then shift the left and right
1. Removing and Re-installing the 1500 Tray shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the 1st paper
Paper Feed/Conveyance Section feed roller unit.
a. Procedure Shaft bearing
(1) Withdraw the LCT1000 tray/LCT1500 tray in the for-
ward direction. Feed roller
(2) Withdraw the LCT1500 tray paper feed/conveyance
section in the forward direction, then withdraw it further
and lift it out. Stop ring
LCT1500 tray paper

conveyance section
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller
Stop ring
(4) Pull out the three Stop rings, the three shaft bearings,
the paper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of
the paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller.
(3) Re-install the 1500 tray paper feed/conveyance sec- (5) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber A and
tion in the opposite sequence to removal. the double feed prevention rubber).
2. Replacing the Rubber of the Paper Feed Roller Paint mark

and Feed Roller
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the LCT1500 paper feed/conveyance sec-
tion. Feed roller
(2) Remove the two set screws, then remove the convey- Paper feed drive belt
ance cover. Blue mark
Set screw Stop ring
Conveyance cover Bearing

Bearing Stop ring
Feed rubber/A
Paper feed roller Bearing

Paper feed
Blue mark Stop ring reference
actuator

Set screw removal.
correct.
2-N-2
3. Replacing the rubber of the double feed 4. Replacing the Conveyance Solenoid
prevention roller a. Procedure
a. Procedure (1) Remove the LCT1500 paper feed/conveyance section
(1) Remove the LCT 1500 paper feed/conveyance sec- (2) Remove the three set screws, then remove the belt
tion. cover.
(2) Remove the two set screws, then remove the double
feed prevention roller. (When re-installing the roller
Set screws
unit, push it against the rear and fix it.)
Set screws
Pushing direction
Set screw Belt cover
Double feed prevention roller unit

(3) Remove the connector (CN714) of the solenoid of the
conveyance section.
(4) Remove the two set screws, then remove the convey-
(3) Remove the three stop rings, then pull out the shaft and
ance solenoid.
remove the double feed prevention roller.
(4) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the
Set screw Set screw
Stop rings
Paint mark Conveyance

solenoid
Double feed CN714

prevention roller
Double feed Shaft

prevention rubber
removal.
on the rubber, and also the direction in which you push
the double feed prevention roller unit.)
2-N-3
5. Replacing the LCT Clutch/2

a. Procedure
(1) Remove the LCT1500 paper feed/paper conveyance
section.
(2) Remove the two set screws and two E rings, then
remove the drive board.
Set screw
E rings
Drive board
Set screw
(3) Disconnect the connector of the clutch.

(4) Remove the set screw, then pull LCT clutch/2 off the
shaft.
Set screw
LCT clutch/2
Connector

removal.
2-N-4
LCT-1500 TRAY
LCT-1500 PAPER
PAPER SECTION-1
[4] 1500 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper b. No paper detection control

Detection Control When there is no more copy paper in the LCT1500, PS140
goes ON, and a message appears on the operation panel.
2. Signals
CL3 DRIVE 120-B9 CL3 78-2 24VDC a. Input signals
(1) PS140 (PS140 → CB)
CL2 DRIVE 120-B1 CL2 No paper detection signal from the 1500 tray
[H]: No paper in tray
SD140 DRIVE 120-B2
[L]: Paper in tray
SD140
(2) PS146 (PS146 → CB)
SGND 120-B1 710-1 Paper passage detection signal from the 1500 tray
PS141 120-B4 710-2 PS140 conveyance section.
5VDC 120-B5 710-3
This signal is [L] while paper is passing through the
713-1 1500 tray conveyance section.
CB
PS146 120-B7 713-2
713-3
PS146 (3) PS200 (PS200 → CB)
1st paper feed detection signal from the 1500 tray
712-1 This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.
PS200 120-B8 712-2 PS200
712-3
b. Output signals
5VDC 120-A1 88-5 40VDC (1) M140 CONT (CB → M140)
M140 CONT 120-A2 88-3 PGND
M140 PLL 120-A3 M140
SGND 120-A4 [H]: M140 OFF
M140 CLOCK 120-A5 [L]: M140 ON
DCPS
(2) M140 PLL (CB → M140)
(3) M140 CLOCK (CB → M140)
M140 speed instruction signal
The 1st paper feed from the 1500 tray takes place as a result
(4) CL2 DRIVE (CB → CL2)
of the transmission of the rotational force of M140 (LCT paper
ON/OFF drive signal for CL2
feed) by means of CL2 (LCT 1st paper feed (1500)). The paper
[H]: CL2 OFF
feed roller does not touch the paper at this time, so SD140 (LCT
[L]: CL2 ON
1st paper feed (1500)) swivels, bringing the paper feed roller
(5) CL3 DRIVE (CB → CL3)
into contact with the paper.
ON/OFF drive signal for CL3
The fed paper is conveyed to the paper feed unit by drive force
[H]: CL3 OFF
from M140 which is transmitted to the conveyance roller via
[L]: CL3 ON
CL3 (LCT conveyance).M140, CL2, CL3 and SD140 are driven
(6) SD140 DRIVE (CB → SD140)
by the CB (control board). Related signals are PS140 (LCT no
ON/OFF drive signal for SD140
paper detection (1500)), PS146 (LCT conveyance (1500)) and
[H]: SD140 OFF
PS200 (LCT pre-try (1500)).
[L]: SD140 ON
1. Operation
a. 1st paper feed operation timing
(1) Start of paper feed for 1st copy
Timing determined by the P counter from when the
charging corona unit goes ON
(2) Start of paper feed for 2nd copy
Specified period after PS14 (registration) goes ON
during the 1st copy operation
(3) OFF timing
Specified count on the P counter
2-N-5
LCT PAPER TRAY SECTION

[1] Composition
Rear stopper Side guides
Tray Wire A
Wire B
<1500 tray> Auxiliary wire
Tray
Tray motor
(M141, M142)
Front cover
Tray
Rear stopper
Remaining paper
indicator window Wire B Coupling gear
Drive pulley
Wire A
Auxiliary drive spring
Side guides Drive pulley

Remaining paper indicator window
Front cover <1000 tray>
[2] Mechanisms *2: Remaining paper indication

The LCT can hold a large amount of paper, hence it has a
Mechanism Method remaining paper indicator window to enable the user to
*1 Paper lift-up Wire drive obtain a rough indication of the amount of paper remaining
Cassette loading Front loading in the tray.
*2 Remaining paper indication Index sheet The remaining paper detection lever moves along with the
up-down motion of the tray, and the index sheet is caused
*1: Paper lift-up to slide by a tension spring.
The paper tray is suspended by four up-down drive wires
(wires A and B — two each).
When paper is supplied to the tray, the tray drops under the Index sheet
Remaining paper
weight of the paper, however the weight of the paper is indication lever
balanced by the tension of the auxiliary drive spring.
When the paper tray is loaded, the tray motor (M141, M142)
rotates, and the wire is wound up on the drive reel, causing
the tray to rise.
Tray
When the paper tray is withdrawn from the pedestal, the
coupling between the tray and the tray drive section is
released, hence the tray falls to a position where the weight
of the paper is balanced by the tension of the auxiliary drive
spring.
Tension spring
2-O-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly 2. Removing and Re-installing the 1500 tray
1. Removing and Re-installing the 1000 Tray Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet.
from the power outlet. a. Procedure
a. Procedure (1) Withdraw the 1500 tray, then remove the four set
(1) Withdraw the 1000 tray, then remove the four set screws.
screws. (2) Lift out the 1500 tray.
(2) Lift out the 1000 tray.
Set screws
Set screws
1500 tray
Set screws
1000 tray
Set screws
(3) Re-install the 1500 tray in the opposite sequence to

(3) Re-install the 1000 tray in the opposite sequence to removal.
removal. Caution: Install the front left and right set screws first.
Caution: Install the front left and right set screws first.
2-O-2
3. Replacing the Wires Caution:

Caution: The method of installing the tray up-down drive a. After replacing or re-installing the wires, move the tray
wires is the same for both the front and rear. For this up and down by hand, and confirm that it rises and falls
reason, the description of the method of replacing smoothly.
the wires is based on the rear side only. b. Take care that wires do not cross each other or ride up
Install the front wires in exactly the same way as the the sides of the pulleys.
rear wires. c. Adjust the tilt of the tray after installing the wires.
<Method of removing the wires>
3 Remove the
restraining covers.
Wire restraining cover

Wire B
Wire A
Wire B
Tray
Auxiliary drive spring
Wire A
Auxiliary wire
2 Detach the auxiliary wire

from the auxiliary drive
4 Remove the E ring,
spring.
Wire A then withdraw the
Wire B drive pulley.
1 Remove the wire
Auxiliary wire protection cover.
Drive pulley
Set screws
E ring
Wire protection cover
2-O-3
Caution: The 1500 tray has two kinds of auxiliary drive <Wire length>
springs which are shown below. Install the 343 ± 0.4 mm (1500 tray)
236 ± 0.4 mm (1000 tray)
spring which matches the size of paper to be
used in the tray. Wire A
(Black) 543 ± 0.4 mm (1500 tray)

355 ± 0.4 mm (1000 tray)
Wire B
214 ± 0.5 mm (1500 tray)
157 ± 0.5 mm (1000 tray)
Auxiliary drive spring A Auxiliary drive spring C Auxiliary wire
(for A4/81/2" × 11" size) (for B5/81/2" × 51/2" size)
<Method of installing the wires>

3 Pass wires A Wire A
and B through Wire B 2 Pass wire B through
the grooves in the groove in the
the pulleys, pulley, then install
then install the the wire restraining
wire restraining cover.
covers. Wire B
Wire restraining
cover
Pass wires A and B Wire B

at the front side over
the wire adjustment
pieces. Wire A
Wire restraining cover

Wire adjustment
piece
Wire B
1 Pass the wires

Tray through here.
Wire A Wire B
Auxiliary drive
spring
Wire A
Auxiliary
wire
Auxiliary wire
7 Attach the wire to the
auxiliary drive spring.
8 Install the wire

protection cover.
Wire A Wire B
5 Push in the drive pulley,
and fix it with the E ring. Auxiliary wire
Drive pulley
Set screws
6 Wind the auxiliary wire

clockwise around the Wire protection cover
E ring drive pulley. (1000 tray:
4 turns; 1500 tray: 5 turns)
2-O-4
[4] Tray Up-down Control 2. Signals

a. Input signals
(1) PS142 (PS142 → CB)
1500 tray upper limit detection signal.
SGND 83-B3 724-1
This signal becomes [L] when the upper limit is de-
PS143 83-B6 724-2 PS143
5VDC 83-B5 724-3 tected.
(2) TRAY (15) ADD (MS141 → CB)
725-1
“1500 tray loaded” detection signal.
PS160 83-B7 725-2 PS160
725-3 This signal is the TMP4 signal which is input via MS141
when the tray is detected.
M142 78-4 24VDC (3) PS143 (PS143 → CB)
M142 DRIVE 120-A7
1000 tray upper limit detection signal.
TMP4 120-A10 This signal becomes [L] when the upper limit is reached.
TRAY (10) ADD 120-A11
MS142 (4) TRAY (10) ADD (MS142 → CB)
SGND 120-B3 711-1
“1000 tray loaded” detection signal.
PS142 120-B6 711-2 PS142 This signal is the TM4 signal which is input via MS142
5VDC 120-B5 711-3
when the tray is detected.
(5) PS160 (PS160 → CB)
M141 DRIVE 120-A6
M141 78-5 24VDC
LCT conveyance door open/close detection signal
[H]: LCT conveyance door open
TMP4 120-A8
TRAY (15) ADD 120-A9
[L]: LCT conveyance door closed
MS141
CB DCPS
b. Output signals
(1) TMP4 (CB → MS141, MS142)
This is a pulse signal which detects the fact that the
1500 tray and the 1000 tray are loaded.
The tray rises as a result of the transmission of the rotational
(2) M141 DRIVE (CB → M141)
force of M141 (tray (1500)) and M142 (tray (1000)) by means
M141 ON/OFF drive signal
of the drive wires (four wires each).
[H]: M141 OFF
M141 and M142 are driven by the CB (control board).
[L]: M141 ON
Related signals are MS141 (LCT interlock (1500)), MS142
(3) M142 DRIVE (CB → M142)
(LCT interlock (1000)), PS142 (LCT upper limit detection
(1500)), PS143 (LCT upper limit detection (1000)), and PS160
[H]: M142 OFF
(LCT conveyance open/close detection).
[L]: M142 ON
1. Operation
When MS141 or MS142 detects a paper tray, M141 or
M142 goes ON, causing the corresponding tray to rise.
The tray rises until PS142 or PS143 detects the upper limit
of the paper and goes ON, then M141 or M142 goes OFF,
and the tray stops rising.
The paper is fed until PS142 or PS143 goes OFF, then
M414 or M142 goes ON once again, and the tray rises.
The lowering operation of both the 1500 tray and 1000 tray
takes place mechanically.
2-O-5
ADU PAPER EXIT/CONVEYANCE SECTION

[1] Composition
Paper exit rollers

Selector guide
ADU gate
solenoid
(SD152)
ADU cooling fan

(M152)
Timing belt
ADU conveyance open/close door Conveyance
rollers
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method Selector guide
*1 Paper path selection Selector guide
Paper conveyance Conveyance roller
*1: Selecting the paper path

The paper that is exited from the fixing unit of the main body
is either exited from the machine or sent to the ADU paper
exit/conveyance section depending upon the setting of the
selector guide.
The selector guide operates according to the ON/OFF state
of the ADU gate solenoid (SD152).
ADU gate
solenoid (SD152)
2-P-1
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly 2. Replacing the Paper Exit Conveyance Pulley
1. Removing the ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance and Paper Conveyance Roller
Section a. Procedure
Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged (1) Remove the ADU paper exit and conveyance section.
from the power outlet. (2) Remove the two E rings, then remove the two pulley
a. Procedure regulating spacers and paper exit conveyance belt (B).
(1) Remove the main body left side upper cover and also (3) Remove the paper exit conveyance pulley.
the main body rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the two connectors (CN94, 530), then
remove the six set screws, and remove the ADU paper
exit/conveyance section. Paper exit conveyance
pulley
Pulley regulating
spacer
E ring
Paper exit conveyance

belt B
A Paper exit
Paper exit/ conveyance
conveyance pulley
E ring
section
Pulley regulating
spacer
(4) Remove the two E rings, then remove the two front and
the two rear bearings.
(5) Remove the paper conveyance roller.
Set screws
Bearing Paper conveyance

roller
CN94
E ring
CN530
Bearing
Bearing
Paper conveyance
roller E ring
View in A direction
Bearing

removal.
2-P-2
[4] Selector Guide (2) PS158 (PS158 → CB)

Signal which detects the open/closed state of the ADU
conveyance door
[H]: ADU conveyance door open
[L]: ADU conveyance door closed
24VDC 78-3
DCPS b. Output signals
(1) SD152 DRIVE (CB → SD152)
SD152 DRIVE 83-A7
SD152 SD152 ON/OFF control signal
[H]: SD152 OFF
560-1 [L]: SD152 ON
PS157 57-A7 560-2 PS157
560-3
SGND 57-B7 561-1

PS158 57-A6 561-2 PS158
5VDC 57-B5 561-3
CB
The selector guide is driven by SD152 (ADU gate).

SD152 drives the CB (control board).
Related signals are PS157 (ADU gate) and PS158 (ADU
conveyance door open/close detection).
1. Operation
a. Selector guide control
When the face side copy is made, SD152 goes ON after the
specified time from when MC3 (2nd paper feed) goes ON,
causing the selector guide to open. As a result, the paper
exited from the fixing unit is conveyed to the ADU paper
exit/conveyance section.
SD152 goes OFF after the specified time from when PS25
(paper exit) detects the trailing edge of the paper and goes
ON, then the selector guide closes.
b. Paper exit/conveyance control
The paper exit roller and conveyance roller are driven by
M1 (main), and the paper exited from the fixing unit is
conveyed to the ADU paper exit/conveyance section.
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) PS157 (PS157 → CB)
Signal which detects the passage of paper through the
entrance of the stacker.
This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.
2-P-3
[5] ADU Cooling Fan Control b. Output signals

(1) M152 DRIVE (CB → M152)
[L]: M152 ON
[H]: M152 OFF
(2) FM152 DRIVE (CB → FM152)
FM152 ON/OFF drive signal
M152 DRIVE 65-B1 [L]: FM152 ON
M152 78-7 PGND
[H]: FM152 OFF
M152 LD 65-B2
(1) FM153 DRIVE (CB → FM153)
FM152 DRIVE 83-B10 FM152 ON/OFF drive signal
FM152 78-6 PGND
[L]: FM153 ON
FM 152 LD 83-B11
[H]: FM153 OFF
FM153 DRIVE 83-A12
FM153
FM153 LD 83-B12
CB DCPS
M152 (ADU fan), FM152 (ADU cooling fan 1) and FM153 (ADU
cooling fan 2) are installed in the paper exit/conveyance
section in order to prevent curling of the paper.
M152, FM152 and FM153 is driven by the CB (control board).
1. Operation
a. ON timing
M152: Rotation at the start of paper feed
FM152 and FM153: Rotation at the start of paper feed
when a two-sided copy is specified
b. OFF timing
M152: Specified period from when PS19
goes OFF
FM152, FM153: End of paper exit
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) M152 LD (M152 → CB)
(2) FM152 LD (FM152 → CB)
(3) FM153 LD (FM153 → CB)
2-P-4
ADU PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION

[1] Composition
Conveyance guide plate (lower) Reversal roller (at bottom)
Paper exit rollers

ADU timing clutch (CL153)
Paper exit rollers
Paper exit rollers

Conveyance guide plate (upper)
ADU paper feed motor (M151)
ADU paper feed clutch (CL151)

Paper exit rollers
ADU reversal clutch (CL152)
Decurling belt
[2] Mechanisms *1: Non-stack paper feed mechanism

The paper in the paper exit/conveyance section is fed to the
Mechanism Method paper feed unit by the conveyance rollers. When the
*1 Paper feed Non-stack selection trailing edge of the paper is completely inside the paper
*2 Paper path selection Selector gate feed unit, it is exited to the conveyance unit by the reversal
Paper conveyance Conveyance roller (one) roller without being stacked. At this time, the paper is exited
Reversal roller (one) from the trailing edge side, hence the face side and reverse
Paper exit rollers (four) side are inverted in the conveyance unit.
Conveyance drive Timing belts (four) + gear
*4 Jam clearance Selector gate, conveyance
guide plate (B), opening/
closing of conveyance
guide plate (upper)/(lower)
Applicable sizes of paper A3 to A5R/11" × 17" to
51/2" × 81/2"
Conveyance roller Face side
Drum Reverse side
Reversal roller
2-Q-1
*2: Paper path selection *3: Decurler mechanism

The selector gate switches the path of the paper exit/ Curled paper is decurled as a result of being passed
conveyance between the paper advance path from the between the decurling belt and conveyance idler roller/2.
paper exit/conveyance section to the paper feed section,
and the paper exit path from the paper feed section to the
conveyance section. The selector gate does not have a
drive mechanism. The paper path is determined by the
shape of leading edge of the gate.
Conveyance idler roller/2
<During paper feed>
Selector gate
Decurling belt
Paper
<During paper exit>

*4: Jam clearance mechanism
There is a jam clearance mechanism on each of the
selector gate, the paper feed unit and the conveyance unit.
Jammed paper can be removed by opening and closing the
Paper
selector gate, conveyance guide plate (B) or conveyance
guide plate (upper)/(lower), depending upon where the jam
occurred.
Selector gate
2-Q-2
• Selector gate section [3] Disassembly and Assembly

1. Removing and Re-installing the Paper Feed/
Conveyance Section
a. Procedure
(1) Withdraw the ADU unit, then remove the four set
screws.
(2) Completely withdraw the ADU unit, then lift out the
ADU unit.
Selector gate
Set screws
• Paper feed unit section
ADU paper feed/

conveyance section
Conveyance guide plate (B)
Set screws
(2) Re-install the paper feed/conveyance section in the

• Conveyance unit section opposite sequence to removal. In this case, however,
install the front left and right set screws first.
Conveyance guide plate (upper)
Conveyance guide plate (lower)
2-Q-3
2. Replacing Conveyance Pulley/C, Conveyance (6) Remove the six set screws, then remove conveyance
Roller/E guide plate (D).
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the ADU unit.
(2) Remove the four set screws, then remove the ADU Set screw Conveyance guide plate (D)
cover (front).
(3) Remove the four set screws, then remove the ADU Set screws Set screw
cover (upper).
Set screws
ADU (upper) cover
Set
Set screw
screw
Set screws
Set screws
ADU (front) cover
(7) Remove the E ring, pulley spacer, the timing belt and
(4) Remove the two E rings and the two pulley regulating
the pin, then remove the ADU conveyance belt (D).
spacers (A), then remove ADU conveyance belt (A).
(5) Remove the two conveyance pulleys/C together with
the two pulley regulating spacers (A). Pulley spacer
Pulley regulating spacer (A) E ring
ADU conveyance belt (D)
Conveyance pulley/C
Pulley regulating Pin

spacer (A)
Pulley regulating E ring

Timing pulley
spacer (A)
Conveyance pulley/C
ADU conveyance
belt (A)
Pulley regulating spacer (A) E ring
2-Q-4
(8) Remove the four E rings and the four bearings, then 3. Replacing the ADU Drive Clutch (conveyance
remove the ADU conveyance roller/E. section)
a. Procedure
ADU conveyance roller/E
(2) Remove the ADU cover (front).
Bearing ADU conveyance roller/E
(3) Remove the ADU cover (upper).
E ring (4) Remove the E ring and the bearing.
(5) Remove the two set screws, then remove the clutch
Bearing mounting plate.
E ring (6) Disconnect the clutch connector (CN551).
Bearing
CN551
E ring Set screw

Bearing

Bearing
removal.
Clutch mounting
plate
E ring
Set screw
(7) Slacken the set screw, then remove the ADU drive
clutch (conveyance section) from the shaft.
Set screw
ADU drive clutch

(conveyance section)
Screws in the clutch

mounting plate

removal.
Caution: When re-installing the clutch, ensure that the clutch
is between the screws in the clutch mounting plate.
2-Q-5
4. Replacing the ADU Drive Clutch (reversal (6) Remove the three set screws, then remove the motor
section) mounting board.
a. Procedure (7) Remove the two E rings and the two bearings.
(2) Remove the three set screws, then remove the drive
cover plate. Motor mounting
Set screws
board
(3) Remove the three set screws, then remove the ADU
drive unit from the ADU.
(4) Disconnect the three connectors (CN552, CN553 and
CN554).
ADU drive unit

E ring E ring
Set screws
CN554 Bearing
Bearing
CN553
(8) Remove the E ring, the three set screws, and the
CN552 bearing, then remove the ADU drive board plate
(9) Remove each gear (4), then pull out the pins remaining
in the shafts.
Set screws
Drive cover plate (10) Remove the E ring and the C ring, then pull out the
clutch gear from the ADU drive clutch/B.
(5) Remove the four set screws and two supports, then ADU drive
remove the ADU drive motor board ass’y. board plate
E ring
Set screws
ADU drive
clutch/B
ADU drive motor
board ass’y
Set screws Pin Projection
Gear (4)
Lead wire
Set screw guide plate
(B)
Square hole
Set screw
Bearing Set
E ring screw

removal.
Caution: When installing ADU drive clutch/B, ensure that the
projection enters the square hole of lead wire guide
plate (B).
2-Q-6
[4] Paper Feed/Reversal Control M151 goes OFF after the end of a series of control
operations in the ADU.
5VDC 57-B4 b. Reversal control

SGND 57-B6
When CL151 goes OFF, CL152 goes ON after the speci-
M151 DRIVE 83-A8
M151 CLOCK 83-A9
fied time, and the rotational force of M151 is transmitted to
M151 the reversal roller. As a result, the paper in the ADU paper
M151 LD 83-A11
feed section is reversed and conveyed, then exited to the
78-6 PGND
conveyance section. CL152 is turned OFF after the speci-
78-1 24VDC fied time from when PS153 goes OFF as a result of
detecting the trailing edge of the paper.
CL151 DRIVE 83-A4 CL151 78-3 24VDC
2. Signals
CL152 DRIVE 83-A5 CL152 DCPS a. Input signals
550-1
(1) PS151 (PS151 → CB)
PS151 57-B3 550-2 PS151 “No paper in stacker” detection signal
550-3
[H]: Paper in stacker
555-1
[L]: No paper in stacker
PS152 57-A1 555-2 PS152 (2) PS152 (PS152 → CB)
555-3
“Paper at entrance of ADU paper feed/conveyance
556-1
section” detection signal.
PS153 57-A2 556-2 PS153 This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.
556-3
(3) PS153 (PS153 → CB)
SGND 57-B7 560-1
“Paper at entrance of ADU paper feed section” detec-
PS157 57-A3 560-2 PS157 tion signal.
560-3
5VDC 57-B5
This signal becomes [H] when paper is detected.
CB (4) PS157 (PS157 → CB)
“Paper jam at border section (paper exit side) of main
body and ADU” detection signal.
The paper feed and reversal operations take place as a result [H]: Paper in stacker
of the transmission of rotational force from M151 (ADU paper [L]: No paper in stacker
feed) to the conveyance roller and the reversal roller by means (5) M151 LD (PS151 → CB)
of CL151 (ADU paper feed) and CL152 (ADU reversal). This signal becomes [L] when M151 reaches the
M151, CL151 and CL152 drive the CB (control board). specified speed.
Related signals are PS151 (ADU no paper detection), PS152
(ADU paper feed),PS153 (ADU reversal detection) and
PS157(ADU gate).
1. Operation
a. Paper feed control
M151 goes ON in synchronism with M1 (main). When
PS152 detects the leading edge of the paper conveyed
from the ADU paper exit/conveyance section, CL151 goes
ON, causing the rotational force of M151 to be transmitted
to the conveyance roller. As a result, paper is fed to the
stacker from the bottom of the selector gate. CL151 goes
OFF after the specified time from when PS152 detects the
trailing edge of the paper.
For the second sheet of paper, CL151 goes ON again after
the specified time from when CL152 is turned OFF by the
passage of the 1st sheet. The same operation is repeated
for the subsequent sheets as well.
M151 goes OFF 80 ms after PS19 (optics sync) goes OFF
when the series of control operations in the ADU is com-
pleted.
2-Q-7
SECTION-1
b. Output signals [5] Conveyance Control

(1) M151 DRIVE (CB → M151)
[H]: M151 OFF
[L]: M151 ON CL153 DRIVE 83-A6 CL153 78-3 24VDC
(2) M151 CLOCK (CB → M151)

DCPS
(3) CL151 DRIVE (CB → CL151)
5VDC 57-B4 557-1
ON/OFF control signal for CL151
PS154 57-A3 557-2 PS154
[H]: CL151 OFF SGND 57-B6 557-3
[L]: CL151 ON
(4) CL152 DRIVE (CB → CL152) 558-1
PS155 57-A4 558-2 PS155
ON/OFF control signal for CL152 558-3
[H]: CL152 OFF
559-1
[L]: CL152 ON
PS156 57-A5 559-2 PS156
CB 559-3
Conveyance takes place as a result of the transmission of

rotational force from M151 (ADU paper feed) by means of the
CL153 (ADU timing).
M151 and CL153 are driven by the CB (control board).
Related signals are PS154 (ADU paper exit 1), PS155 (ADU
paper exit 2) and PS156 (ADU paper exit 3).
1. Operation
CL153 goes ON in synchronism with M1 (main), and
conveys the reversed paper from the stacker to the main
body paper feed unit. If the PS18 (no feed) is ON when
PS19 (optical synchronizing) is turned ON, CL153 goes
OFF for a moment until PS18 is turned OFF. When PS18
is turned OFF CL153 goes ON again and when PS14
(registration) is turned OFF by final paper, CL153 goes
OFF.
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) PS154 (PS154 → CB)
“Jammed paper at entrance of ADU conveyance sec-
tion” detection signal.
This signal becomes [ L ] when paper is detected.
(2) PS155 (PS155 → CB)
“Jammed paper inside ADU conveyance section” de-
tection signal.
(3) PS156 (PS156 → CB)
“Jammed paper at exit of ADU conveyance section”
detection signal.
b. Output signals
(1) CL153 DRIVE (CB → CL153)
CL153 ON/OFF drive signal
[H]: CL153 OFF
[L]: CL153 ON
2-Q-8
CONVEYANCE
CONVEYANCE
SECTION-1
SECTION
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1] Composition
Conveyance unit
Conveyance belt
Conveyance guide plate

Conveyance lever
[2] Mechanisms
Fixing unit Drum unit
Mechanism Method
*1 Paper conveyance One conveyance belt
*2 Belt lifting mechanism Cam drive
*1: Paper conveyance

The paper fed from the 2nd paper feed section is conveyed
to the fixing unit by the conveyance belt. The conveyance
belt is driven by the main motor. When paper is being
conveyed, it is sucked onto the conveyance belt by the
conveyance suction motor (FM14) installed beneath the
conveyance unit, in order to improve the conveyance
performance. Conveyance belt
Conveyance roller
2-R-1
CONVEYANCE
CONVEYANCESECTION
SECTION-1
*2: Conveyance belt lifting mechanism [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly

This mechanism raises the conveyance unit when thick 1. Removing and Re-installing the Conveyance
paper is used, in order to improve the paper conveyance Unit
performance. a. Procedure
When the conveyance solenoid (SD5) goes ON, drive force (1) Open the front door, then remove the drum unit, fixing
is transmitted to the conveyance lifting cam, and the unit and transfer and separation corona unit. (Refer to
conveyance belt is raised together with the conveyance the description of the drum unit, fixing unit and corona
unit. unit for details of removing these units.)
(2) Remove the screw, then remove the conveyance
a. During normal conveyance, conveyance gear/D guide plate.
does not rotate. (3) Remove the screw fixing the conveyance unit.
(4) Remove the spring at the right rear, then remove the
Drum Conveyance unit (conveyance belt) conveyance unit.
Conveyance
direction Conveyance unit
Set screw
Conveyance
solenoid
(SD5) OFF Spring
Claw
Conveyance gear/D Spring Conveyance gear/A
(conveyance unit lifting cam) (input gear)
b. When thick paper is being conveyed, conveyance

gear/D rotates. Conveyance lever
Conveyance guide plate
The conveyance unit rises.
Set screw
Conveyance
solenoid
(SD5) ON (5) Install the conveyance unit in the opposite sequence to
removal.
2-R-2
CONVEYANCE SECTION
2. Replacing the conveyance belt 3. Replacing the Conveyance Suction Motor

Caution: When removing the conveyance belt, take care not (FM14)
to damage it on the edge of the conveyance unit. Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
a. Procedure from the power outlet.
(1) Remove the conveyance unit. a. Procedure
(2) Remove the E ring, then remove the shaft bearing (1) Open the front door, then remove the upper/lower tray
(front). and the paper feed unit.
(3) Pull out the conveyance drive shaft from the convey- (2) Remove the rear cover.
ance unit, then remove the conveyance belt. (3) Disconnect the connector (CN15) at the rear, then
grasp the hook of connector with radio pliers and push
it out to the front.
Conveyance drive shaft Conveyance roller
Shaft bearing (front) Connector latch
E ring
Conveyance belt
Connector (CN15)
(4) Re-install the conveyance unit in the opposite se-
quence to removal.
(4) Remove the three set screws, then remove the con-
veyance suction motor.
< Bottom view of conveyance section from paper feed side>
Conveyance suction Up
motor (FM14)
Front
Set screws
(5) Re-install the suction motor in the opposite sequence

to removal.
2-R-3
CONVEYANCE
CONVEYANCE SECTION
SECTION-1
[4] FM14 (conveyance suction) Control [5] SD5 (conveyance) Control
FM14 DRIVE 65-A10

FM14 78-7 PGND
FM14 LD 65-A11 SD5 DRIVE 6-B10
24VDC 6-B11 SD5
CB
CB DCPS
FM14 (conveyance suction) is driven by the CB (control board). SD5 (conveyance) is driven by the CB (control board).
1. Operation 1. Operation
FM14 is a 24 V drive DC motor. It goes ON and OFF in SD5 is a 24 V drive DC solenoid. In the thick paper mode,
synchronism with M4 (main). it is turned ON (conveyance section rises) at the start of
copying.
2. Signals
a. Input signal 2. Signals
(1) FM14 LD (FM14 → CB) a. Output signal
This signal becomes [L] when FM14 reaches the (1) SD5 DRIVE (CB → SD5)
specified speed. SD5 drive control signal
b. Output signals [L]: SD5 ON
(1) FM14 DRIVE (CB → FM14) [H]: SD5 OFF
FM14 drive control signal
[L]: FM14 OFF
[H]: FM14 ON
2-R-4
FIXING UNIT
FIXING UNIT
[1] Composition
Oil pad
Oil apply roller
Oil pad
Fixing cleaning roller
Fixing cleaning roller Upper fixing claw
Upper fixing
roller
Paper exit
roller (upper)
Paper exit roller/

upper unit Fixing heater
lamp (upper)
Paper exit roller
(lower)
Pressure release lever Lower fixing claw

Lower fixing roller
Fixing heater
lamp (lower)
[2] Mechanisms *2: Lower roller pressing and release

When you move the pressure release lever in the fixing or
Mechanism Method release direction, the pressure cam pushes the pressure
Fixing Pressure + heat roller spring up or down, causing the lower roller to be pressu-
*1 Heat source Heater lamp (Two upper and one lower rized or released.
lamp)
Cleaning Fixing cleaning roller (silicone oil)
Upper roller Aluminium + PFA coating
Pressure release lever
Lower roller Silicone rubber + PFA tube
Separation Separation claws (6 upper and 3 lower
claws)
Temperature Upper roller
detection * Contactless type thermistor (for control)
* Contact type thermistor (for abnormality
detection)
Lower roller
* Contactless type thermistor (for control)
Overheating Non-contact type thermostat
prevention (1each for upper and lower roller) Pressure cam
Neutralizing Neutralizing brush Pressure spring
*2 Pressure release Pressure release cam, spring
*3 Jam sensor Photo sensor (also used as paper exit PS) Lower fixing roller
*1: Fixing heater lamps

The fixing heater lamps consists of three halogen lamps
(two for the upper fixing roller and one for the lower fixing
roller). They are intended to reduce the warmup time from
when the machine is switched ON.
2-S-1
FIXING UNIT
*3: Jam sensor

When a jam occurs in the fixing paper exit section, paper
exit plate/B is pushed down and the photosensor (PS25)
senses the jam by means of the operation of the jam sensor
plate and actuator.
Normal status
Paper
Actuator
Paper exit
Photosensor plate/B
Jam sensor Lower fixing
plate claw
When a jam occurs
2
3
2-S-1-1
FIXING UNIT
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-S-1-2
FIXING UNIT
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly 2. Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamp (upper)
1. Removing and Re-installing the Fixing Unit Caution: Do not touch the fixing heater lamp (upper) with
Caution: the bare hands.
1. Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged Caution:
from the power outlet. 1. Install the fixing heater lamp with the makers mark
2. Do not touch the fixing unit immediately after facing the drive gear side.
turning OFF the main switch because it is very hot 2. Avoid touching the inside of roller with the fixing heater
and you may receive a burn. Wait until the fixing lamp .
unit has cooled down sufficiently before working 3. When installing the fixing heater lamp, ensure that the
on it. ends of the lamp are facing the correct direction.
a. Procedure 4. After replacing the fixing heater lamp, check to ensure
(1) Open the front door, then move the pressure release that the ends of the lamp are properly inserted in the
lever to the release side. terminals.
(2) Grasp the pressure release lever, then pull it out until a. Procedure
it locks. (1) Remove the fixing unit.
(3) Remove the set screw, then remove the lock piece. (2) Remove the set screw, then remove the lamp cover.
(4) Pull out the fixing unit further, and remove it.
Lamp cover
Set screw
Pressure release lever
Lock piece
Set screw
(3) Remove the front cover.
(5) Re-install the fixing unit in the opposite sequence to

removal. Set screw
Fixing cover
Pressure release lever E ring
2-S-2
FIXING UNIT
(4) Remove the set screw, then remove the lamp terminal. (3) Remove the set screw, then remove the fixing cover.
(5) Pull out the fixing heater lamp (upper) from the upper
fixing roller. Set screw
Fixing heater lamp

(upper)
Fixing cover
Lamp terminal
Pressure release lever E ring
Set screw (4) Disconnect the faston from the fixing heater lamp
(lower). (front side)
(6) Re-install the fixing lamp (upper) in the opposite se- (5) Remove the set screw, then remove the lamp holder.
quence to removal. (6) Pull out the fixing heater lamp (lower) from the lower
fixing roller.
3. Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamp (lower)
Caution: Do not touch the fixing heater lamp (lower) with
the bare hands.
Caution: When disconnecting the faston of the fixing heater
lamp, be sure to use radio pliers and take care not
to apply an unreasonable force to the mating part
because it may break. Lamp holder
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the fixing unit from the main body.
(2) Disconnect the faston from the fixing heater lamp
(lower). (Rear side)
Fixing heater
lamp (lower)
Faston
Set screw
(7) Re-install the fixing heater lamp (lower) in the opposite

Lamp cover
Faston
2-S-3
UNIT
FIXING UNIT-1
4. Replacing the Oil Pad 5. Replacing the Fixing Cleaning Roller and Oil
a. Procedure Apply Impregnated Roller
(1) Remove the fixing unit. Caution:
(2) Remove the set screw, then remove the fixing cover. 1. Push the fixing unit cleaning roller and the CL shaft
(3) Remove the E ring, then remove the upper paper exit firmly against each other.
roller unit. 2. Push down the bearing and fix it in place.
(4) Remove the four set screws, then remove the upper 3. When re-installing the roller, tighten the hex bolts to a
fixing cover. higher torque than normal.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the fixing unit.
Set screw Upper paper exit
roller unit (2) Remove the set screw, then remove the fixing cover
(3) Remove the paper exit roller upper unit, then remove
the upper fixing cover and the oil pad.
Set screw (4) Slacken the four hex screws fixing the bearing.
Bearing Bearing
Hex screws
Hex screws
Set screws
Upper fixing cover
E ring
(5) Remove the two hex mounting screws, then pull out
the shaft, and remove the fixing cleaning roller.
(5) Open the oil pad to the upper side, then slide it left and
(6) Remove the two hex mounting screws, then pull out
right, and remove it.
the shaft and remove the oil apply roller.
Bearing casing (back side)

Hex screws
Oil apply roller
Oil pad
Hex screws
Fixing cleaning roller

Bearing casing
(front side)
(7) Re-install the oil pad in the opposite sequence to

removal.
(6) Re-install the oil pad in the opposite sequence to

removal.
2-S-4
FIXING
FIXING
UNIT-1
UNIT
6. Removing and Re-installing the Upper Fixing (5) Remove the two heat insulation sleeves from the upper
Roller fixing roller.
Caution: When replacing the heat insulation sleeves, coat
the inside and outside of the sleeves with “GREASE”,
then fit the sleeves onto the roller shaft.
a. Procedure Upper fixing roller
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fixing
cover, oil pad, fixing heater lamps (upper), oil apply
roller and fixing cleaning roller.
(2) Remove the lamp terminal cover at the rear, then
remove the C ring, collar and gear from the upper fixing
roller.
Collar Heat insulation sleeve
Heat insulation sleeve

Collar
(6) Re-install the upper fixing roller in the opposite se-

C-ring quence to removal.
7. Removing and Re-installing the Lower Fixing

Roller
a. Procedure
Gear (1) Remove the fixing heater lamp (lower) and upper fixing
roller.
(2) Remove the two set screws, then remove the fixing
terminal cover entrance cover.
(3) Remove the three set screws at the front, then remove
the C ring and the collar.
(4) Remove the bearing, then pull out the upper fixing Fixing entrance cover
roller from the front.
Bearing holder
plate Bearing
Collar
Set screw
C ring
Set screws
Bearing holder
plate
Upper fixing roller (3) Remove the two set screws, then remove the entrance
Set screw
guide plate (upper).
(4) Remove the two set screws, then remove the entrance
Set screw
guide plate (lower).
2-S-5
FIXING UNIT
Note: When re-installing the entrance guide plate (lower), (6) Raise the lower fixing roller, then remove it from the
push it down to the bottom so that it touches the fixing paper exit side.
base plate, then fix it in place. (7) Remove the two C rings from the lower fixing roller ,
then remove the two bearings.
Entrance guide plate (upper)

Set screws Bearing
Bearing
Set screws
Entrance guide plate (lower)
Fixing lower plate Lower fixing roller
(5) Remove the two set screws, then remove the paper
exit plate. (8) Remove the two heat insulation sleeves from the lower
fixing roller.
Set screws
Lower fixing roller
Paper exit plate

(9) Re-install the lower fixing roller in the opposite se-

quence to removal.
2-S-6
FIXING UNIT-1
FIXING UNIT
8. Removing and Re-installing the Lower Fixing 9. Removing and Re-installing the Upper Fixing
Claws Claws
(1) Remove the paper exit plate/bottom. (1) Open the upper paper exit roller unit.
(2) Remove the two jam sensor springs, one of which is (2) Remove the six springs attached to the upper fixing
located at each end of the paper exit plate/bottom. claws.
(3) Remove the two fixing screws and remove spacers (3) Pull out the two shafts, each of which has three upper
and the paper exit plate/B. claws fixed to it, to the outside, and remove the six
(4) Remove the three separation springs/bottom that sup- upper fixing claws.
port the Lower fixing claws.
(5) Remove the three Lower fixing claws.
Upper paper exit
Shaft roller unit
Springs
Jam sensor spring Shaft
Springs
Paper exit plate/bottom
Spacer Upper fixing claws

Upper fixing claws
Paper exit
plate/B
(4) Re-install the upper fixing claws in the opposite se-

Fixing screw
Lower quence to removal.
fixing claw Jam sensor
spring
Separation 10.Removing and Re-installing Fixing
spring/bottom Spacer
Fixing screw Temperature Sensors 1 and 2
Caution:
1. After re-installing fixing temperature sensors 1
and 2, check to ensure that the sensor wires are not
(6) Re-install by reversing the removal procedure.
touching the upper fixing roller.
Caution: When tightening the fixing screws, make sure the
2. After re-installing fixing temperature sensor 1,
spacers do not ride up over the paper exit plate/B.
check to ensure that the sensor is not touching the
Push in the direction indicated by 1 in the diagram
upper fixing roller.
on page 2-S-1-1 and check whether or not the paper
3. Be sure to coat the set screws of the sensors with
exit plate/B returns to the proper position.
screw lock agent after re-installing the sensors.
cover, oil pad, oil apply roller and entrance guide plate
(lower).
(2) Remove the two set screws, then release the connec-
tor (CN98).
(3) Cut the two wiring bands, then remove pins 1 to 4 of
CN98 with a tweezers.
2-S-7
FIXING
FIXINGUNIT
UNIT-1
b. Installation procedure
(1) Secure fixing temperature sensor 2 with the set screw,
so the sensor element is in contact with the upper fixing
roller.
(2) Set the fixing temperature sensor positioning jig be-
tween fixing temperature sensor 1 and the upper fixing
Wiring band
roller, then fix fixing temperature sensor 1 with two set
Wiring band
screws so that the clearance between the sensor and
the upper fixing roller is within the standard value.
Connector (CN98)
Set screw Set screw

Set screws
Pin 4
Pin 1 Pin 3
Pin 2
(4) Remove the two set screws, then remove fixing tem-
perature sensor 1.
(5) Remove the set screw, then remove fixing tempera-
ture sensor 2.
Fixing temperature sensor 1

Set screw
Set screws Fixing temperature sensor positioning jig
Connector
(CN98)
(a) Set the distance “a” between the upper fixing roller
and fixing temperature sensor 1 so that it is equal
to the thickness of the fixing temperature sensor
positioning jig.
Fixing temperature
sensor 2
Upper fixing roller
Standard: a = 0.7 ± 0.03 mm
(3) Coat the set screw of each sensor with paint lock
agent.
(4) Insert the connector pins on the end of the cable of
each sensor to a position that corresponds to CN98.
(5) Re-install the other parts in the opposite sequence to
removal.
2-S-8
FIXING UNIT
11.Removing and Re-installing Fixing b. Installation procedure

Temperature Sensor 3 (1) Set the fixing temperature sensor positioning jig be-
Caution: tween fixing temperature sensor 3 and the upper fixing
1. After re-installing fixing temperature sensor 3 , roller, then fix fixing temperature sensor 3 with two set
check to ensure that the sensor wires are not screws so that the clearance between the sensor and
touching the upper fixing roller. the lower fixing roller is within the standard value.
2. Be sure to coat the set screws of the sensors with
screw lock agent after re-installing the sensors.
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fixing Fixing temperature sensor positioning jig
cover, oil pad, oil apply roller and entrance guide plate (for lower loller)
(lower).
(2) Cut the a wiring band, then release the relay connector
of the temperature sensor 3.
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove fixing tem-
perature sensor 3.
Temperature Set screws

sensor 3
(a) Set the distance “b” between the upper fixing roller
and fixing temperature sensor 3 so that it is equal
to the thickness of the fixing tempera ture sensor
positioning jig.
Relay connector Lower fixing roller

Set screws
Wiring band
Standard: b = 1.75 ± 0.25 mm
2-S-9
FIXING UNIT-1
UNIT
(b) When adjusting the distance, fix the 12.Removing and Re-installing the Thermostat
temperature sensor 3 using the A portion of (upper)
the jig. Caution:
1. After re-installing the thermostat (upper), check to
A ensure that the wiring is not touching the upper
fixing roller.
2. Be sure to coat the set screw of the thermostat
(upper) with screw lock agent after re-installing the
thermostat.
cover, oil pad and fixing impregnated roller.
(2) Disconnect the two fastons from the thermostat (up-
(2) Coat the set screw of sensor 3 with paint lock agent.
per).
(3) Re-install the other parts in the opposite sequence to
(3) Remove the set screw, then remove the thermostat
removal.
(upper).
Fastons
Set screw
Thermostat (upper)
b. Installation procedure
(1) Set the thermostat positioning jig (for the upper fixing
roller) between the thermostat (upper) and the upper
fixing roller, then fix the thermostat (upper) with the set
screw so that the clearance between the thermostat
(upper) and the upper fixing roller is the standard
value.
2 - S - 10
FIXING UNIT-1UNIT
FIXING
(2) Coat the set screw of the installed thermostat (upper)

with screw lock agent.
Set screw (3) Connect the two fastons.
Thermostat positioning (4) Install the other parts in the opposite sequence to
jig (for upper roller) Thermostat (upper)
removal.
Upper fixing roller
(a) Set the distance “a” between the upper fixing roller
and the thermostat (upper) so that it is equal to the
thickness of the thermostat positioning jig at A .
Thermostat
(upper)
Upper fixing roller
Standard: a = 3.75 ± 0.25 mm
(b) When adjusting the distance, should not be al-

lowed to run up over B .
A
B
2 - S - 11
FIXING
FIXING UNIT
UNIT-1
13.Removing and Re-installing the Thermostat b. Installation procedure

(lower) (1) Set the thermostat positioning jig (for the lower fixing
Caution: roller) between the thermostat (lower) and the lower
1. After installing the thermostat (lower), ensure that fixing roller, then fix the thermostat (lower) with the set
the wiring is not touching the lower fixing roller. screw so that the clearance between the thermostat
2. Be sure to coat the set screw of the installed (lower) and the lower fixing unit is the standard value.
thermostat (lower) with screw lock agent.
cover and paper exit plate.
(2) Disconnect the two fastons from the thermostat (lower). Thermostat positioning jig
(3) Remove the set screw, then remove the lower thermo- (for lower roller)
stat (lower).
Thermostat (lower)
Set screw
Set screw
(a) Set the distance “b” between the lower fixing

roller and the thermostat (lower) so that it is equal
Faston (rear) to the thickness of thermostat positioning
jig at A.
Lower fixing roller
Thermostat (lower)
Standard: b = 1.75 ± 0.2 mm
2 - S - 12
FIXING UNIT
(b) When adjusting the distance, should not be al- [4] Fixing Temperature Control
lowed to run up over B .
MS4
RL DRIVE 60-B9 AC
24VDC 60-B10
RL1
A
B
TS1
L2 CONT 60-A6 8-3
CN 399-1
L3 CONT 60-A7 8-2
L4 CONT 60-A8 8-1 TS2
L2 DRIVE L2
L3 DRIVE 382-2 L3
CB
L4 DRIVE 382-4 L4
DCPS
(2) Coat the set screw of the installed thermostat (lower)
TH1 ANG 1 6-B1 TH1
with screw lock agent. TH1 ANG 2 6-B2
(3) Connect the two fastons.
(4) Re-install the other parts in the opposite sequence to TH2 ANG 1 6-B3 TH2
TH2 ANG 2 6-B4
removal.
TH3 ANG 6-A12 TH3
SGND 6-B5
The upper fixing roller is heated by L2 (fixing heater lamp 1),

and L3 (fixing heater lamp 2), and the lower fixing roller is
heated by L4 (fixing heater lamp 3). The CB detects the
temperature of the fixing rollers by means of TH1 (fixing
temperature sensor 1) and TH3 (fixing temperature sensor 3),
and controls L2, L3 and L4 via DCPS.
1. Operation
a. Temperature control
(1) Warmup
The CB (control board) turns ON the fixing heater lamp
circuit in DCPS (DC power supply unit ) as soon as the
main switch is turned ON, causing L2 , L3, L4 and M1
(main) to go ON until the upper fixing roller reaches the
specified temperature. After finish warmup, L3 and L4
goes ON and OFF in synchronism with L2. If the upper
fixing roller does not reach the specified temperature
within a certain time from the start of warmup, L2 and
L4 remain ON and also M1 (main) goes ON until the
completion of warmup.
(Set Temperature)
200°C/392°F
(Warm up time)
Approx. 7min. (Room temp : 20°C/68°F)
2 - S - 13
FIXING
FIXINGUNIT
UNIT-1
L2 L3 L4 b. Output signals
(1) L2 CONT (CB → DCPS)
Warming up ON ON ON Signal which controls the ON/OFF state of L2
In idling ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF [L]: L2 ON
In copying ON ON OFF [H]: L2 OFF
(2) L3 CONT (CB → DCPS)
b. Protection against abnormality Signal which controls the ON/OFF state of L3
TS1 (thermostat (upper)) is used to prevent the tempera- [L]: L3 ON
ture of the upper fixing roller from rising abnormally, and [H]: L3 OFF
TS2 (thermostat (lower)) is used to prevent the tempera- (3) L4 CONT (CB → DCPS)
ture of the lower fixing roller from rising abnormally. These Signal which controls the ON/OFF state of L4
thermostats are set to specified gaps. [L]: L4 ON
The operating temperature of each thermostat is shown [H]: L4 OFF
below. (4) L2 DRIVE (DCPS → L2)
TS1: Approx. 180°C/356°F L2 AC(N) supply line.
TS2: Approx. 110°C/230°F The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L2
c. MS4 (fixing set MS4) CONT.
The fixing heater remains energized even if the main door (5) L3 DRIVE (DCPS → L3)
is opened, however if the fixing pressure lever is moved to L3 AC(N) supply line.
the release side MS4 goes OFF and the flow of current to The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L3
the fixing heater is cut off. CONT.
(6) L4 DRIVE (DCPS → L4)
2. Signals L4 AC(N) supply line.
a. Input signals The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L4
(1) TH1 ANG 1, 2 (TH1 → CB) CONT.
TH1 output signal (7) RL DRIVE (CB → RL1)
This signal outputs a voltage that is proportional to the Signal which controls RL1.
surface temperature at the center of the upper fixing This signal becomes [H] if an abnormality occurs in the
roller. machine, causing RL1 to go OFF.
This signal is used for temperature control and also for
detecting an abnormally high temperature or other
abnormality.
(2) TH2 ANG 1, 2 (TH2 → CB)
TH2 output signal
This signal outputs a voltage proportional to the sur-
face temperature at the end of the upper fixing roller. It
is not directly related to temperature control but is used
for detecting an abnormality.
(3) TH3 ANG (TH3 → CB)
TH3 output signal
This signal outputs a voltage proportional to the sur-
face temperature of the lower fixing roller. This signal
is used for temperature control and also for detecting
high temperature abnormality.
2 - S - 14
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL

[1] Parts Through Which Current Flows [2] Parts That Operate When the Main
When the Main Switch is Turned OFF Switch is Turned ON
HTR1
HTR2
SW1 HTR3
CBR DCPS
60-B1 24VDC
CVR RL1
60-B9 RL DRIVE
RL2
CB
HTR1
HTR2
HTR3
NF
AC (H) 397-1 AC (H) 24VDC
AC (H) 3975 AC (C) 12VDC
8VDC
5VDC
CBR
SGND
PGND
24VDC
Finisher
PGND
24VDC
RADF
PGND
1. Operation 40VDC
Current flows through the following parts if the power cord DCPS 24VDC OPMDB
is plugged into the power outlet, regardless of whether or PGND
not SW1 (main) is ON or OFF.

MS1
a. CBR (breaker)
If an internal part short circuits, causing a current of more MS2
than 8 A to flow, the breaker goes OFF, cutting off the power
12VDC
to the machine. 5VDC
ADB
b. NF (noise filter) -5VDC
SGND
The noise filter is used to reduce noise entering the ma-
chine via the power line, and also external leakage of noise 5VDC
IPB
generated in the machine. SGND
c. Internal heaters
5VDC
For dehumidifying the inside of the machine (These heat- OB1
SGND
ers are ON only when the machine is switched OFF.)
1. Operation
a. Power supply
When SW1 (main) is turned ON, the AC supply voltage is
applied to the DCPS (DC power supply unit). As a result,
the DCPS supplies DC voltage to the CB (control board),
OPMDB (optics drive motor driver board), ADB (AD con-
verter board), IPB (image processing board), Finisher and
RADF. The CB starts control inside the machine, and also
starts the following operations.
* RL1 (main relay) ON
* Initial operation of OB (operation board)
* Fixing unit warmup
* Low speed rotation of each fan
2-T-1
Also, as a result of RL1 going ON, the DCPS applies the AC [3] Cooling Fan Control
supply voltage to CVR.
DC output voltages and corresponding symbols
Output symbol FM2 DRIVE 83-A1

FM2 99-4 PGND
40VDC (1) FM2 LD 83-B1
40VDC (2) FM11 H/L 65-A4 99-3 24VDC

FM11
FM11 LD 65-A4
24VDC (1)
FM16 H/L 65-B10
24VDC (2) FM16

FM16 LD 65-B9 78-7 PGND
12VDC FM22 H/L 65-A7 2-2 24VDC

FM22
8VDC FM22 LD 65-A6
CB DCPS
5VDC (1)
5VDC (2)
The CB (control board) drives FM11 (polygon cooling fan),
– 5VDC FM22 (E-RDH cooling fan), FM16 (main body cooling fan) and
FM2 (optics cooling fan)
SGND
PGND 1. Operation
A 24 V DC motor is used for each cooling fan.
a. Operation of FM11
During idling: High speed rotation
During a copy operation: High speed rotation
2. Signals b. Operation of FM22
a. Output signal During idling: Low speed rotation
(1) RL DRIVE (CB → RL1) During a copy operation: High speed rotation
Signal which controls RL1. c. Operation of FM16
If an abnormality occurs in the main body, this signal During idling: Low speed rotation
becomes [H], causing RL1, to go OFF. During a copy operation: High speed rotation
d. Operation of FM2
ON only during a copy operation.
2. Signals
a. Intput signals
(1) FM11 LD (FM11 → CB)
This signal becomes [L] when FM11 reaches the set
speed.
2-T-2
(2) FM16 LD (FM16 → CB)

speed.
(3) FM22 LD (FM22 → CB)
speed.
(4) FM2 LD (FM2 → CB)
speed.
b. Output signal
(1) FM11 H/L (CB → FM11)
Rotational speed control signal for FM11
[L]: Low speed rotation
[H]: High speed rotation
(2) FM16 H/L (CB → FM16)
(3) FM22 H/L (CB → FM22)
(4) FM2 DRIVE (CB → FM2)
ON/OFF drive signal
[L]: FM2 ON
[H]: FM2 OFF
2-T-3
[4] Operation Panel Control b. LCD control

(1) LCD display operation
The LCD is driven by 4-bit parallel data from OB1.
(2) Backlight ON operation
OB1 TXD 3-A1 10-1
The LCD has a backlight (cold cathode tube) to facili-
3-A2 10-2 OB1 RXD
OB1 RTS 3-A3 10-3
tate viewing. The backlight is driven by the indicating
OB3
3-A4 10-4 OB1 CTS starter, and controlled by OB1 via OB2.
OB1 DTR 3-A5 10-5
(3) Touch switch control
3-A6 10-6 OB1 DSR
The LCD has touch switches, enabling you to directly
OB1 select items indicated by the display. These touch
switches are controlled by OB1.
INDICATING
BOARD
LCD
W.T SW 413-5 221-1 OB1

SD LE DRIVE 413-6 221-2
W.T LE DRIVE 413-7 221-3
SGND 413-8 221-4 INDICATING
SGND 3-B5 215-1 STARTER
8VDC 3-B6 215-2
5VDC 3-B7 215-4
CB OB2
The operation panel consists of OB1 (operation board 1), OB2 2. Signals
(operation board 2) and the indicating board. On the indicating a. Input signals
board is mounted an LCD. The LCD has a backlight which is (1) OB1 RXD (OB1 → CB1)
powered by the indicating starter (LCD drive board), and touch 32-bit serial data which informs CB1 of the operation
switches which are linked to the displayed contents. status of OB1.
Control of the operation panel is done by OB1 based on serial (2) OB1 CTS (OB1 → CB1)
data output from CB1 (main body control board). Signal which indicates that data is being sent from OB1
to CB1.
1. Operation When this signal is [H], CB1 stops sending the OB1
a. LED ON operation TXD signal.
The LED and 7-segment LED on OB1 are turned ON and (3) OB1 DSR (OB1 → CB1)
OFF by several ICs (shift register/latch driver). Received verification signal which is returned each
Each IC is turned ON and OFF according to serial data from time one byte of data has been received, when OB1 is
the CB. receiving data from CB1.
(4) W.T. switch (OB2 → CB1)
Signal which indicates the operation status of the
weekly timer.
2-T-4
OTHER
OTHER
KINDS
KINDS
OF CONTROL-1
OF CONTROL
b. Output signals [5] Counter Control

(1) OB1 TXD (CB1 → OB1)
32-bit serial data which informs OB1 of the operation
status of the machine that is known to CB1.
(2) OB1 RTS (CB1 → OB1) 24VDC 22-B7
C (T)
C (T) DRIVE 22-B8
Signal which indicates that data is being sent from CB1
to OB1. 24VDC 35-1
When this signal is [H], OB1 stops sending the OB1 C (K) JOINT 35-2
C (K)
SGND 35-3
RXD signal. C (K) DRIVE 35-4
(3) OB1 DTR (CB1 → OB1)
Received verification signal which is returned each SGND 6-B5 40-1
PS25 6-B6 40-2 PS25
time one byte of data has been received, when CB1 is 5VDC 6-B7 40-3
receiving data from OB1.
(4) SD LE DRIVE (CB1 → OB2)
OB2
LCD backlight ON/OFF control signal OB1
(5) W.T. LE DRIVE (CB1 → OB2)
Weekly timer ON/OFF control signal CB
This machine contains the following counters.

C(T) (total counter)
C(K) (key counter)
These counters are controlled by the CB (control board).
PS25 (paper exit detection) is a signal related to this
control.
1. Operation
This machine counts copies by means of two software
counters.
(1) Paper feed counter
The count increases by 1 each time the 1st paper feed
goes ON.
(2) Paper exit counter
The count increases by 1 each time PS25 goes ON
OFF.
<Operation of each counter>
a . Copy quantity display counter on OB
Normal Paper jam

Indicates the count on the Indicates the count on
paper feed counter. the paper exit counter.
b. C(K)
This counter counts in synchronism with the paper exit
counter.
c. C(T)
This counter counts in synchronism with the paper exit
counter.
2-T-5
2. Signals [6] Option Control

a. Input signals
(1) C(K) JOINT (C(K) →CB)
This signal informs the CB that the count on C(K) has 40VDC
increased. LCT 24VDC
(2) PS25 (PS25 → CB) PGND
PS25 state signal.

When this signal is [L], PS25 goes ON, indicating that 24VDC
Finisher
the paper has been exited. PGND
b. Output signals
(1) C(T) DRIVE (CB → C(T))
C(T) drive signal.
When this signal changes from [L] -> [H], the count of
C(T) increases by 1.
(2) C(K) DRIVE (CB → C(K))
C(K) drive signal
When this signal changes from [L] -> [H], the count of
C(K) increases by 1.
DCPS
CB
IIn this machine, the LCT and Finisher options are controlled by
the CB (control board).
1. Operation
The Finisher contains a CB. Data is exchanged between
Finisher CB and the main body CB. (For details of the
operation of each option, refer to the Option section of this
manual.)
The DCPS (DC power supply unit) supplies power to the
LCT and Finisher.
2-T-6
CONTENTS-1
CONTENTS
3. DIAGRAMS
ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING .............. 3-1
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING .......................... 3-4
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 3-7
JAM LIST .................................................................. 3-11
[1] Paper Jam ..................................................... 3-11
[2] Trouble codes ................................................ 3-20
LIST OF UNPLUGGED CONNECTOR(REFERENCE ONLY) ..... 3-28
[1] Paper Jamming .............................................. 3-28
[2] Trouble codes ................................................ 3-29
[3] Others ............................................................ 3-30
CONTROL BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................. 3-31
DRUM BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ....................... 3-52
TONER CONTROL SENSOR BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ....... 3-53
TIMING CHART (A4, LIFE SIZE, TWO COPIES, UPPER PAPER FEED) ..................... 3-54
ADU TIMING CHART (A4, TWO ORIGINALS, TWO SHEETS SET) .......... 3-55
DIAGRAMS-1
DIAGRAMS
ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1
41
24 20
38
18 36 16
22 51
4
17
45
46
25
27
23 21
5
6
53 19 29
32 26
47 43
11
13 42 44
37
52
9 40 39 50
10
8
31
34
14 35 28 15
48 49
7
1. Switch Sensor
1 SW1 Main switch 14 PS8 Glass PS 27 PS24 Fuser detect PS 40 PS144 LCT conveyance PS (1000)
2 MS1 Door interlock MS1 15 PS11 Paper conveyance door PS 28 PS25 Paper exit PS 41 PS146 LCT conveyance PS (1500)
3 — — 16 PS12 Upper tray no paper PS 29 PS30 By-pass PS 42 PS151 ADU no paper PS
4 MS4 Fixing unit set interlock MS4 17 PS13 Lower tray no paper PS 30 — — 43 PS152 ADU paper feed PS
5 MS141 LCT detection (1500) 18 PS14 Regist. PS 31 PS41 APS sensor 2 (long) 44 PS153 ADU reversal detection PS
6 MS142 LCT detection (1000) 19 PS15 By-pass no paper PS 32 PS42 APS sensor 3 (inside) 45 PS154 ADU paper exit PS 1
7 PS1 Optics overrun PS 20 PS16 Upper limit PS (upper) 33 — — 46 PS155 ADU paper exit PS 2
8 PS2 ADF AES PS 21 PS17 Upper limit PS (lower) 34 PS44 Book detector PS 47 PS156 ADU paper exit PS 3
9 PS3 Shading position PS 22 PS18 No feed PS 35 PS45 APS timing PS 1 48 PS157 ADU gate PS
10 PS4 Paper feed restart PS 23 PS19 Optics sync PS 36 PS140 LCT no paper PS (1500) 49 PS158 ADU interlock PS
11 PS5 Optics return PS 24 PS20 Pre W try PS (upper) 37 PS141 LCT no paper PS (1000) 50 PS160 LCT interlock PS
12 — — 25 PS21 Pre W try PS (lower) 38 PS142 LCT upper limit PS (1500) 51 PS200 LCT pre W PS (1500)
13 PS7 Optics timing PS 26 PS22 By-pass tray paper size PS 39 PS143 LCT upper limit PS (1000) 52 PS210 LCT pre W PS (1000)
53 VR1 By-pass tray paper size VR
3-1
DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAMS-1
24 50 51
9 10
48
29
8 17
7 46
42
22
6 44
14
33
13 40
23
45 16 43
15 11
2 41
47
39
37
26
5 4
32 36
25 35 55
54
34
18
3 49
27 30
53
21
52
31
38
20 1
19
2.Load
1 CL1 LCT paper feed CL (1000) 15 FM30 Developing suction fan 29 M12 Optics drive motor 43 MC8 Conveyance MC1
2 CL2 LCT paper feed CL (1500) 16 FM152 ADU cooling fan 1 30 M17 Upper tray motor 44 MC9 Conveyance MC2
3 CL3 Conveyance CL 17 FM153 ADU cooling fan 2 31 M18 Lower tray motor 45 MC10 Cleaner MC
4 CL151 ADU paper feed CL 18 L1 Exposure lamp 32 M40 Laser correction motor 46 SD1 1st paper feed SD (upper)
5 CL152 ADU reversal CL 19 L2 Fixing heater lamp 1 33 M35 Developing correction motor 47 SD2 1st paper feed SD (lower)
6 CL153 ADU timing CL 20 L3 Fixing heater lamp 2 34 M140 LCT paper feed motor 48 SD3 1st paper feed SD (by-pass)
7 C(K) Key counter 21 L4 Fixing heater lamp 3 35 M141 LCT tray motor (1500) 49 SD4 Separation claw SD
8 C(T) Total counter 22 M1 Main motor 36 M142 LCT tray motor (1000) 50 SD5 Conveyance SD
9 FM2 Optics cooling fan 23 M3 Developing drive motor 37 M151 ADU paper feed motor 51 SD140 LCT paper feed SD (1500)
10 FM11 Polygon cooling fan 24 M4 Drum motor 38 M152 ADU fan motor 52 SD141 LCT paper feed SD (1000)
11 FM14 Conveyance suction fan 25 M5 Polygon motor 39 MC3 2nd paper feed MC 53 SD152 ADU gate SD
12 — — 26 M7 Charger cleaning motor 40 MC5 Paper feed MC (upper) 54 PCL Pre-charging lamp
13 FM16 Main body cooling fan 27 M8 Transfer/separate cleaning motor 41 MC6 Paper feed MC (lower) 55 TSL Transfer Synchronization lamp
14 FM22 E-RDH cooling fan 28 M10 Toner supply motor 42 MC7 Paper feed MC (by-pass)
3-2
DIAGRAMS-1
DIAGRAMS
22
10
35
4
7
14
3
23 33
34
9
5 25
8
2 18
21 19
37
38 13
20 36
12
15
29
11
28
30 32
6 31
16
27 24
1
3. Others
1 ADB AD conversion board 13 IPB Image processing board 25 RL1 Main relay 37 INDICATING BOARD
2 CB Control board 14 CVR Constant voltage regulator 26 – – 38 INDICATING STARTER
3 CBR Circuit breaker 15 LDB1 Laser diode board 1 27 RDH IFB E-RDH I/F board
4 DB Drum board 16 LDB2 Laser diode board 2 28 TH1 Fixing temperature sensor 1
5 DCPS1 DC power supply unit 17 – – 29 TH2 Fixing temperature sensor 2
6 f1 Optics temperature fuse 18 NF Noise filter 30 TH3 Fixing temperature sensor 3
7 HTR1 Internal heater 1 19 OB1 Operation board 1 31 TS1 Thermostat 1
8 HTR2 Internal heater 2 20 OB2 Operation board 2 32 TS2 Thermostat 2
9 HTR3 Internal heater 3 21 OB3 Operation board 3 33 TDS Toner density sensor
10 HV1 High voltage unit 1 22 OPMDB Optics motor drive board 34 TLD Toner level detection sensor
11 HV2 High voltage unit 2 23 – Paper size detection board 35 TCSB Toner control sensor board
12 INDEXSB Index sensor board 24 PMDB Polygon drive board 36 E-RDH Electric RDH control board
3-3
DIAGRAMS-1
DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
163 92 125 (BK: 8 PIN)

(W: 6 PIN) (W: 7 PIN) 42 (R: 10 PIN)
49 142 152 388
85 (W: 11 PIN) (W: 6 PIN)
(BK: 4 PIN) (W: 8 PIN) (W: 5 PIN) 438 (R: 3 PIN) 130
167 (W: 2 PIN) 66
97 71 (W: 2 PIN) (W: 3 PIN)
384 (W: 4 PIN) (W: 3 PIN)
(BK: 3 PIN) 478 (W: 4 PIN)
41 97 (BK: 3 PIN)
(BK: 2 PIN) 48 (BK: 4 PIN) 133 (R: 3 PIN) 74 (W: 3 PIN)
16 (BK: 4 PIN) 72 (W: 3 PIN)
70 (w: 2 PIN)
392 (B: 24 PIN)
124 (BK: 8 PIN) 98 (BK: 7 PIN)
387 (w: 2 PIN)
63 (BK: 12 PIN) 73 (W: 3 PIN)

81 (BK: 2 PIN)
15 (W: 4 PIN) 733 (BK: 2 PIN) 76 (W: 3 PIN)

134 (W: 3 PIN)
11 (BK: 4 PIN) 732 (w: 4 PIN)
143 (BK: 3 PIN)
56 (w: 6 PIN) 67 (W: 13 PIN)
77
399 (W: 3 PIN) 146 (BK: 3 PIN)
33 (w: 3 PIN)
(W: 2 PIN)
750 (w: 2 PIN)
734 (BK: 2 PIN) 390 (w: 2 PIN)
709 751 (w: 2 PIN)
732 726
471 (BK: 9 PIN) (W: 2 PIN) 393 (w: 3 PIN) 727 (W: 3 PIN)
(W: 3 PIN)
473 (BK: 12 PIN) 398 (w: 2 PIN) 723
(W: 3 PIN) 724 (W: 3 PIN)
731 727
(W: 2 PIN) (W: 9 PIN) 725 (W: 3 PIN)
47 (W: 3 PIN)
53 (W: 2 PIN)
163
(W: 4 PIN) 721 (BK: 2 PIN)
462 (BK: 3 PIN) 728 (BK: 10 PIN)

122 (BK: 2 PIN) [How to read connector numbers]
58 465 (BK: 3 PIN)
38 (BK: 8 PIN) 1. Inscribed contents
327 (W: 3 PIN) (W: 3 PIN) 720 (W: 2 PIN)
233 (W: 2 PIN) 123 (BK: 2 PIN) 38 (BK: 8 PIN)
Connector No.
230 (W: 2 PIN) 100

23 (W: 2 PIN) (W: 3 PIN)
234 (W: 2 PIN) 392
(B: 24 PIN)
79 (BK: 7 PIN) Number of pins
147 (BK: 2 PIN) Connector color
44 (W: 3 PIN)
231 (W: 2 PIN)
68 (BK: 8 PIN) 2. Color code
64 (BK: 7 PIN) 45 (W: 3 PIN)
52 (W: 3 PIN) 24 (W: 2 PIN) BN: Brown LB: Light blue W: White
328 (W: 3 PIN) R: Red S: Silver BK: Black
O: Orange B: Blue P: Pink
Y: Yellow V: Violet
64 (W: 3 PIN) GN: Green GY: Gray
59
(W: 3 PIN) 40
(W: 3 PIN) As an example, (B/W) indicates that the male side of the
connector is blue and the female side white.
3-4
DIAGRAMS-1
DIAGRAMS
Control Board
714 223 5
(BK: 2 PIN) (W: 11 pin) (W: 12 pin)
6 62 489 481
713 (W: 3 PIN)
(W: 12 pin) (W: 11 pin) (W: 8 pin) (BK: 12 pin)
402 61
3
(W: 9 pin) (W: 9 pin)
(W: 10 pin)
9 30
(W: 9 pin) (W: 12 pin)
22 800 801 65
4 (W: 8 pin) (W: 12 pin) (W: 6 pin) (W: 11 pin)
711 (W: 3 PIN) (W: 8 pin)
718 or 716 50 83
413
(W: 2 PIN) (W: 4 PIN) (B: 12 pin)
(W: 8 pin)
35 120
709 (BK: 12 PIN) 710 (W: 3 PIN) 208 (W: 5 pin) (BK: 11 pin)
17 (W: 14 pin)
712 (W: 3 PIN) 140
(W: 3 PIN) 1
(BK: 9 pin) (W: 5 pin)
14
(W: 6 PIN)
60 106
322 135
7
(W: 8 pin) (W: 10 pin) 114 (W: 8 pin)
(W: 12 pin) (W: 11 pin)
57 (W: 7 pin)
144 36
(W: 9 pin) (B: 8 pin) (W: 10 pin)
557 (W: 3 PIN)

558 (R: 3 PIN)
532 (W: 3 PIN)

553 (W: 2 PIN) DCPS
85
555 (W: 3 PIN) (W: 10 PIN)
2
99 (W: 10 pin)
534 (W: 3 PIN) (W: 5 pin)
551 (W: 2 PIN) 28 401
78 (W: 5 pin) (W: 4 pin)
552 (W: 2 PIN)
559 (W: 3 PIN) (W: 7 pin) 8
531 (W: 11 PIN)
556 (W: 3 PIN) (W: 10 pin)
550 505 (BK: 24 PIN) 86
(W: 3 PIN) (W: 2 PIN) 88(W: 5 pin) 400
(W: 9 pin)
562 (W: 2 PIN)
168
94 (BK: 3 PIN) (BK: 2 PIN)
564 (W: 3 PIN)

396
397 398
530 (BK: 8 PIN) (W: 5 pin)
395 (W: 6 pin) (W: 4 pin)
382
(W: 4 pin) (W: 5 pin)
560 561 (W: 3 PIN)

(W: 3 PIN)
3-5
DIAGRAMS-1
DIAGRAMS
Operation Board/1 Optics Motor Drive Board E-RDH I/F Board Index Sensor Board
225
210 (NC)
226 225 428
(W: 24 pin) 10 217 (W: 100 pin)
(W: 10 pin) (W: 5 pin) (W: 3 pin)
(W: 10 pin)
442
(W: 11 pin)
213 224 228
(W: 14 pin) (W: 10 pin) (W: 10 pin)
450
(W: 100 pin)
212
(W: 8 pin)
Operation Board/2 Toner Control Sensor Board Electric RDH Control Board LD Drive Board
453 451
214
(W: 72pin) (W: 72 pin)
221 (W: 24 pin)
(W: 5 pin) 215 19
216
(W: 4 pin) (W: 10 pin)
(W: 3 pin)
440
(W: 12 pin)
454 450
(W: 72 pin) (BK: 100 pin)
452
(W: 72 pin)
Operation Board/3 INDICATING STARTER Image Processing Board AD Conversion Board Polygon Drive Board
422
425 (B: 12 pin)
(W: 24 pin)
428 423
220 (W: 10 pin) 77 (W: 4 pin) (BK: 100 pin) (BK: 13 pin)
430 424 410

(W: 4 pin) (W: 8 pin) (W: 5 pin)
421
(B: 14 pin) 432 320
71 (W: 3 pin) (W: 12 pin)
411 (W: 8 pin)
(W: 40 pin)
427 431
(N.C.) (N.C.)
429
426 420
(N.C.)
(N.C.) (GY: 40 pin)
3-6
AC POWER
60-A1 29–1 H RL1 INHIBIT
CVR
L1 CONT H 60-A2 29-2
60-A4
W
29-3 H L1 FB
BK
RC
L
L1 DRIVE 2
L1 DRIVE 1
AL(C)
AC(H)
CVR H/L 60-A3 29-4
24 V DC 60-A10 29-5
CBR
SGND 60-A5 29-6
385-3
385-1
380-3
380-1
81-1
4
3
24 V DC 60-B10
W
BK
81-2
(1)
(2)
RL DRIVE L 60-B9 388-1 388-3
R BK BK BK BK
384-1
RL1
384-3
CB
PGC
384-4
NF
8
7
6
5
BK
as follows.
GY
127-3
127-2
GY
R - Red
127-1
SGND
PS1
5VDC
V
Example)
Y - Yellow
BN - Brown
GN - Green
(4) Signal flow

f1
RL2
O - Orange
L1
388-4
B
[Symbol]
388-2
L1
50-1
Connector
BK
384-2
[Color code]
L2
GY GY
96-4
96-3
96-2
96-1
390-2 390-1
[How to see the diagram]
signal flow
Direction of
(Europe ONLY)
(3) RC is ribbon cable.

2-2 24 V DC (2) (Japan and U.S.A.
the main switch turned ON.
Wire (Violet)
ONLY)
W
BK
61-1 2-1 24 V DC (2)
LB - Light blue P - Pink

Example: Y/GN represents
B - Blue
AC(H) 397-5
the connector symbols ( )

GY- Gray
V - Violet
BK- Black
W - White
green yellow striped pattern.

2. Wiring symbols in the figure are
Faston
61-2 2-3 PGND (Japan ONLY)
752-2
752-1
61-3 2-4 12 V DC AC(C) 397-6 SUB RELAY
PS1
under normal idleing conditions with
BK
61-4 2-5 SGND
The solid black circle ( ) among

AC(C) 398-3 RL2
1
61-5 2-6 SGND W

753-1 753-2
indicates the direction of signal flow.

1. The signals shown reflect levels present
2
61-7 2-8 5 V DC BK BK BK
61-9 2-10 8 V DC 387-1 387-2
BK BK HTR3 W W
BK
BK
BK
4-1 8-10 5 V DC (For control board) 750-1 750-2

BK BK HTR2 W W
4-2 8-9 5 V DC (For control board)
751-1 751-2
4-4 8-7 SGND
RL1
BK BK HTR1 W W
4-5 8-6 SGND
AC(H) 398-1
MAIN RELAY
BK
BK
RC
RL1 CONT L 60-B7 8-4
W
L2 CONT L 60-A6 8-3

L3 CONT H 60-A7 8-2 MS1
381-1
BK
L4 CONT 60-A8 8-1 AC(H) 396-1 BK BK BK

H
BK
BK
381-2
61-6 2-7 SGND AC(H) 395-1 BK
383-2
383-1
MS4
61-8 2-9 5 V DC
381-3
AC(C) 396-3 W W W
BK
BK
W
BK
381-4
AC(C) 395-2 W
3-7
101-4
101-6
102-4
102-6
SW1
BK
BK
MAIN SWITCH
BK
BK
50–3 63–3
11
12
10
R 39–1 M7 DRIVE 1 21–1 30-B7 M7 DRIVE 1
392-8
392-7
50–4 63–4
M7
BK 39–2 M7 DRIVE 2 21–2 30-B6 M7 DRIVE 2
8-8 11 V DC (For KRDS)
MOTOR
50–5 63–5 5-A1 5 V DC
21–3
CHARGER
CLEANING
383-4
383-3
8-5 SGND
13 14
RC
RC
50–6 63–6 5-A2
21–4
BK
BK
TH2 ANG
50–7 63–7
BK
BK
21–5 5-A3 24 V DC
50–8 63–8 5-A4 401-1 5 V DC
21–6 L PCL CONT
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/4)
401-2 5 V DC
R 20–1 24VDC
DB
401-3 SGND
PCL
W
PRE-
20–2 L PCL CONT AC(H) 397-1
LAMP
15 16 17 18
401-4 SGND
CHARGING
AC(H) 397-2
TS-1
28-1 PGND
28-2 PGND 399-2
BK
28-3 PGND AC(H) W W

19–1 325–1 324–1
γ sig/MONI 5-A12 28-4 24 V DC
19–10 325–2 324–2 AC(C) 382-1 W
5-A11 γ/Dmax LED V ref 28-5 24 V DC
TS-2
19–2 325–3 324–3

Y 5-B1 12 V DC
28-6 24 V DC
19 20 21 22 23 24
325–4 324–4 399-1 392-15

19–3 5-B2 L Dmax LED CONT L2 DRIVE P GY W L2
Dmax MONI 19–4 325–5 324–5
5-B3
19–5 325–6 324–6
5-B4 L DRUM JAM CONT 412-3 392-14
400-6 5 V DC
TONER
SENSOR
325–7 324–7 L3 DRIVE 382-2
CONTROL
Dmax sig 19–6 5-B5 412-5 BN BN W L3
325–8 324–8 400-8 –5 V DC
19–7 B 5-B6 SGND
RC
RC
412-2 400-7 SGND
DRUM JAM 19–8 325–9 324–9 392-16
5-B7 412-4
325–10 324–10 400-9 SGND L4 DRIVE 382-4 BN BN W L4
19–9 5-B8 L LED CONT
412-1 400-5 12 V DC
25 26 27 28 29
34–1 325–11 324–11 122-1

R O 5-B9 24 V DC
34
400-1 40 V DC 24 V DC 78-1
34–2 325–12 324–12
SD4
B 5-B10 L SD 4 DRIVE
CLAW
400-2 PGND 122-2
24 V DC 78-2
35
SOLENOID
SEPARATION
400-3 12 V DC
36
400-4 SGND
30 31 32 33
37
51–1 50–12 63–9

BN 5-A5 TDS CONT 122-3
24 V DC 78-3
38
51–2 50–13 63–10

R Y 5-A6 12 V DC
51–3 50–14 63–11
TDS
39
O 5-A7 TDS ANG
TONER
50–15 63–12
SENSOR
51–4
DENSITY
Y B 5-A8 SGND 122-4
40
24 V DC 78-4
122-5
41
24 V DC 78-5
122-6
PGND 78-6
42
50–20 70–1
DCPS
GY GY GY 31–1 BIAS 84–1 O 62-A11 24 V DC
BIAS
B
84–2 62-A2 PGND 121-1

84–3 62-A3 B CONT PGND 78-7
L
70–1
BN 31–2 GP 84–4 62-A4 L C CONT
43 44 45 46
PLATE
GUIDE
84–5 62-A5 C SHIFT
84–6 62-A6 B SHIFT
84–7 62-A7 G SHIFT
HV1
84–8 62-A8 L GP CONT

121-3
F SIG L 84–9 62-A9 24 V DC 99-2
CHARGING
RC
47 48 49 50
121-4
24 V DC 99-3
CB (1/4)
F.G 87–1
51 52
85–10
S SIG 87–3 62-B10
85–8 S SHIFT (DC)
87–5 62-B8
85–7 S SHIFT (AC)
87–6 62-B7
85–6 121-5
87–7 62-B6 L S CONT PGND 99-4
85–5 T SHIFT
87–8 62-B5
85–4 T CONT
87–9 62-B4 L
53 54 55 56
85–3
T SIG 87–10 62-B3
HV2
HV2
85–2 PGND
87–11 B 62-B2
85–1 24 V DC 121-6
87–12 O 62-B1 L
SEPARATE TRANSFER
PGND 99-5
57 58 59
89–1
R 123-2
89–2 85–9 PGND 88-2
TSL
W 62-B11 PSL CONT

60 61 62
128-2
123-3
PGND 88-3
63 64 65
163-1
133-3 R 22-A5 5 V DC
163-2
133-2 22-A6 L PS40
APS
PS40
163-3
133-1 B 22-A7 SGND
SENSOR 1
(Europe ONLY)
123-4
40 V DC (1) 88-4
66 67 68
134-3
163–4 128-1
134-2 22-AB L PS41
APS
PS41
134-1 123-5
SENSOR 2
40V DC (1) 88-5

69 70 71
121-7
1-4 99-6 PGND
121-2
130-3 123-1 24 V DC 99-1
72
163–5 1-3 88-1 PGND

130-2 22-B1 L PS42
APS
PS42
130-1
SENSOR 3
1-2
1-1
138-3
163–6
138-2 22-B2 L PS43
APS
PS43
138-1
167-2
SENSOR 4
24 V DC 30-B1
(Europe ONLY)
MC10
17-1 12-1 167-1

CLUTCH
MC 10 DRIVE H 30-B2
CLEANER
Y 22-B3 12 V DC
17-2 12-2
22-B4 TLD
TLD
17-3 12-3
LEVEL
TONER
B 22-B5 SGND
161-1
DETECTION
O
47
161-5
M35 PLL P 30-A6
161-3
M35
M35 DRIVE 30-A7

MOTOR
SCREW
161-2
41-1
57
B
22-B7
41-2
C (T)
22-B8 L 11-1
TOTAL
FM30 DRIVE H 65-A1 R

COUNTER
11-2
FM30 LD H 65-A2 Y
11-3
FAN
FM30 H/L 65-A3 BN

FM30
SUCTION
11-4
B BK
54
15-1
92-1 FM14 DRIVE H 65-A10 R
76-1 B 9-A1 SGND 15-2
92-2 FM14 LD H 65-A11 Y
FAN
15-3
FM14
76-2 9-A2 L PS2

PS2
44
B BK
SUCTION
92-3
76-3
ADF-EE
OPTICS
R 9-A3 5 V DC
SENSOR
48-1
O R
51
48-2
FM11 LD H 65-A4 Y
48-3
FAN
FM11 H/L 65-A5 BN

FM11
48-4
COOLING
72-1
DEVELOPING DEVELOPING CONVEYANCE POLYGON
55
B BK
92-4
72-2 9-A4 L PS3
PS3
72-3
OPTICS
SENSOR
SHADING
73-1
92-5
73-2 9-A5 L PS4
PS4
73-3 12-4 14-1

SENSOR
O
49
RESTART
PAPER FEED
12-5 14-5
M10 PLL
P 30-B11
12-6 14-3
M10
M10 DRIVE L 30-B12

TONER
MOTOR
SUPPLY
12-7 14-2
B
59
66-1
92-6
66-2 9-A6 L PS5 49-1
3
O R
PS5
66-3 49-2
OPTICS
RETURN
SENSOR
FM22 LD H 95-A6 Y
49-3
FM22 H/L 95-A7
FM22
BN
FAN 2
E-RDH
49-4
COOLING
56
B BK
74-1 16-1
O R
52
92-7 16-2
74-2 9-A7 L PS7 65-B9 Y
PS7
FM16 LD H
16-3
TIMING
74-3
OPTICS
FAN
SENSOR
FM16 H/L 65-B10

FM16
BN
16-4
COOLING
45
B BK
MAIN BODY
128-3 97-1
FM2 DRIVE H 83-A1 R
128-4 97-2
FM2 LD H 83-B1 Y
FM2
FAN
97-3
53
B BK
OPTICS
COOLING
77-1
142-3
77-2 9-A2 L PS1
PS1
OPTICS
SENSOR
77-3
OVERRUN
64
70
204-1
67-1 204-2
142-7
67-2 9-A4 L PSS8 205-1
PS8
5VDC 30-A1
GLASS
SENSOR
67-3 205-3
M1 CONT H 30-A3
M1
MAIN
205-4
MOTOR
M1PLL H 30-A4
205-5
SGND 30-A5
205-2
M1 CLK P 30-A2
58
48
124-8 125-8 201-8
124-7 125-7 201-7
143-1 124-1 125-1 201-1
152-2 142-2 5VDC 30-A8
143-2 9-B5 L PS44 124-2 125-2 201-2
BOOK
PS44
143-3 SGND 30-A9
124-3 125-3 201-3
DETECTOR
RC
RC
M4
M4 CONT H 30-A10
DRUM
MOTOR
124-5 125-5 201-5

M4 H/L 30-B6
152-4 142-4 124-4 125-4 201-4
137-1 9-B6 SGND M4 CLK P 30-A11
152-5 142-5 124-6 125-6 201-6
137-2 9-B7 L PS45 M4 PLL H 30-A12
APS
152-6 142-6
TIMING
PS45
SENSOR
137-3 9-B8 5VDC
217-1
5VDC 65-B3
217-2
SGND 65-B4
462-1 217-3
463-4 M3 CONT H 65-B5
462-2 144-1 PS22 217-4
SIZE
M3 CLK P 65-B6
PAPER
BY-PUS
PS22
SENSOR
462-3 217-5
M3 H/L 65-B7
217-6
M3 LD H 65-B8
M3
217-7
DRIVE
MOTOR
463-3 NC
465-3 217-8
DEVELOPING
463-1
60
144-3 VR1
VR
465-2 217-9
SIZE
PAPER
VR1
463-5
BY-PUS
61
465-1 217-10
DETECTING
66
217-11
67
79-1
44-1 7-B11 SGND
79-2
44-2 7-B1 L PS12 95-1
TRAY
79-3 SGND 322-1 320-1 M5 DRIVE A P 321-1
UPPER
PS12
SENSOR
44-3 7-A11 5VDC 95-2
NO PAPER
M5 CONT H 322-2 320-2 M5 DRIVE B P 321-2
95-3
M5 CLK P 322-3 320-3 M5 DRIVE C P 321-3
95-4
58-1 M5 RDY 322-4 320-4 M5 RDY M5 MAG A' P 321-5
95-5
RC
79-4 M5 BREAK 322-6 320-5 M5 MAG A P 321-6

58-2 7-B3 L PS16 95-6
LIMIT
M5
PS16
UPPER
320-6 M5 MAG B' P 321-7
(UPPER)
SENSOR
58-3
MOTOR
95-7
POLYGON
320-7 M5 MAG B P 321-8

95-8
320-8 M5 MAG C' P 321-9
PMDB
327-1 M5 MAG C P 321-10

79-5 V MAG- P 321-11
327-2 7-B9 L PS20
TRY
PRE W
326-3
PS20
(UPPER)
SENSOR
327-3
326-2
326-1
68-5
50 71 65
141-1
141-2 68-6 7-B6 L PS19
SYNC
68-7 505-9 522-1 523-1 525-1
PS19
OPTICS
SENSOR
141-3 FM152 DRIVE 83-B10
505-11 522-2 523-2 525-2
FM152 LD H 83-B11
ADU
522-4 523-4 525-4

FAN 1
FM153
COOLING
25-1
45-1
25-2
38
45-2 7-B2 L PS13
TRAY
25-3
LOWER
PS13
505-1 551-1
SENSOR
45-3
NO PAPER
505-2 551-2
ADU
FEED
CL151 DRIVE H 83-A4

PAPER
CLUTCH
CL151
59-1
25-4 552-1
59-2 7-B4 L PS17
LIMIT
UPPER
PS17
505-3 552-2
SENSOR
(LOWER)
ADU
59-3 CL152 DRIVE H 83-A5

CLUTCH
CL152
REVERSAL
328-1 531-1 553-1

25-5 505-4 531-2 553-2
328-2 7-B10 L PS21
ADU
CL153 DRIVE H 83-A6
TRY
TIMING
CL153
PRE W
CLUTCH
PS21
SENSOR
(LOWER)
328-3
550-3
38-6 505-18 531-4
13-1 PS151 H 57-B3 550-2
ADU
38-7
PS151
7-B5
SENSOR
13-2 L PS18 550-1

NO PAPER
38-8
PS18
13-3
SENSOR
NO FEED
555-3
505-5 531-5
47-1 PS152 H 57-A1 555-2
ADU
FEED
PAPER
PS152
SENSOR
47-2 7-B7 L PS15 555-1
PS15
SENSOR
BY-PASS
47-3
NO PAPER
556-3
52-1 505-6 531-6
PS153 H 57-A2 556-2
ADU
PS153
7-B8 L PS11
SENSOR
52-2 556-1
REVERSAL
DETECTION
DOOR
PS11
PAPER
SENSOR
52-3
CONVEYANCE
532-1
557-3
505-7 531-7 532-2
PS154 H 57-A3 557-2
ADU
EXIT
23-1 532-3
PAPER
7-A1 H M17 DRIVE

PS154
557-1
SENSOR 1
23-2
M17
7-A2 24VDC
TRAY
UPPER
MOTOR
558-3
505-8 531-8
PS155 H 57-A4 558-2
ADU
EXIT
24-1
PAPER
PS155
7-A3 H M18 DRIVE 558-1

SENSOR 2
24-2
M18
7-A4 24VDC
TRAY
LOWER
MOTOR
505-12 531-10 534-1
5VDC 57-B4 559-3
505-10 531-9 534-2
PS156 H 57-A5 559-2
ADU
EXIT
122-1 79-6 505-13 531-11 534-3

PAPER
PS156
SENSOR
7-A5 24VDC SGND 57-B6 559-1

122-2 79-7
SD1
1SET
FEED
7-A6 H SD1 DRIVE
PAPER
505-23 531-3
ADU SW L 57-A8
SGND 57-B1
123-1 25-6
ADU ADD L 57-B2
123-2 25-7
SD2
FEED
7-A7 H SD2 DRIVE
PAPER
(UPPER) (LOWER)
531-13
SOLENOID SOLENOID
554-1
531-12
554-2
234-1
505-14 554-3
1
234-2 M151 DRIVE H 83-A8
7-B12 H MC8 DRIVE 505-15 554-4
MC8
CLUTCH
M151 CLOCK P 83-A9
505-16 554-5
M151 H/L 83-A10
505-17 554-6
ADU
53-1
M151
FEED
M151 LD H 83-A11
PAPER
MOTOR
505-20 554-8
CB(2/4)
53-2
42
1SET CNVEYANCE 1SET

FEED
SD3
7-A8 H SD3 DRIVE

PAPER
(BY-PASS) 233-1 505-22 554-11

34
233-2
FEED
MC7
7-A12 H MC7 DRIVE

PAPER
530-1 562-1
R
39
230-1 530-2 562-2

ADU
GATE
SD152 DRIVE H 83-A7 B

SD152
230-2
SOLENOID
FEED
MC5
7-A9 H MC5 DRIVE

PAPER
CLUTCH CLUTCH
SOLENOID (BY-PASS) (UPPER)
530-6
560-1
231-1 530-7
PS157 L 57-A7 560-2
ADU
GETE
231-2 530-8
PS157
SENSOR
MC6
FEED
7-A10 H MC6 DRIVE 560-3

CLUTCH
(LOWER)
464-1 530-3
SGND 57-B7 561-1
2
464-2 530-4
144-4 H MC9 DRIVE PS158 L 57-A6 561-2
MC9
ADU
CLUTCH
530-5
PS158
SENSOR
5VDC 57-B5 561-3

PAPER CNVETANCE
INTERLOCK
505-19 522-5 524-1 526-1

FM153 DRIVE 83-A12
505-21 522-6 524-2 526-2
FM153 LD H 83-B12
ADU
522-8 524-4 526-4

FAN 2
FM154
COOLING
721-1
728-4 721-2
(10)
SD141 DRIVE H 120-B11

SD141
LCT 1ST
SOLENID
3-8
728-5
SGND 83-B3 723-1
728-6
PS141 H 83-B4 723-2
(10)
LCT
728-7
PS141
5VDC 83-B5 723-3

SENSOR
728-8
724-1
728-9
(10)
PS143 L 83-B6 724-2

728-10
SENSOR
PS143
724-3
LCT PAPER
PAPER FEED NO PAPER UPPER LIMIT
168-2 42-4 30-B9 M8 DRIVE 1

168-1 42-5
M8
30-B10 M8 DRIVE 2 722-1

725-1
MOTOR
CLEANING
722-2
TRANSFER
/SEPARATE
PS160 L 83-B7 725-2

LCT
722-3
SENSOR
PS160
725-3
INTERLOCK
64-2 40-3 6-B11 H SD5 DRIVE 722-4

64-1 40-1 727-1
SD5
6-B10 24V DC 722-5

PS144 H 83-B8 727-2
SOLENOID
(10)
LCT
CNVEYANCE
722-6
PS144
SENSOR
727-3
CONVEYANCE
33-1
46-1 6-A1 SGND
33-2 722-7
46-2 6-A2 H PS14 726-1
33-3
PS14
REGIST.
722-8
SENSOR
46-3 6-A3 5VDC PS210 83-B9 726-2

(10)
LCT
722-9
PRE W
SENSOR
726-3
PS210
40-8
32-1 6-A4 SGND
40-9
32-2 6-A5 H PS30 94-1 564-1
40-10
PS30
32-3 6-A6 5V DC M152 DRIVE 65-B1

SENSOR
BY-PASS
94-2 564-2
M152 LD 65-B2
FAN
ADU
M152
94-3 564-3
MOTOR
46
86-1
6-A7 24VDC
2ND
86-2
FEED
6-A8 H MC3 DRIVE 728-1 730-1

MC3
PAPER
CLUTCH
37
728-3 730-2
LCT
CL3
CL3 DRIVE H 120-B9

CLUTCH
82-1
CNVEYANCE
37-1 6-A9 SGND

82-2
37-2 6-B8 L PS24
82-3
FUSER
PS24
DETECT
SENSOR
37-3 6-B9 5VDC 720-1

728-2 720-2
(10)
CL1
CL1 DRIVE H 120-B10

LCT 1ST
CLUTCH
PAPER FEED
392-1 98-1 709-1 716-1
6-B1 TH1 ANG 1
35
TH1 ∗ 392-2
∗ 98-2
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
6-B2 TH1 ANG 2 709-2 716-2
CL2 DRIVE H 120-B1
CL2
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
LCT 1ST
FIXING
392-3 98-3
TH2 ∗ ∗ ∗ 6-B3 ∗ TH2 ANG 1
36
392-4
SENSOR 1, 2
98-4 6-B4 TH2 ANG 2
TEMPERATURE
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
392-5 98-5 6-A12 TH3 ANG
TH3 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 709-9 714-1
∗ 709-4
∗ 714-2
∗
SD140 DRIVE H 120-B2 ∗ ∗ ∗
392-10 98-7
SD140
LCT 1ST
40-1 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ 6-B5 SGND

392-11 98-8
PAPER FEED PAPER FEED
40-2 ∗ ∗ ∗ 6-B6 L PS25

392-12 98-9
PS25
EXIT
40-3 6-B7 5VDC
PAPER
∗ ∗ ∗
SENSOR
709-5
SGND 120-B3 ∗ ∗ ∗ 710-1
709-6
PS140 H 120-B4 ∗ ∗ 710-2
LCT
709-7
PS140
5VDC ∗ ∗ ∗ 710-3
120-B5
W 225-1 P M12 DRIVE C 224-1 223-1 P M12 H/L
W 225-2 P M12 DRIVE A M12 DIR ∗ 224-2 223-2 M12 CLK
W 225-3 P M12 DRIVE B 224-3 223-3 ∗ M12 STOP
∗ 711-1
BK 228-1 P M12 MAG A' 224-4 223-4 ∗ M12 MODE 0 709-8
PS142 L 120-B6 ∗ ∗ 711-2
BK 228-2 P M12 MAG A 224-5 223-5 ∗ M12 MODE 1
711-3
PS142
RC
BK 228-3 P M12 MAG B' 224-6 223-6 ∗ M12 MODE 2
LCT PAPER
228-4 P M12 MAG B 224-7 223-7 H M12 F/R
M12
BK
BK 228-5 P M12 MAG C' 224-8 223-8 H M12 CONT
BK 228-6 P M12 MAG C 224-9 223-9 H M12 BRAKE
BK 228-7 SGND M12 LD L 224-10 223-10 M12 NCR ∗ 713-1
709-3
BK 228-8 5VDC 223-11 M12 PLLL PS146 H 120-B7 713-2
OPTICS DRIVE MOTOR

∗ ∗
LCT
M12 PLL ∗ 224-11

713-3
PS146
BK 228-9 ∗ M12 FG ∗
NO PAPER UPPER LIMIT CONVEYANCE
226-1 40VDC
30
∗
226-2 PGND
31
∗ ∗ 712-1
709-11
PS200 712-2
LCT
∗ 120-B8 ∗ ∗
226-3 24VDC
32
PRE W
∗ 712-3
PS200
OPMDB
DCPS
CLUTCH (15) SOLENID (15) SENSOR (15) SENSOR (15) SENSOR (15) SENSOR (15)
709-15
226-5 SGND
∗ ∗
33
∗
203-1
40VDC
69
∗ 203-3
203-2
PGND
63
∗ 204-1
5VDC 120-A1 ∗ 204-2
3-9
204-3
M140
M140 CONT ∗ 120-A2 ∗

223-4 204-4
WT SW 221-1 413-5
LCT PAPER
∗ ∗ M140 PLL P 120-A3 ∗

FEED MOTOR
204-5
SGND 120-A4 ∗
223-5 204-6
221-2 ∗ ∗ 413-6 SD LE DRIVE M140 CLOK P 120-A5 ∗
223-6
221-3 ∗ ∗ 413-7 WT LE DRIVE 731-1
41
∗ 731-2
∗
223-7 M141 DRIVE L 120-A6
M141
221-4 413-8 SGND ∗ ∗

LCT
∗ ∗
TRAY
223-1
MOTOR (15)
215-1 ∗ ∗ 3-B5 SGND

223-2 8VDC 732-1

215-2 3-B6
40
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
OB2
732-2
M142 DRIVE L 120-A7
LCT
MOTOR
223-3 ∗ ∗
M142
3-B7 5VDC
TRAY
215-4 ∗ ∗
(10)
709-13
∗ ∗
219-1 709-14
214-1 210-1 10-1 ∗ ∗ 3-A1 P OB1 TXD ∗
210-2 219-2
214-2 3-A2
OB1 RXD P 10-2 ∗ ∗ 733-2 733-2
TRAY (15) ADD P 120-A9 ∗ ∗
214-3 210-3 219-3 733-1 733-1
3-A3 OB1 RTS TMP4 P 120-A8 ∗ ∗ ∗
10-3 P
MS141
∗ ∗
210-4
LCT TRAY
214-4 219-4
OB1 CTS P 10-4 ∗ 3-A4
214-5 210-5 ∗
219-5
214-6 210-6 10-5 ∗ ∗ 3-A5 P OB1 DTR
734-1
219-6 TMP4 P 120-A10 ∗ ∗
214-7 210-7 3-A6 734-2
OB1 DSR P 10-6 ∗ ∗ TRAY (10) ADD P 120-A11 ∗ ∗
MS142
LCT TRAY
214-8 210-8
DETECTOR (15) DETECTOR (10)
214-9 210-9
219-7
214-10 210-10
5
5VDC 10-7 ∗ ∗
214-11 210-11
219-8 420-40 411-1 P TCK1 12VDC 410-1
29
214-12 210-12 ∗
6
5VDC 10-8 ∗ ∗ 420-39 411-2 GND
RC
210-13 420-38 411-3 P TCK2 SGND 410-2
28
214-13 ∗
420-37 411-4 GND
214-14 210-14 219-9
420-36 411-5 P RCK1 5VDC 410-3
27
∗
7
SGND 10-9 ∗ ∗
210-15 420-35 411-6 GND
214-15
DCPS
420-34 411-7 P RCK2 SGND 410-4

26
∗
214-16 210-16 219-10 420-33 411-8 GND
8
SGND 10-10 420-32 411-9 P TG –5VDC 410-5

25
214-17 210-17 ∗ ∗ ∗
420-31 411-10 P CLMP
OB1
214-18 210-18 420-30 411-11 P S CK
420-29 411-12 P S IN
214-19 210-19 420-28 411-13 P S LD
210-20 420-27 411-14 P MD 0
214-20
420-26 411-15 P MD 1
214-21 210-21 420-25 411-16 P MD 2
420-24 411-17 P S LP
214-22 210-22
420-23 411-18 GND
210-23 420-22 411-19 P AD CK
214-23
71-1 216-1 LMP ADJ 420-21 411-20 P APR
RC
214-24 210-24 420-20 411-21 P OD 0

71-2 216-2 SGND
RC
420-19 411-22 P OD 1
71-3 216-3 5VDC
420-18 411-23 P OD 2
CB (3/4)
420-17 411-24 P OD 3
ADB
420-16 411-25 P OD 4
420-15 411-26 P OD 5
420-14 411-27 P OD 6
77-1 R FL 83-1 212-1 Y1 CONT 411-28 P OD 7
420-13
IPB (1/2)
420-12 411-29 P OD 8
83-2 212-2 X1 CONT
420-11 411-30 GND
77-4 BK FL GND
83-3 212-3 Y2 CONT 420-10 411-31 P ED 0
420-9 411-32 P ED 1
INDICATING STARTER
83-4 212-4 X2 CONT 420-8 411-33 P ED 2
RC
420-7 411-34 P ED 3
∗∗ -1 212-5 FL HOT
420-6 411-35 P ED 4
∗∗ -2 212-6 NC 420-5 411-36 P ED 5
420-4 411-37 P ED 6
∗∗ -3 212-7 NC 411-38 P ED 7
420-3
420-2 411-39 P ED 8
∗∗ -4 212-8 FL GND
420-1 411-40 GND
82-1 213-1 LCD Vajd

443-1
M40 PWR A P 424-1 ∗ W
82-2 213-2 24VDC 443-2
M40 PWR B P 424-2 ∗ GY
443-3
82-3 213-3 P LD3 M40 DRIVE A P 424-3 ∗ O
443-4
M40 DRIVE A' P 424-4 Y
M40
∗
LASER
82-4 213-4 LD2 443-6

P M40 DRIVE B P 424-5 ∗ BK
443-5
M40 DRIVE B' P 424-6 ∗ BN
REVISE MOTOR
82-5 213-5 LD1 SGND 481-A1 425-A1

INDICATING BOARD
P HLVL 424-7
∗ ∗
IP REQ ∗ 481-A2 425-A2
82-6 213-6 LD0 SMPR ∗ 424-8
P 481-A3 425-A3 ∗ RESET
INDEX P 481-A4 425-A4
82-7 213-7 24VDC
TXA 1 P 481-A5 425-A5 442-1
5VDC 423-1
82-8 213-8 PGND 481-A6 425-A6 ∗ MEE V/V 442-2
SGND 423-2
RC
481-A7 425-A7 ∗ M V/V 442-3

M INDEX 1 P 423-3
82-9 213-9 5VDC 442-4
SGND 423-4
481-A9 425-A9 ∗ DCORR 442-5
82-10 213-10 CP M INDEX 2 P 423-5
481-A10 442-6
RC
425-A10 ∗ I YOBI 1
SGND 423-6
GND 481-A11 425-A11 442-7
INDXSB
82-11 213-11 LP S INDEX 1 P 423-7

8VDC 481-A12 425-A12 442-8
SGND 423-8
82-12 212-12 FLM MPR 425-B1 442-9
RC
∗ 481-B1 S INDEX 2 P 423-9

481-B2 425-B2 P RXA 0 442-10
82-13 SGND 423-10
213-13 NC TXA 0 P 481-B3 425-B3
HLVL ∗ 423-11 ∗
481-B4 425-B4 P RXA 1
82-14 213-14 DISP OFF IPR ∗ 423-12
SGND 481-B5 425-B5
481-B6 425-B6 ∗ MTN V/V
481-B7 425-B7 ∗ MAPC CAL
481-B8 425-B8 ∗ MIND CHG 440-1
5VDC 421-1
481-B9 425-B9 ∗ CORR 440-2
SGND 421-2
O YOBI 1 ∗ 481-B10 425-B10 440-3
LD1 APC CONT 1 ∗ 421-3
GND 481-B11 425-B11 440-4
220-1 217-1 5VDC SV ∗ 481-B12 425-B12 440-5
LD1 VIDEO H 421-5
440-6
217-2 SGND 421-6
220-2 S LE 440-7
RC
LD1 ALM H 421-7

440-8
LDB1
220-3 217-3 G LE LD1 IRCLK P 421-8

440-9
LD1 INC ∗ 421-9
440-10
220-4 217-4 SS LE LD1 U/D ∗ 421-10
440-11
LD1 C/S ∗ 421-11
217-5 440-12
220-5 EXT LE LD1 LPR ∗ 421-12
RC
OB3
220-6 217-6 JSD 0
220-7 217-7 JSD 5
220-8 217-8 JSD 6 441-1

5VDC 422-1
441-2
SGND 422-2
220-9 217-9 JSL 14 441-3
441-4
217-10 LD2 APC CONT 2 ∗ 422-4
220-10 NC 441-5
LD2 VIDEO H 422-5
441-6
SGND 422-6
441-7
RC
LD2 ALM H 422-7

441-8
LDB2
LD2 IRCLK P 422-8

441-9
LD2 INC ∗ 422-9
441-10
LD2 U/D ∗ 422-10
441-11
LD2 C/S ∗ 422-11
441-12
LD2 LPR ∗ 422-12
5VDC 430-1
15
∗
5VDC 430-2
16
∗
SGND 430-3
17
∗
DCPS
SGND 430-4
18
∗
428-A1 450-B1
8-B8 8VDC
8-B6 8VDC
NOT ATTACH
∗ C (K) ONLY
55-5
∗ ∗ 35-1 24VDC
55-1
∗ ∗ 35-2 L C (K) JOINT
55-2
35-3 SGND
KEY
∗ ∗
C (K)
55-6
∗ ∗ 35-4 L C (K) DRIVE
COUNTER
E-RDH
IPB (2/2)
RDH IFB
428-A50 450-B50
428-B1 450-A1
428-B50 450-A50
102-5 102 -3
Y/G Y/G 106 -1 P ADF TXD
102-9 102-2
∗ 106-2 SGND
102-11 102-1
∗ 106-3 P ADF RXD
102-10 102-4
DCPS
RC
RC
∗
RADF
102-12 102-6
23 22 20 19
∗ 102-7
106 -6 ∗ ADF REQ
102-8
106 -7 ∗ ADF ACX
56 -1 60-B1 TMP 1
∗ 56-2
∗ ∗
∗ ∗ 60 -B2 ∗ TMP 2
56-3 60-B3 0
∗ ∗ ∗
56-4 60-B4 1 PAPER
∗ ∗ ∗ SEZE
BOARD
56-5 60-B5 2
∗ ∗ ∗ RETURN
DETECTION
PAPER SIZE
56-6 60-B6 3
∗ ∗ ∗
101-5 101-3
Y/G Y/G 114-1 P TXD
101-2
114-2 SGND
101-11 101-1
24
O 114-3 P PXD
101-4
DCPS
114-4 SGND
RC
RC
101-12 101-6
Finisher
21
BK 114-5 5VDC
101-7
114-6 ∗ REQ
101-8
114-7 ∗ ACK
CB (4/4)
OPTIONS
126-1 126-6
140-A3
68
∗ ∗ LT M800 CLK
126-7
140-A4 LT M800 CONT
126-2 126 -8
72
∗ ∗ 140 -A5 LT M800 PLL

126-9
140-A6 LT M801 CONT
126-3 126 -10

62
∗ ∗ 140 -A7 LT FEED SD CONT

127-1
140-A8 LT MC800 CONT
127-2
140-A9 LT PS800
395-1 127-3
2
∗ ∗ 140-B1 LT PS801
127-4
3 - 10
140-B2 LT PS802
RC
RC
395-2 127-5
1
∗ ∗ 140 -B3 LT PS803
127-6
140-B4 LT ADD
Large capacity tray
127-7
140-B5 LT SW801
27-8 LT PS804
140-B6
127-9 LT M801 F/ R
140-B7
127-10 LT SW800
140-B8
127-11
140-B9 LT PS805
126-4
140 -A1 5VDC
126-5
140-A2 SGND
DIAGRAMS
JAM LIST
Following jam detection is carried out in this machine.
[1] Paper Jam

Classifica- Jam Operation when jam
Causes Method of clearing jam
tion code occurs
B y - p a s s J10-2 When PS14 (register) is not turned ON If a copy is being Remove the original
feed tray operating within 2 seconds from ON of SD3 made when a jam paper from by-pass try
(by-pass feed). occurs, copy operation then remove the jammed
J10-4 PS30 (by-pass) is ON at the time of is stopped after paper.
ON of SD3 (by-pass feed). completion of exit of
Tray 1 J11-1 When PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is ON dur- the copy. Open the main body
stationary ing idling. conveyance door and
J11-2 When PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is not turned remove the jammed
operating ON within 400 msec from ON of an paper and close it.
SD1 (1st paper feed (upper)). Open the tray and
J11-3 PS18 (no feed) is not turned ON remove the jammed
within 650 msec from ON of an SD1 paper and close it.
(1st paper feed (upper)).
J11-4 PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is ON when
SD1 (1st paper feed (upper)) goes ON.
Tray 2 J12-1 When PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is ON dur-
stationary ing idling.
J12-2 When PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is not turned
operating ON within 400 msec from ON of SD2
(1st paper feed (lower)).
J12-3 PS18 (no feed) is not turned ON
Main body and LCT
within 820 msec from ON of SD2

(1st paper feed (lower)).
J12-4 PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is ON when
SD2 (1st paper feed (lower)) goes ON.
Tray 3 J13-1 When PS210 (LCT pre W try (1000)) is ON Open the LCT convey-
stationary during idling. ance door and remove
J13-2 When PS210 (LCT pre W try (1000)) is not the jammed paper and
operating turned ON within 420 msec from ON close it.
of SD141 (LCT paper feed (1000)). Open the tray and
J13-3 PS144 (LCT conveyance (1000)) is remove the jammed
not turned ON within 2 seconds from paper and close it.
ON of SD141 (LCT paper feed
(1000)).
Tray 4 J14-1 When PS200 (LCT pre W try (1500)) is ON
stationary during idling.
J14-2 When PS200 (LCT pre W try (1500)) is not
operating turned ON within 370 msec from ON
of SD140 (LCT paper feed (1500)).
J14-3 PS146 (LCT conveyance (1500)) is
not turned ON within 2.4 seconds
from ON of SD140 (LCT paper feed
(1500)).
3 - 11
DIAGRAMS

tion code occurs
Large J15-1 When PS802 (pre try) is ON during idling. If a copy is being Open the LCT upper
Large capacity tray
capacity tray stationary made when a jam cover and remove the
paper feed J15-2 When PS802 (pre try) is not turned ON occurs, copy operation jammed paper and close
jam operating within 400 msec from ON of MC800 is stopped after it.
(paper feed). completion of exit of
J15-3 PS804 (no feed) is not turned ON the copy.
within 800 msec from ON of PS802
(pre tray).
J16 When PS14 (register) is ON during idling. The main body is Open the front door and
stationary stopped immediately. remove the jammed
When An original jammed in the ADF during paper and close it.
operating a copy operation.
J17-1 When PS18 (no feed) or PS19 (optics sync) If a copy is being Open the conveyance
stationary is ON during idling. made when a jam door and remove the
J17-2 When PS157 (ADU gate) is turned ON occurs, copy operation jammed paper and close
operating within 280 msec from start of copy- is stopped after it.
ing. completion of exit of
J17-3 PS19 (optics sync) is not turned ON the copy.
within 560 msec from ON of PS157
(ADU gate).
J17-4 PS19 (optics sync) is not turned ON
Conveyance within 430 msec from the start of
jam reconveyance in right lengthwise
transport in LCT paper feed.
J17-5 PS18 (no feed) is not turned ON
within 560 msec from the start of
reconveyance in right lengthwise
Main body and LCT
transport in LCT/ADU reverse side.

J17-6 A loop is not completed within 400
msec from ON of a PS18 (no feed).
J19 When PS146 (LCT conveyance (1500)) is
stationary ON when the machine is idling.
When PS146 (LCT conveyance (1500))
operating does not go ON within 300 ms after
SD141 (LCT paper feed (1000)) go
ON, or within 440 ms after SD140
(LCD paper feed (1500)) go ON.
3 - 12
DIAGRAMS

tion code occurs
Conveyance J21 Paper wrapping is detected by The main body is Open the front door and
jam TCSB. stopped immediately. remove the jammed
J30 PS14 (regist) is not turned OFF within paper and close it.
paper size length + 40 mm from ON
of MC3 (2nd paper feed).
J31 PS25 (paper exit) is not turned ON
within 2000 msec from ON of MC3
(2nd paper feed).
PS25 (paper exit) was turned ON
within 280 msec from copy start.
J32 When PS25 (paper exit) is ON during idling. Open the paper exit and
stationary the front door and
When PS25 (paper exit) does not go OFF remove the jammed
operating within 2000 msec after PS25 goes paper and close them.
ON.
Main body and LCT
3 - 13
DIAGRAMS

tion code occurs
ADF J61 When ADF was opened during ADF ADF is stopped Open ADF and remove
paper feed operating operation. immediately. the jammed paper and
jam J62 When PS302 (original passing) is ON dur- When there is paper in close it.
stationary ing idling in ADF mode. or after transfer, the If there is a jammed
When PS302 (original passing) is not main body is stopped paper on a conveyance
operating turned ON within a certain period after exit of the paper. unit in the main body,
from the start of ADF original. remove it.
PS302 (original passing) is not
turned OFF within a certain period
from its ON.
PS302 (original passing) ON when
ADF
original setting is completed.

ADF J63 When PS306 (original exit) is ON during
paper exit stationary idling in ADF mode.
jam When PS306 (original exit) is not turned
operating ON within a certain period from the
start of ADF original exit.
PS306 (original exit) is not turned
OFF within a certain period from its
ON.
PS306 (original exit) is not turned
ON within a certain period from the
start of RADF original reversing.
3 - 14
DIAGRAMS

tion code occurs
Finisher J72-01 When PS4 (FIN entrance passing) Finisher/main body is Remove the jammed
stationary detected paper. stopped immediately. paper off the finisher/
J72-02 PS5(stacker conveyance passing) main body.
detected paper.
J72-03 PS4(FIN entrance passing)and
PS5(stacker conveyance passing)
detected paper.
J72-04 PS6(paper exit 1)detected paper.
J72-05 PS4(FIN entrance passing) and
PS6(paper exit 1) detected paper.
J72-06 PS5(stacker conveyance passing)
and PS6(paper exit 1)detected pa-
per.
J72-07 PS4(FIN entrance passing), PS5
(stacker conveyance passing) and
PS6(paper exit 1)detected paper.
J72-08 PS1(printer paper exit)is ON.
J72-09 PS1(Printer paper exit) and PS4
(stacker conveyance passing) are
ON.
J72-10 PS1(Printer paper exit) and
PS5(stacker conveyance passing)
are ON.
J72-11 PS1(Printer paper exit), PS5(stacker
conveyance passing)and PS4(FIN
Finisher
entrance passing)are ON.

J72-12 PS1(Printer paper exit) and PS6
(Paper exit 1) are ON.
J72-13 PS1(Printer paper exit), PS4 (FIN
entrance passing) and PS6 (Paper
exit 1) are ON.
J72-14 PS1(Printer paper exit), PS5
(Stacker conveyance passing) and
PS6 (Paper exit 1) are ON.
J72-15 PS1(Printer paper exit), PS6(paper
exit 1), PS5 (stacker conveyance
passing) and PS4(FIN entrance
passing) are ON.
J72-16 PS20(stacker paper 0) is ON.
J72-17 PS20(stacker paper 0) and PS4 (FIN
entrance passing) are ON.
J72-18 PS20 (stacker paper 0) and PS5
(Stacker conveyance passing) are
ON.
J72-19 PS20(stacker paper 0), PS5 (stac-
ker conveyance passing), and
PS4(FIN entrance passing ) are ON.
J72-20 PS20(Stacker paper 0) and PS6
(paper exit 1) are ON.
J72-21 PS20(stacker paper 0), PS4 (FIN
entrance passing) and PS6 (Paper
exit 1) are ON.
3 - 15
DIAGRAMS

Causes Method of clearing Jam
tion code occurs
Finisher J72-22 When PS20(stacker paper 0), PS5 Finisher/main body is Remove the jammed
Stationary (stacker conveyance passing) and stopped immediately. paper off the
PS6 (Paper exit 1) are ON. finisher/main body.
J72-23 PS20(stacker paper 0), PS6(paper
exit 1), PS5 (stacker conveyance
passing) and PS4(FIN entrance
passing) are ON.
J72-24 PS20(stacker paper 0) and PS1
(printer paper exit) are ON.
J72-25 PS20(stacker paper 0), PS1
(Printer paper exit) and PS4 (FIN
(printer paper exit) and PS5
(stacker conveyance passing) are
ON.
Finisher

(printer paper exit), PS5(stacker
conveyance passing) and PS4(FIN
J72-28 PS20(stacker paper 0), PS1(printer
paper exit) and PS6(paper exit 1)
are ON.
(Printer paper exit), PS4 (FIN
entrance passing) and PS6(paper
exit 1) are ON.
(Printer paper exit), PS5 (stacker
conveyance passing) and
PS6(paper exit 1) are ON.
J72-31 PS20(stacker paper 0), PS1(printer
paper exit), PS6(paper exit 1), PS5
(stacker conveyance passing) and
PS4 (FIN entrance passing) are
ON.
3 - 16
DIAGRAMS

Causes Method of clearing Jam
tion code occurs
Finisher J72-49 When PS17(stapler R HP) is not turned Finisher/main body is Remove the jammed
operating ON within a certain period after stopped immediately. paper off the
M10 (stapler F) is ON. finisher/main body.
J72-50 PS15(stapler R HP) is not turned
ON within a certain period after M9
(stapler R) is ON.
J72-51 PS15(stapler R HP) and PS17
(stapler F HP) are not turned ON
within a certain period after M9
(staper R) and M10 (stapler F) are
ON.
J72-65 PS4 (FIN entrance passage) does
not go ON after PS25 (paper exit)
Finisher
goes ON/OFF.
J72-66 PS6 (paper exit 1) does not go ON
after PS4 (FIN entrance passage)
goes ON/OFF. (only in sort mode)
J72-67 PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage) does not go ON after
PS4 (FIN entrance passage) goes
ON/OFF. (only in staple mode)
J72-68 PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage) does not go OFF after it
goes ON. (only in staple mode)
J72-70 PS6 (paper exit 1) does not go ON
within the specified period after M7
(paper feed roller) goes ON. (only
in staple mode)
3 - 17
DIAGRAMS

tion code occurs
Finisher J72-71 When PS6 (paper exit 1) does not go OFF Finisher/main body is Remove the jammed
operating after it goes ON. stopped immediately. paper off the finisher/
J72-72 PS4 (FIN entrance passage) does main body.
Finisher
not go OFF after it goes ON. (only

when copies are exited to sub-tray)
J72-73 PS12 (paper exit port) does not go
ON/OFF after PS4 (FIN entrance
passage) goes ON/OFF.
3 - 18
DIAGRAMS

tion code occurs
ADU J92 When PS152 (ADU paper feed) is not The main body is Open ADU/main body
paper feed operating turned ON within 2000 msec from stopped immediately. front door/lengthwise
jam ON of PS25 (paper exit). conveyance door and
J93 When During idling, PS152 (ADU paper remove jammed paper,
stationary feed), PS153 (ADU reversal) or and close it.
PS157 (ADU gate) is ON.
When PS157 (ADU gate) is turned ON
operating within 280 msec from the copy start.
CL151 (ADU paper feed) is not
turned OFF within 1500 msec from
ON of PS152 (ADU paper feed).
ADU J94 PS154 (ADU paper exit 1) is not
paper exit turned ON within 640 msec from
jam OFF of PS152 (ADU paper feed).
PS156 (ADU paper exit 3) is not
turned ON within 900 msec from ON
ADU
of PS154 (ADU paper exit 1).

J95 When During idling, PS154 (ADU paper
stationary exit 1), PS155 (ADU paper exit 2),
PS156 (ADU paper exit 3) or PS151
(ADU no paper) is ON.
J96 When PS153 (ADU reversal) is OFF after
operating 140 msec from OFF of PS152 (ADU
paper feed).
3 - 19
DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAMS-1
[2] Trouble Codes

Classifica- Warning Operation in case of Releasing
Causes Estimated abnormal parts
tion code warning occurrence method
Paper feed F18-1 PS16 (upper limit (upper)) is not The main body is OFF of main CB (Control board)
lifting (upper) turned ON within 7.5 seconds from stopped immediately if it switch → ON M17 (Upper try)
trouble ON of M17 (upper try). is in process of copying, PS16 (upper limit (upper))
F18-2 PS17 (upper limit (lower)) is not and main relay is turned CB (Control board)
(lower) turned ON within 7.5 seconds from OFF. M18 (Lower try)
ON of M18 (lower try). * Limited use function PS17 (Upper limit (lower))
F18-3 PS143 (LCT upper limit (1000)) is can work. CB (Control board)
(1000) not turned ON within 7.5 seconds M142 (LCT try (1000))
from ON of M142 (LCT try (1000)). PS143 (LCT upper limit (1000))
F18-4 PS142 (LCT upper limit (1500)) is CB (Control board)
(1500) not turned ON within 7.5 seconds M141 (LCT try (1500))
from ON of M141 (LCT try (1500)). PS142 (LCT upper limit (1500))
F18-5 PS801 (LCT upper limit) does
not go ON within 30 sec. after
M801 (LCT up/down) goes ON.
Wire F22-1 Operation for charging corona Main relay is turned OFF Charging corona unit
cleaning wire cleaning was tried, but it and all keys are not CB (control board)
trouble was locked. Or, it was locked accepted.
on the half way.
F22-2 Operation for transfer and sepa- Transfer/separation unit
ration corona wire cleaning was CB (control board)
tried, but it was locked. Or, it
was locked on the half way.
High voltage F28-1 When charging output is judged The main body is OFF of main Charging corona unit
Main body
power to be abnormal discharge. stopped immediately if it switch → ON HV1 (High voltage unit 1)
source F28-2 When transfer output is judged is in process of copying, Remove Transfer unit
trouble to be abnormal discharge. main relay is turned jammed paper, HV2 (High voltage unit 2)
F28-3 When separation output is OFF, and all keys are if any. Separation unit
judged to be abnormal dis- not accepted. HV2 (High voltage unit 2)
charge.
Fixing high F34-1 Fixing temperature is exceed- Main relay is turned Set "0" to the TH1 (Fixing temperature
temperature ing about 220˚C/428˚F. (Fixing OFF, and all keys are address 3-1, sensor 1)
trouble high temperature trouble de- not accepted. 3-2, 3-3, or 3-4 TH2 (Fixing temperature
tection software operates.) in DIPSW. sensor 2)
F34-2 Fixing temperature is exceed-
ing about 220˚C/428˚F. (Fixing
high temperature trouble de-
tection software operates.)
Fixing low F35-1 Warm-up is not completed TH1 (Fixing temperature
temperature within a certain period from the sensor 1)
trouble start of the warm-up. (Fixing TH2 (Fixing temperature
low temperature trouble detec- sensor 2)
tion software operates.) L2 (Fixing heater lamp 1)
F35-2 After completion of warm-up, L3 (Fixing heater lamp 2)
fixing temperature is lower than L4 (Fixing heater lamp 3)
a prescribed temperature. (Fix- Fixing unit insertion fail-
ing low temperature trouble ure
detection software operates.)
3 - 20
DIAGRAMS

Snapping of F36-1 A prescribed temperature is not Main relay is turned Set "0" to the CB (Control board)
fixing sensor reached within 120 seconds OFF, and all keys are address 3-1, TH1 (Fixing temperature
from the start of warm-up. (Fix- not accepted. 3-2, 3-3, or 3-4 sensor 1)
ing sensor snapping detection in DIPSW. TH2 (Fixing temperature
software operates.) sensor 2)
F36-2 A prescribed temperature is not TH3 (Fixing temperature
reached within 40 seconds from sensor 3)
the start of warm-up. (Fixing Fixing unit insertion failure
sensor snapping detection cir- Lever set failure
cuit operates.)
Lower fixing F37-1 The lower fixing roller
roller temperature exceeded
temperature 200°C/392˚F. (fixing tem-
trouble perature abnormality)
Optics F41-1 Each PS in optics is not turned ON The main body is OFF of main OPMDB (Optics drive mo-
returning within 5 seconds from the start of stopped immediately, switch → ON tor drive board)
trouble optics returning in initial search. main relay is turned Remove PS3 (Shading position)
(PS3 (shading position),PS4 (pa- OFF, and all keys are jammed paper, PS4 (Paper feed restart)
per feed restart),PS5 (optics not accepted. if any. PS5 (Optics return)
return),PS7 (optics timing)) PS7 (Optics timing)
Exposure unit
Carry out 47-031 (optics stop
position automatic correction).
F41-2 Home position sensors are not OPMDB (Optics drive mo-
turned ON when optics stops in tor drive board)
optics returning. (PS5 and PS7) CB brake data
Main body
F41-3 Optics return signal is not turned Carry out 47-031 (optics stop
ON within 120 msec from start position automatic correction).
of brake when optics returning.
Glass open F41-4 PS8 (glass) is OFF. Set original PS8 (Glass)
trouble glass, and OFF Original glass mounting
→ ON of main failure
switch.
CVR trouble F43-1 During copying, FB signal of The main body is OFF of main CB (Control board)
L1 (exposure lamp is ON or is stopped immediately if it switch → ON CVR
snapped) is ON for 20 is in process of copying, Remove L1 (Exposure lamp)
seconds or more. (detected main relay is turned jammed paper, Exposure temperature
by software) OFF, and all keys are if any. fuse
F43-2 When software detects that not accepted.
FB signal of L1 (outputted
when exposure lamp is ON or
is snapped) is not turned ON
even after the lapse of 1
second after the outputting of
L1 lighting signals.
F43-3 FB signal of L1 is ON for 45
seconds in a self-diagnosis
mode and for 30 seconds in all
cases other than the above.
(detected by hardware)
F43-4 FB signal of L1 (outputted
when exposure lamp is ON or
is snapped) is ON for 30
seconds or more during
idling. (detected by software)
3 - 21
DIAGRAMS

Image E46-0 An error was detected during The main unit stops sud- Turn SW1 (Main) DCPS (DC power supply) unit
processing sub-scan beam correction denly while copying is in off and then on Write unit
error APC. progress. The main relay again. Remove IPB (Image Processing Board)
is off and none of the keys any paper jams. E-RDH (Electronic RDH
respond. Processing Board)
E46-2 FIFO error in E-RDH (Electronic IPB (Image Processing Board)
DRH Processing Board) (dur- E-RDH (Electronic RDH
ing compression). Processing Board)
E46-3 FIFO error in E-RDH (Electronic CB (Control Board)
DRH Processing Board) (dur-
ing expansion).
Main body
E46-6 AHA expansion error in E-RDH

(Electronic DRH Processing
Board).
E46-8 INDEXSB (Index Sensor DCPS (DC power supply) unit
Board) error. Write unit
When no change is seen in IPB (Image Processing Board)
INDEXSB output during APC
execution.
E46-11 Insufficient parameter setting IPB (Image Processing Board)
time error. CB (Control Board)
E46-12 Incomplete compression error. IPB (Image Processing Board)
E-RDH (Electronic RDH
Processing Board)
CB (Control Board)
3 - 22
DIAGRAMS

Image E47-1 AGC conclusion is not Only during idling, it Turn the main IPB (Image processing
processing returned from the occurs. M/C stops switch from board)
CPU error imageprocessing . instantaneously. OFF to ON. Bundle
E47-2 A "scan OK" signal is not Occurs only during IPB (Image processing
returned from the CPU in the scanning. M/C stops board)
IPB (image processing instantaneously. M40 (Laser correction
board). motor)
E47-3 The print OK signal is not Occurs only during CB (Control board)
returned from the CPU in the printing. M/C stops
IPB (image processing instantaneously.
board).
E47-4 The page memory acquisition Occurs only during
OK signal is not returned printing. M/C stops
from the CPU in the IPB instantaneously.
(image processing board).
E47-5 "Sub-scanning beam Occurs only during
correction completed" signal idling. M/C stops
is not returned from the CPU instantaneously.
in the IPB (image processing
board).
E47-6 "Printer job OK" signal is not Occurs only during
Main body
returned from the CPU in the printing. M/C stop

IPB (image processing instantaneously.
board).
3 - 23
DIAGRAMS-1
DIAGRAMS
Classifica- Warning Operation in case of warn- Releasing

tion code ing occurrence method
Motor speed F51-1 Speed abnormality in a M35 The main body is Turn the main M35 (Developing screw)
abnormality (developing screw). stopped immediately. switch from CB (Control board)
F51-2 Speed abnormality in the M1 The main relay is turned OFF to ON. M1 (Main)
(main). OFF and All keys are CB (Control board)
F51-3 Speed abnormality in the M10 not accepted. M10 (Toner supply)
(toner supply). CB (Control board)
F51-4 Speed abnormality in the M3 M3 (Developing drive)
(developing drive). CB (Control board)
F51-5 Speed abnormality in the M4 M4 (Drum)
(drum). CB (Control board)
F51-6 Speed abnormality in the M5 M5 (Polygon)
(polygon). PBDB (Polygon drive board)
CB (Control board)
F51-7 Speed abnormality in the M151 During copying, after all M151 (ADU paper feed)
(ADU paper feed). papers fed are exited, the CB (Control board)
main body is stopped, and
All keys are not accepted.
F51-9 Speed abnormality in the M12 The main body is stopped M12 (Optics drive)
Main body
(optics drive). immediately only during OPMDB (Optical drive motor drive board)
shading correction
operation, and All keys
are not accepted.
Fan lock F52-1 Locking abnormality in the After set JOBs are FM16 (Main body cooling fan)
abnormality FM16 (main body cooling fan). completed, the left-
F52-2 Locking abnormality in the FM14 mentioned warnings are FM14 (Conveyance suction fan)
(conveyance suction fan). displayed.
F52-3 Locking abnormality in the FM30 FM30 (Developing suction fan)
(developing suction fan).
F52-4 Locking abnormality in the FM2 FM2 (Optics cooling fan)
(optics cooling fan).
F52-5 Locking abnormality in the FM15 (E-RDH cooling fan)
FM22 (E-RDH cooling fan).
F52-6 Locking abnormality in the FM11 (Polygon cooling fan)
FM11 (polygon cooling fan).
F52-7 Locking abnormality in the Turn the main M152 (ADU fan)
M152 (ADU fan). switch OFF then
F52-8 FM152 (ADU decurler fan 1) ON again. FM152(ADU decurler
abnormal lock (Limit use fan1)
F52-9 FM153 (ADU decurler fan 2) function can FM153(ADU decurler
abnormal lock work.) fan2)
ADF E60-1 Serial I/O error. The main body and the Turn the main CB (control board)
ab- E60-2 ADF initialization error. ADF are stopped imme- switch from ADF CB (ADF control board)
normality E60-3 Time out error. diately. The main relay OFF to ON.
E60-4 ADF communication error. is turned OFF and All If there is a
E60-5 Communication recovery failure. keys are not accepted. jamming paper,
E60-6 Multiple communication recovery. remove it.
ADF
E60-7 Error due to serial I/O during

communication recovery.
E67 PS309 (up/down) does not go The ADF is stopped ADF CB (ADF control
ON within the specified period immediately. With board)
after M304 (push pressure) regard to the main body, M304 (push pressure up/
goes ON. after completing copying down)
in working, the main
relay is turned OFF.
3 - 24
DIAGRAMS
Classifica- Warning Operation in case of warn- Releasing

tion code ing occurrence method
Finisher E70 Communication abnormality The main body is Set the main FNS DB (FNS drive board)
abnormality stopped immediately switch to ON/ Connector
M2 (roller E77-1 <When copying> and the main relay is OFF. M2 (roller shift), PS18
shift ) After the roller starts transfer- turned OFF, rejecting Remove any (roller shift HP)
abnomality ring, it does not reach the shift any key input. jammed paper.
position. (PS18(roller shift HP)
is not turned ON).
After the roller starts returning,
PS18(roller shift HP) is not
turned ON.
<When the power is ON/When
the door opens or closes>
After M2 starts operating, PS18
(roller shift HP) is not turned
ON. M3 (tray UP/DOWN), PS2
M3 (tray UP/ E77-2 After M3 (tray UP/DOWN) starts (tray upper limit), PS7 (sta-
DOWN) moving, PS2 (tray upper limit) pled paper exit upper limit)
abnomality or PS7 (stapled paper exit up-
per limit) is not turned ON.
M5 (register E77-3 After M5 (register plate) starts M5 (register plate), PS8
operating, PS8 (register plate
Finisher
plate) (register plate HP)

abnomality HP) is not turned OFF within a
certain period, or it is not turned
ON after its OFF.
M7 (paper E77-4 After M7(paper exit roller) starts M7 (paper exit roller), PS9
exit roller) moving, PS9 (paper exit belt (paper exit belt HP)
abnomality HP) is not turned ON. (only in
staple mode).
M8 (paper E77-5 After M8 (paper exit) starts M8 (Paper exit) , PS12 (pa-
exit) moving, opening/closing action per exit)
abnomality does not stop within a certain
period. (PS12 (paper exit) is
not tuned ON or OFF).
M11 (stapler E77-6 After M11 (stapler) starts oper- M11 (stapler), PS11 (sta-
transfer) ating, PS11 (stapler transfer pler transfer HP)
abnormality HP) is not turned OFF. Or it is
not turned ON after its OFF.
Stapler unit E77-11 The staple HP does not go ON Stapler (front) motor M10
abnormality within the specified period after and sensor PS17
E77-12 the staple motor starts, and Stapler (rear) motor M9
even if the motor is rotated in and sensor PS15
reverse the staple HP does not
go ON.
F56-2 Main body operation panel Full auto screen appears Turn SW1 OB1 (operation board 1)
communication error. (main ) OFF CB (control board)
F98-76 Sub-scanning beam –– then ON again. IPB (image processing
Main body
misalignment correction error. board)

ADB (A/D board)
In the case that [Front Door Open] message can’t be canceled, please check power source, a short circuit in motors and a
grounding of wirings.
3 - 25
DIAGRAMS
3 - 26
DIAGRAMS
3 - 27
DIAGRAMS
LIST OF UNPLUGGED CONNECTOR SYMPTOMS (REF. ONLY)

When each abnormality occurs, there is a possibility that the following connectors are unplugged. When an objective connector is
connected normally, conduct trouble shooting in accordance with a jam code list.
[1] Paper Jamming
Code Jam No. Number of unplugged connector
J10 5 CN53, CN233 (paper feeding), CN120 (control board)

J11 1 CN38, CN79, CN122, CN230 (paper feeding), CN120 (control board)
J12 2 CN25, CN38, CN79, CN123, CN231 (paper feeding), CN120 (control board)
J13 3 CN720, CN721 (LCT vertical conveyance), CN120 (control board)
J14 4 CN709, CN712, CN713, CN714, CN716 (LCT horizontal conveyance), CN120 (control board)
– 6 CN42 (control board)
J19 7 CN727, CN730 (LCT horizontal conveyance)
J21 – CN324, CN325 (drum)
J30 8 CN32 (2nd paper feeding)
J31 9 CN42 (control board), CN46, CN86 (2nd paper feeding)
J32 10 CN6 (control board), CN40 (fixing), CN392 (fixing drawer)
J92 11 CN531,CN550, CN551, CN552, CN555 (ADU), CN505 (ADU drawer)
– 12 CN531, CN532, CN534, CN557, CN558, CN559, CN562 (ADU), CN505 (ADU drawer)
3 - 28
DIAGRAMS
[2] Trouble Codes

Code Number of unplugged connector
F18-1 CN1, CN2 (control board), CN23 (in paper feed unit)
F18-2 CN1, CN7 (control board), CN24 (in paper feed unit)
F18-3 CN120 (control board), CN732 (at bottom of rear face), CN122 (at right side of control board at rear face)
F18-4 CN120 (control board), CN731 (at bottom of rear face), CN122 (at right side of control board at rear face)
F18-5 CN140 (control board), CN126 (at bottom of rear face)
F22-1 CN30 (control board), CN63 (upper left of rear face)
F22-2 CN30 (control board), CN42 (lower left of rear face), CN39 (transfer & separation corona unit at front face)
F28-1 Does not occur due to connector dropout.
F35 Faulty contact in CN6 (control board), CN98 (at top right of rear face), CN392 (fixing drawer), etc.
F36 CN81 (at bottom right of rear face), CN382 (DC power supply at paper exit face), Main relay faston
F41-1 CN223 (control board), CN224 (optics drive board)
F41-4 CN9 (control board), CN142 (optics at rear face)
F43-2 CN29 (bottom right of rear face), CN80 (bottom right of rear face), CN85 (bottom right of rear face)
E47 CN401 (DC power supply at paper exit face), CN430 (image processing board), CN481 (control board), CN425
(image processing board)
E48 CN424, CN423, CN421, CN422 (image processing board)
E49-1 CN411 (A/D board), CN420 (image processing board)
E49-2 CN421 (image processing board), CN440 (write)
F51-1 CN161 (top right of rear face)
F51-2 CN123 (at right side of control board at rear face), CN204 (main motor), CN205 (main motor)
F51-3 CN14 (toner hopper)
F51-4 CN88 (DC power supply at paper exit face), CN217 (developing motor)
F51-5 CN30 (control board), CN124 (bottom right of rear face), CN125 (top right of rear face), CN201 (drum motor)
F51-6 CN95 (write), CN322 (control board), CN326 (top left of rear face)
F51-7 CN122 (at right side of control board at rear face conveyance)
F51-8 CN203 (LCT motor), CN204 (LCT motor)
F51-9 CN400 (DC power supply at paper exit face), CN226, CN224, CN228 (optics drive board)
F52-1 CN16 (at top right of rear face)
F52-2 CN15 (center of rear face)
F52-3 CN11 (top left of rear face)
F52-4 CN97 (rear optics unit), CN128 (at right side of control board at rear face)
F52-5 CN127 (at right side of control board at rear face), CN49 (top of paper exit face)
F52-6 CN99 (DC power supply at paper exit face), CN48 (top left of rear face), CN121 (at right side of control board at rear
face)
F52-7 CN94 (top right of rear face)
F52-8,9 CN522, CN523, CN524, CN525, CN526 (ADU unit)
F56 CN3 (control board), CN219 (at operation panel)
3 - 29
DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAMS-1
[3] Others
Classification Phenomenon Number of unplugged connector
Power supply Power not supplied CN4 (control board), CN8 (DC power supply at paper exit face), CN60
abnormality (control board), CN390 (bottom right of rear face), CN397 (DC power
supply at bottom of rear face), CN398 (DC power supply at bottom of
paper exit side)
Warm-up not completed CN223, CN224, CN226 (optics drive board), CN400 (DC power supply at
bottom of paper exit face), CN6 (control board), CN82 (center of front
external)
Lamp abnor- Exposure lamp does not light. CN81 (bottom right of rear face), Main relay faston CN380 (CVR at
mality bottom right of rear face), CN385 (CVR at bottom right of rear face),
CN384 (center of front external, Temperature fuse blown (optics unit)
Upper/lower fixing lamp does not CN81 (bottom right of rear face), Main relay faston CN380 (CVR at
light. bottom right of rear face), Fixing interlock faston (center of front external),
CN382 (DC power supply at bottom of paper exit face)
Paper feed tray Upper/lower stage tray continues CN25 (paper feed unit), CN79 (paper feed unit), CN58 (paper feed unit),
abnormality to rise. CN59 (paper feed unit)
LCT-1000 or CLT-1500 tray CN709 (bottom right drawer at rear face), CN711 (horizontal conveyance
continues to rise. section), CN724 (vertical conveyance section)
Recognition Finisher is not recognized. CN114 (control board), CN28 (DC power supply at bottom of paper exit
abnormality side), CN101 (external at rear face)
ADF is not recognized. CN106 (control board), CN28 (DC power supply at bottom of paper exit side)
Upper/lower paper feed tray is not CN56 (center of rear face), CN60 (control board)
recognized.
LCT-1000 or LCT-1500 tray is not CN120 (control board), CN733 (bottom left of rear face), CN734 (bottom
recognized. right of rear face)
Large capacity tray is not recog- CN140 (control board), CN127 (bottom left of rear face)
nized.
Image abnor- Image is faint. CN217 (top left of rear face)
mality Blank paper CN62 (control board)
Slightly soiled blank paper CN84 (high voltage power supply on rear face/1)
Very faint image CN85 (Rear face of main body)
Entirely black CN380 (CVR at rear face), CN385 (CVR at rear face), CN400 (DC power
supply on paper exit side), CN410/411 (A/D board), CN420 (IP Board)
Operation panel LED does not light. CN223 (top of paper feed side), CN215, CN214, CN210, CN217, CN220
(in operation panel)
LCD backlight does not light. CN77 (operation panel), CN71 (operation panel), CN215 (operation
panel), CN223 (top of paper feed side)
Alarm indicator Close top of right side panel. CN7 (control board), CN52 (paper feed unit)
Close bottom of right side panel. CN83 (control panel), CN722 (at bottom of paper feed side)
Close left side panel. CN57 (control board), CN530 (top right of rear face), CN561 (inside ADU
guide unit)
Set ADU. CN57 (control board)
Insert developing unit connectors. CN50 (drum unit drawer), CN51 (in drum unit), CN5 (control board),
CN63 (center of rear face)
Insert key counter. CN39 (control board)
Close front door. CN831 (interlock switch at center of front external), CN395 (DC power
supply at bottom of paper exit face), CN396 (DC power supply at bottom
of paper exit face)
Supply toner (despite the fact that CN17 (in toner hopper), CN12 (at side of paper feed unit), CN14 (in toner
there is sufficient toner). hopper)
3 - 30
TIMING CHART (A4/81/2" × 11", LIFE SIZE, TWO COPIES, UPPER PAPER FEED)
Time (sec)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5
Item
M1 Main motor 130mS
M4 Drum motor
250mS
350mS
M3 Developing drive motor
500mS
F
M12 Optics drive motor
R
M35 Developing screw motor
M5 Polygon motor
M140 Paper feed motor

405mS
SD1 1st paper feed SD
MC5 Paper feed MC
MC8 Conveyance MC
135mS 590mS 590mS
MC3 2nd paper feed MC
L1 Exposure lamp
700mS
PCL PCL
260mS 260mS
PSL PSL
290mS 290mS
550mS
HV1 Charging
260mS 260mS
HV2 Transfer
370mS 370mS
210mS 210mS
HV2 Separation
Developing bias 130mS
HV1 Guide plate
MC10 Cleaner MC 975mS
LOOP LOOP
PS14 Regist. PS
975mS
PS25 Paper exit PS
C (T) Total counter
PS20 Pre W try PS MAX1800mS MAX1800mS
M10 Toner supply motor
PS18 No feed PS
570mS
Print V-Vaild
570mS
PS30 By-pass PS
570mS
Scanner V=Valid
PS5 Optics timing PS
PS7 Paper feed restart PS
PS4 1000mS 1000mS 1000mS

1000mS 1000mS 1000mS
TDS L detecting check
Copy ON
3 - 54
ADU TIMING CHART (A4/81/2" × 11", TWO ORIGINALS, TWO SHEETS SET)
Time (sec) (sec)

Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5
Item
SD152 ADU gate SD
M152 ADU fan motor
M151 ADU paper feed motor

200mS 200mS
CL151 ADU paper feed CL
CL152 ADU reversal CL
CL153 ADU timing CL
PS25 Paper exit PS When PS14 (registration) is turned ON by

570mS 570mS the final sheet of copy paper.
1070mS
PS152 ADU paper feed PS
PS153 ADU reversal detection PS
PS154 ADU paper exit PS1
PS18 No feed
PS19 Optics sync. PS
FM153 ADU cooling fan 1
FM154 ADU cooling fan 2
Copy ON
3 - 55
CONTENTS-1
CONTENTS
4. ADJUSTMENT 47 MODE .................................................................. 4-55

HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION .......... 4-1 [1] 47 /Multi Mode Setting Method ...................... 4-55
[1]Structure ........................................................... 4-1 [2] Initial Setting ................................................ 4-57
ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS .......... 4-1 [3] Adjustment Mode List .................................. 4-57
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT WITH P FUNCTION . 4-3 [4] L Detection Adjustment ................................ 4-57
[1] Setting Method of P Function .......................... 4-3 [5] Dmax Initial Setting ...................................... 4-58
[2] Checking the Total Count ................................ 4-3 [6] Optics Stop Position Automatic Correction .. 4-58
[3] Checking the PM Count/Starting Date ............. 4-3 [7] Input Check List ........................................... 4-59
[4] Checking the drum count ................................. 4-3 [8] Output Check List ........................................ 4-61
[5] Checking the developing count ........................ 4-3 OTHER ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 4-65
[6] Checking the density shift (text/photo) ............. 4-3 [1] Adjustment for Centering error ..................... 4-65
[7] Checking the density shift (text) ....................... 4-4 [2] 400% Leading Edge Timing and Black
[8] Checking the density shift (photo) ................... 4-4 Line Check ................................................... 4-68
[9] Checking the density shift (INCREASE CONTRAST) ....... 4-4
[10] Printing user data ........................................... 4-4
25 MODE .................................................................... 4-5
[1] Setting Method ................................................. 4-5
[2] Setting Software DIP SW ................................. 4-5
[3] Setting Tray Size ........................................... 4-12
[4] PM Count Reset ............................................ 4-13
[5] Setting PM Cycle ........................................... 4-13
[6] Data Collection .............................................. 4-14
[7] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced ............ 4-20
[8] Setting Key Operator Password .................... 4-22
[9] Setting EKC Master Key Code ...................... 4-23
[10] Setting Weekly Timer Master Key Code ..... 4-24
[11] Specifying Phone Number of Service Center 4-25
[12] Setting and Displaying Serial Number ......... 4-26
[13] Displaying ROM Version .............................. 4-27
[14] 25 Mode Adjust Item List ............................. 4-28
36 MODE .................................................................. 4-29
[1] Setting Method ............................................... 4-29
[2] Charging Corona Current Adjustment .......... 4-29
[3] Transfer Current Adjustment ........................ 4-29
[4] Separation (AC) Current Adjustment ........... 4-29
[5] Separation (DC) Current Adjustment ........... 4-29
[6] Developing Bias Adjustment ........................ 4-29
[7] Charging Grid Voltage Adjustment .............. 4-30
[8] Drum clock / Horizontal Adjustment ............. 4-31
[9] Restart Timing Adjustment ........................... 4-33
[10] Paper Feed Loop Adjustment ...................... 4-34
[11] Leading Edge Original Erasure Adjustment . 4-35
[12] Optics Brake Adjustment ............................. 4-35
[13] Centering Adjustment .................................. 4-36
[14] Laser Adjustment ......................................... 4-38
[15] RADF Original Stop Position Adjustment ..... 4-40
[16] Resetting Standard Data .............................. 4-41
[17] Running Test Mode ...................................... 4-41
[18] Test Pattern Output ...................................... 4-42
[19] Test Pattern Density Setting ........................ 4-53
[20] Service data Output ..................................... 4-53
ADJUSTMENT
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENTS WHEN

ADJUSTMENT SECTION REPLACING PARTS
[1] Structure Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not only re-
This section details adjusting items and procedures. Use this quired when a defective copy image occurs, but also after re-
section for making adjustments and as a checklist before im- placing or reinstalling certain parts.
plementing corrective measures in the field.
[How to Use the Tables]
1. Does the power supply meet the requirements? The following items are used in the tables throughout this sec-
2. Is the power supply properly grounded? tion.
3. Is the machine sharing its power source with another high
current consumption machine that draws large currents 1. Mode
intermittently? (e.g. an elevator, air conditioner, or other Indicates the adjustment mode.
source of electrical consumption) [“47”] : 47 mode
4. Is the installation environment suitable? [“25”] : 25 mode
5. Does the cause of a defective image lie in the original it- [“36”] : 36 mode
self? [–] : Normal mode
6. Is the density adjusting control at the proper position?
7. Are the platen glass and platen cover clean? 2. Codes
8. Is the correct paper being used for the copy? Indicates the applicable code and/or Copy Quantity key for
9. Are the copying materials and parts replaced when they each mode.
reach the end of their usable life? (developer, drum, clean-
ing blade, etc.) 3. Page
10. Is there toner in the machine? Indicates the page to refer to in the Adjustment section.
The following items should also be observed when repairing 4. Conditions

the machine. New: Indicates adjustment (including check) is required
when replacing a new part.
1. Only one side of the AC power line is disconnected when Reset:Indicates adjustment (including check) is re
the main switch of this machine is turned off. Always un- quired when a part has been re-installed.
plug the machine before beginning work. If absolutely nec-
essary to work with the power on, exercise care to avoid
5. Symbols used in the tables
being caught in the scanning rear of the exposure unit.
1 2 ················· Indicates there is a priority sequence
2. Special care should be taken when handling the fixing unit
for adjustments (including checks)and
since it operates at extremely high temperatures.
settings.
3. The developing unit is surrounded by a strong magnetic
(Empty circle): Indicates adjustments (including
field. Keep watches and metering equipment away from it.
checks) and settings that can be car
4. Avoid scarring the drum with tools or similar objects.
ried out independently.
5. Do not touch IC pins with your bare hands.
4-1
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Laser adjustment (gradation adjustment/sub pitch offset adjustment)

Adjustment and setting item
Vertical magnification adjustment (scanner system)

Vertical magnification adjustment (printer system)
Restart timing adjustment (printer system)
Restart timing adjustment (copier system)
RADF original stop position adjustment

Leading edge blank margin adjustment
Horizontal magnification adjustment

Charging Grid Voltage Adjustment
Paper feed loop size adjustment

L Detection Adjustment
Centering adjustment
Drum count reset
Tray size setting
PM cycle set
Mode 36 47 36 36 36 36 36 36 25 47 25 36 36 36 36
Code 1 095 2-2 2-2 2-4 2-1 2-1 2-3 2 91 3 2-1 2-6 2-7 2-8
Page 4-30 4-57 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-31 4-32 4-34 4-12 4-63 4-13 4-32 4-36 4-38 4-40
No. Part Name Condition
1 Drum New 2 1 3
2 Developer New 1 2
3 Charging control plate New
4 High voltage unit 1 New

New
5 Writing unit Reinstall
6 Memory IC New
7 Change of paper size for tray 2.3and4 —
• New means replace with a new part and Reinstall means to reinstall the part.
• The circles will have a number when there is an adjustment priority.
Cautions
1. When replacing the control PCB, replace the memory IC with the one used before replacement of the PCB.
2. When replacing the memory IC, replace the developer before performing the L detection adjustment.
4-2
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT WITH P FUNCTION

P function enables to display the following parameters with [3] Checking the Total Count
the P button.
Step Operation (Indication) Entry Terminal
1 Press 1 from the copy quantity Copy quantity
0. Checking the Printer Count setting button. setting button
1. Checking the Total Count 2 Press the START PRINT button. START PRINT
2. Checking the PM Count button
3. Checking the Drum Count 3 Check the total count displayed in Operation panel
4. Checking the developing count the message area.
5. Checking the density shift (text/photo)
6. Checking the density shift (text)
7. Checking the density shift (photo) [4] Checking the PM Count/Starting Date
8. Checking the density shift (Increase contrast)
9. Printing user data Step Operation (Indication) Entry Terminal
setting button. setting button
This section explains the various functions which is exclusive
2 Press the START PRINT button. START PRINT
for the serviceman.
button
3 Check the PM count displayed in Operation panel
[1] Setting Method of P Function the message area.
a. Turn ON the Main switch.
b. Press P button.
c. P Mode Screen will appear.
[5] Checking the Drum Count
P-mode :
Select No. (1-3) using key pad Step Operation (Indication) Entry Terminal
button
3 Check the drum count displayed Operation panel
in the message area.
[6] Checking the Developing Count

d. Use the copy quantity setting button to enter the de- 2 Press the START PRINT button. START PRINT
sired number, following the message on the operation button
panel. 3 Check the developing count Operation panel
e. Press PRINT to confirm the various data displayed in displayed in the message area.
the message area.
f. Press Stop/Clear button.
g. Turn OFF the main switch.
[7] Checking the Density Shift (text/photo)
[2] Checking the Printer Count
Step Operation (Indication) Entry Terminal setting button. setting button
1 Press 0 from the copy quantity Copy quantity 2 Press the START PRINT button. PRINT START
setting button. setting button button
2 Press the START PRINT button. START PRINT button 3 Check the Setting displayed Operation panel
3 Check the printer count (IP output Operation panel in the message area.
only) displayed in the message area.
4-3
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
[8] Checking the Density Shift (text) Referrence: Each copy count data number describe papersize
as follows.
setting button. setting button No. Japan Europe USA
2 Press the START PRINT button. START PRINT 001 — — —
button 002 A3 A3 11" × 17"
3 Check the setting displayed Operation panel 003 B4 B4 81/2" × 14"
in the message area. 004 A4 A4 81/2" × 11"
005 B5 B5 51/2" × 81/2"
006 A5 A5 —
[9] Checking the Density Shift (photo) 007 B6 F4 —
008 81/2" × 14" — —
Step Operation (Indication) Entry Terminal 009 81/2" × 11" — —
010 special special special
2 Press the START PRINT button. START PRINTT
button
3 Check the setting displayed Operation panel
[10] Checking the Density Shift

(INCREASE CONTRAST)
3 Check the setting displayed Operation panel
[11] Printing User Data

button
3 Enter the EKC master key code. Operation panel
button
5 Select the number (1 to 3) that Operation panel
you wish to output. *1
button
The user data starts to be output. button
*1: The selection items are as follows.

1 Copy count for each password (256 items)
2 Limit quantity for each password (256 items)
3 Copy count for each size (10 items)
4-4
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
[1] Setting Method [2] Setting Software DIP SW
A special operating mode called "25 Mode" has been provided 1. Setting method
with this machine. This mode enables to rewriting the non- This setting specifies the software DIP switch. (*1)
volatile storage and specify other various settings.
[SOFTWARE SW SETTING SCREEN]
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Turn the main switch back on while holding down 2 and 5
of the copy quantity setting buttons.
25 Mode Screen will appear.
This is the 25 mode where the normal copy operation be-
comes unavailable.
[25 MODE MENU SCREEN]
Step Operation
1 Enter the 25 mode.
2 [25 MODE SCREEN]
Press 1 Software DIP SW Setting.
3 [SOFTWARE SW SETTING SCREEN]
Select DIP switch number.
Use the left key.
4 Select bit number of the switch.
Use the middle key.
3. Press the desired number button.
5 Select ON(=1) or OFF(=0) of switch.
Each setting screen will appear.
Use ON or OFF key.
4. Enter data in each selected screen.
ON : Set bit.
5. Press the Previous Screen button to check the data that OFF : Clear bit.
has been entered. 6 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end setting.
6. Turn the main switch off to cancel the 25 mode.
7. New data will be effective after restarted.
4-5
ADJUSTMENT
Software DIP SW Setting
*1:
• The bit of the switch is written in the non-volatile RAM
every time it is changed.
• The numbers shown in the message area are defined as
follows:
Software Switch set mode

4 - 7 : 1 F3
8-bit switch value is indicated in

hexadecimal from 00 to FF.
Bit Data
1: ON
0: OFF
Bit Number(0~7)
Switch Number
For each switch function, refer to "List of Software SW".
4-6
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
<Software Switch List> : The boxes with thick lines indicate factory settings.
DIPSW No. Bit Function 0 1

0 Operation when key counter is removed Ignore Instantaneous
stop jam
1 A3 (11" × 17") count method 1 count 2 count
2 Finisher number of stapled sheets upper limit stop select Immediate stop Stop at an interval
of copy set
DIPSW 1 3 Finisher number of stapled sheets upper limit select *1 *1
4 ″ *1 *1
5 Finisher sensor failure sensing *2 *2
6 ″ *2 *2
7 F/E select (all other than fixing unit F can be replaced with E) No Yes
0 Finisher sub-tray select for production *3 *3
1 ″ *3 *3
2 Jam code number displayed on jam screen No Yes
DIPSW 2 3 Auto Charge electrode cleaning Yes No
4 Auto Transfer/Separation electrode cleaning Yes No
5 Finisher over-stacking sensing Sense Ignore
6 25, 36, 47 mode password request. Password: 9272 (fixed) No request Request
7 Select A-series papers only (for Europe) No Yes
0 –
1 F34 Reset No Trouble
DIPSW 3 3 F36 Reset No Trouble
5 Operation when a key counter is removed (when using as a printer) Ignore Same ascopier
6 Confirmation message when the Clear button is on Display No display
7 –
0 Toner level sensing (replenish toner message) *5 *5
1 ″ *5 *5
2 Destination select *6 *6
DIPSW 4 3 ″ *6 *6
4 Display jam code in jam screen No Yes
5 Reserve memory at job start No Yes
6 Polygon motor slow-speed timing *7 *7
7 ″ *7 *7
0 F4 size setting *8 *8
1 ″ *8 *8
2 Select paper line (Vertical line/Horizontal line) All horizontal. Horizontal for
A4/B5/by-pass feed.
DIPSW 5 3 Polygon motor slow-speed select (when idling) *9 *9
4 ″ *9 *9
5 ″ *9 *9
6 Original leading edge timing (amount of RADF leading edge erasure) * 10 * 10
7 ″ * 10 * 10
4-7
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT

0 Separation claw on timing * 11 * 11
1 ″ * 11 * 11
2 ″ * 11 * 11
DIPSW 6 3 ″ * 11 * 11
4 Separation claw off timing * 11 * 11
5 ″ * 11 * 11
6 ″ * 11 * 11
7 ″ * 11 * 11
0 Toner replenish stop function No Yes
1 Toner replenish stop mode When copying Interval between
ends copy set
2 Number of copies available after toner replenishment message * 19 * 19
DIPSW 7 3 ″ * 19 * 19
4 Size selection with platen APS small-size originals * 21 * 21
5 ″ * 21 * 21
6 LCD contrast adjustment (displayed on the Help screen) No Yes
7 Full auto screen setting Yes No
0 Selects Auto Non-image Area Erasure (copying small originals with Rectangle erasure Slanted original
RADF open) compensation
1 Prohibition for fixed mag. ratio setting Enable Disable
2 Prevents copying upon PM arrival No Yes
DIPSW 8 3 81/2" × 11"R APS (Japan only) Not allowed Allowed/
4 Preferential tray select upon APS cancel * 12 * 12
5 ″ * 12 * 12
6 ″ * 12 * 12
7 For data collection (25 mode) No Yes
0 Number of copies limit * 13 * 13
1 ″ * 13 * 13
2 ″ * 13 * 13
DIPSW 9 3 ″ * 13 * 13
4 Normal/Fine select * 14 * 14
5 ″ * 14 * 14
6 Japanese P81 MSG (MSG for Grocery store use)
7 ″
0 Sets the WT daylight saving time * 16 * 16
1 ″ * 16 * 16
2 ″ * 16 * 16
DIPSW 10 3 ″ * 16 * 16
4 Switches the [-A-] display -A- 1.00
5 Message on setting screen Guidance display Machine status display.
6 Displays icons on the third line No Yes
7 – Must not be changed. Must not be used.
4-8
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT

0 Tray screen OK key display Yes No
1 Magnification screen OK key display Yes No
2 Density screen OK key display Yes No
DIPSW 11 3 Copy mode OK key display Yes No
4 Select time without OK Short Long
5 New operation screen select (for direct selection menu screen) No Yes
6 Tray icon display (for direct selection menu screen) No Yes
7
0 Sets number of print start for 24-hour processing * 20 * 20
1 ″ * 20 * 20
2
DIPSW 12 3 Sets number of copies for copy disable (upon PM arrival.) * 18 * 18
4 ″ * 18 * 18
5 ″ * 18 * 18
6
7 Finish screen closing method select by pressing Auto
folder key
0 Isolates Tray 1 as provisional measure Normal Unusable
DIPSW 13 3 Isolates Tray 4 as provisional measure Normal Unusable
5 Isolates ADU as provisional measure Normal Unusable
6
7
0 Finish screen rotation selection enable/disable No Yes
1 Exit to Subtray in non-sort No Yes
2 Variable magnification APS disable No Yes
DIPSW 14 3
4
5
6
7
0 Change tray search sequence * 22 * 22
1 ″ * 22 * 22
2 ″ * 22 * 22
DIPSW 15 3
4
5
6
7
4-9
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
* 1: Finisher number of stapled sheets upper limit select * 9: Polygon motor low-speed select (when idling)
Mode 1-4 1-3 Mode 5-5 5-4 5-3
50 sheets 0 0 No preliminary rotation 0 0 0
45 sheets 0 1 Preliminary rotation 14,000rpm 0 0 1
Stop 1 0 0
* 2: Finisher sensor failure sensing.
Mode 1-6 1-5 * 10: Original leading edge timing (amount of ADF leading edge
Lower limit sensor sensing 0 0 erasure)
Lower limit sensor sensing 0 1 Mode 5-7 5-6
Abnormal drop sensing 2 mm 0 0
Upper limit sensing 3 mm 0 1
Lower limit sensor sensing 1 0 4 mm 1 0
Abnormal drop sensing 5 mm 1 1
Upper limit sensing
Number of copies overrun sensing * 11: Separator claw ON setting
Caution: Separator jams occur in some cases when the set-
* 3: Finisher sub-tray select. ting is changed.
Mode 2-1 2-0 Mode 6-3 6-2 6-1 6-0
Does not 0 0 0 mm 0 0 0 0
Sub-tray (Exits sheets face down) 0 1 5 mm 0 0 0 1
Sub-tray (Exits sheets face up) 1 0 10 mm 0 0 1 0
15 mm 0 0 1 1
* 5: Toner level sensing (toner replenish display) 20 mm 0 1 0 0
Caution: When making large volumes of copies, density may 25 mm 0 1 0 1
lower in some cases when the set value is increased. 30 mm 0 1 1 0
35 mm 0 1 1 1
Mode 4-1 4-0 40 mm 1 0 0 0
After 100 copies 0 0 45 mm 1 0 0 1
After 1000 copies 0 1 50 mm 1 0 1 0
After 2000 copies 1 0 55 mm 1 0 1 1
After 3000 copies 1 1 60 mm 1 1 0 0
65 mm 1 1 0 1
* 6: Destination select 70 mm 1 1 1 0
Mode 4-3 4-2 75 mm 1 1 1 1
Japan 0 0 * 11: Separator claw OFF setting
USA 0 1 Caution: Separator jams occur in some cases when the set-
Europe/others 1 0 ting is changed.
Mode 6-7 6-6 6-5 6-4
* 7: Polygon motor low-speed timing 50 mm 0 0 0 0
Mode 4-7 4-6 55 mm 0 0 0 1
15 sec. after job end 0 0 60 mm 0 0 1 0
80 mm 0 1 1 0
* 8: F4 size setting 85 mm 0 1 1 1
Mode 5-1 5-0 90 mm 1 0 0 0
81/2" × 13" 0 0 95 mm 1 0 0 1
81/4" × 13" 0 1 100 mm 1 0 1 0
81/8" × 131/4" 1 0 105 mm 1 0 1 1
8" × 13" 1 1 110 mm 1 1 0 0
115 mm 1 1 0 1
120 mm 1 1 1 0
125 mm 1 1 1 1
4 - 10
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
* 12: Preferential tray select upon APS cancel. * 18: Sets number of copies for copy disable upon PM arrival.
Mode 8-6 8-5 8-4 Mode 12-5 12-4 12-3
No priority 0 0 0 1000 copies 0 0 0
Tray 1 0 0 1 2000 copies 0 0 1
Tray 2 0 1 0 3000 copies 0 1 0
Tray 3 0 1 1 4000 copies 0 1 1
Tray 4 1 0 0 5000 copies 1 0 0
Tray 5 1 0 1
* 19: Number of copies available after toner replenishment
* 13: Number of copies limit Mode 7-3 7-2
Mode 9-3 9-2 9-1 9-0 After 100 copies 0 0
No 0 0 0 0 After 1000 copies 0 1
1 copy 0 0 0 1 After 2000 copies 1 0
3 copy 0 0 1 0 After 3000 copies 1 0
5 copy 0 0 1 1
9 copy 0 1 0 0 * 20: Sets number of print start for 24-hour processing
10 copy 0 1 0 1 Mode 12-1 12-0
20 copy 0 1 1 0 2000 times 0 0
30 copy 0 1 1 1 4000 times 0 1
50 copy 1 0 0 0 3000 times 1 0
99 copy 1 0 0 1 5000 times 1 1
* 14: Normal/fine select
* 21: Size selection with platen APS small-size originals.
Caution: 4ED select tends to cause memory overflow. Also,
selection of many functions such as rotation, etc.,
will not be possible. (ED= Error Diffusion) Destination Size selection 7-5 7-4
B5R 0
Mode 9-5 9-4 Japan Invalid
B6R 1
Normal 1ED/Fine 2ED 0 0
0 0
Normal 1ED/Fine 4ED 0 1 81/2" × 11"R
USA 1 0
Normal 2ED/Fine 4ED 1 0
51/2" × 81/2"R 0 1
81/2" × 11" 1 1
* 16: Set the WT daylight saving time
B5R 0
Mode 10-3 10-2 10-1 10-0 Europe/others Invalid
A5R 1
0 min. 0 0 0 0
10 min. 0 0 0 1 * 22: Change tray search sequence.
20 min. 0 0 1 0
Mode 15-2 15-1 15-0
30 min. 0 0 1 1
Search sequence
40 min. 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
by destination
50 min. 0 1 0 1
Search from tray 1 0 0 1
60 min. 0 1 1 0
70 min. 0 1 1 1
80 min. 1 0 0 0
90 min. 1 0 0 1
100 min. 1 0 1 0
110 min. 1 0 1 1 Search sequence by destination
120 min. 1 1 0 0 Japan : tray 1
130 min. 1 1 0 1 USA : tray 2
140 min. 1 1 1 0 Europe/other : tray 3
150 min. 1 1 1 1
4 - 11
ADJUSTMENT
[3] Setting Tray Size Step Operation

This function stores the paper size in the memory of the main 1 Enter the 25 mode.
machine if it has been changed . 2 [25 MODE SCREEN]
Press 2 Tray Size Setting.
3 [TRAY SIZE SETTING SCREEN]
[TRAY SIZE SETTING SCREEN]
Press the tray button to be changed.
a. When you do not use any optional tray:
4 Press or button to select the paper size.
Paper size setting mode 5 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN button to end setting.
Reference:
• Tray number is from 1 to 4. For the tray 2, 3, and 4,
only service personnel can perform setting.
• Availability of paper size depends on the selected tray.
The unavailable paper size will be skipped and not dis-
played.
• New data on tray size will be written in non-volatile RAM
every time it is changed in this screen.
• The following table shows the paper sizes that can be
used in the tray 3.
Japan A4, B5, 81/2 "× 11"
Europe A4, B5, 81/2 " × 11"
U.S.A. 81/2 " × 11", A4, B5
• The following table shows the paper sizes that can be
b. When you use an optional tray, large capacity tray; used in the tray 4.
Japan A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 81/2 " × 11", 81/2 " × 11"R
Paper size setting mode
Europe A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 81/2 " × 11", 81/2 " × 11"R
U.S.A. 81/2 " × 11", 81/2 " × 11"R, A4, B5, A4R, B5R
Caution:
• For the tray 1 and bypass feed tray, any setting cannot
be performed in the non-volatile RAM.
Tray 1 can read the guide plate position using a sen-
sor.
• The screen is automatically changed from the optional
tray according to the type of trays.
4 - 12
ADJUSTMENT
[4] PM Count Reset [5] Setting PM Cycle

Care should be taken to reset PM count properly. This function sets the PM cycle.
1. Screen selection 1. Screen selection

Select 3 PM count in the 25 Mode Screen to display PM Select 3 PM count in the 25 Mode Screen to display PM
Count/Cycle Screen as an initial screen. Count/Cycle Screen as an initial screen.
[PM COUNT/CYCLE SCREEN] [PM Count/Cycle Screen]
PM count/cycle PM count/cycle
PM/CYCLE 1562/15000 START:12/06/97 PM/CYCLE 1562/15000 :
START:12/06/97
Select 1 PM Count Reset to display PM Count Reset Select 2 PM Cycle Set to display PM Cycle Setting
Screen. Screen.
2. PM count reset 2. Setting method

Select whether to reset the count in the PM Count Reset Enter PM cycle in the PM Cycle Setting Screen.
Screen.
[PM Cycle Setting Screen]
[PM Count Reset Screen]
PM cycle set mode
150000 => 150000
PM count reset? YES / NO ?
(1) On the second row of the message area, the current PM

(1) Select Yes in the PM Count Reset Screen to move to cycle value (on the left side) and the newly entered value
PM Count Start Date Entry Screen. (on the right side) are displayed.
(2) Select No or PREVIOUS SCREEN key to return to PM (2) Enter the first three digits of the value (number of hundred
Count/Cycle Screen. thousands, ten thousands and thousands) using the nu-
meric key on the screen.
(3) The firstly entered number will be shifted to the left end.
4 - 13
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation [6] Data Collection

1 Enter the 25 mode. This function enables to viewing the various data maintained
2 [25 MODE SCREEN] in the machine.
Press 3 PM Count.
3 [PM COUNT/CYCLE SCREEN]
1. Data view method
Press 2 PM Cycle Set.
Select 4 Data Collection in the 25 Mode Screen.
4 [PM CYCLE SETTING SCREEN]
Enter PM cycle value using the numeric key on the
screen. [Data Collection Screen]
5 PREVIOUS SCREEN button to end setting and return Collecting data - 1
to PM Count/Cycle Screen. No.2 = 107
<List of Available Data>

No. Type Contents Pre-operation
1 Data collection Count number
-1 of copies by
each size —
Count ADF
paper passage
quantities
2 Data collection Count number Enter the 25
-2 of JAM mode.
occurrence by Set to 1
each point Software DIP
3 Data collection Count number SW.
-3 of copies by Set the address
each mode to 8-7 : 1
4 Data collection Count number *1
-4 of SC
occurrence
(F code)
5 Data collection Count number
-5 of SC
occurrence
(E code)
*1 It is possible to view only data collection -1 if DIP SW8-7
is set to 0.
4 - 14
ADJUSTMENT
(1) On the second row of the message area, the data number 3. Data display procedure (data collection 2 - 5)
(No.) then the count value are displayed. a. Operation
(2) The data number can be changed by pressing
key. Step Operation
(3) Press and hold key to display the next items con- 1 Enter the 25 mode.
tinuously. 2 [25 MODE SCREEN]
Press 1 Software DIP SW Setting.
2. Data view method 3 Set the switch No. 8-7 to 1.
a. Operation 4 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN key to return to 25 Mode Screen.
5 Press 4 Data Collection to display the Data
Step Operation Collection -1 Screen.
1 Enter the 25 mode. 6 Pressing "Auto Reset" button enables to display
2 [25 MODE SCREEN] next data collection screen.
Press 4 Data Collection.
3 [DATA COLLECTION SCREEN]
Change the data number. Data collection - 1
Press key.
4 Repeat the step 3 to view the various data.
5 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN button to end setting. Data collection - 2
b. Data details Data collection - 3

(1) Data collection 1
Type Paper Size Maximum
Size No. Data collection - 4
Copy Japan U.S.A. Europe Count No.
count by 1 — — — 99,999,999
each 2 A3 11"x17" A3 99,999,999
size Data collection - 5
3 B4 81/2"x14" B4 99,999,999
4 A4 81/2"x11" A4 99,999,999
5 B5 51/2"x81/2" B5 99,999,999
6 A5 — A5 99,999,999 7 Using key, select the desired data number.
7 B6 — F4 99,999,999 8 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN button to end the operation.
8 81/2"x14" — — 99,999,999
9 81/2"x11" — — 99,999,999
10 Non-standard size 99,999,999
ADF 11 ADF (1-1 or 1-2) 99,999,999
paper 12 RADF (2-1 or 2-2) 99,999,999
passage
count
4 - 15
ADJUSTMENT
b. Data details
(1) Data collection -2
JAM occurrence count by each point
No. Jam Maximum count No. No. Jam Maximum count No.
1 — 999,999 40 J96 999,999
2 — 999,999 41 J10-2 999,999
3 — 999,999 42 J10-4 999,999
4 — 999,999 43 — 999,999
5 — 999,999 44 — 999,999
6 — 999,999 45 J17-3 999,999
7 — 999,999 46 J17-4 999,999
8 — 999,999 47 J17-5 999,999
9 — 999,999 48 J17-6 999,999
10 J21 999,999 49 — 999,999
11 J31 999,999 50 — 999,999
12 J32 999,999 51 — 999,999
13 J61 999,999 52 — 999,999
14 J62 999,999 53 — 999,999
15 J63 999,999 54 — 999,999
16 J72 999,999 55 — 999,999
17 — 999,999 56 — 999,999
18 J92 999,999 57 — 999,999
19 J93 999,999 58 J15-2 999,999
20 J94 999,999 59 J15-3 999,999
21 — 999,999
22 J11-2 999,999
23 J11-3 999,999
24 J11-3 999,999
25 — 999,999
26 J12-2 999,999
27 J12-3 999,999
28 J12-4 999,999
29 — 999,999
30 J13-2 999,999
31 J13-3 999,999
32 — 999,999
33 — 999,999
34 J14-2 999,999
35 J14-3 999,999
36 — 999,999
37 J-30 999,999
38 — 999,999
39 — 999,999
4 - 16
ADJUSTMENT

Copy count by each mode
No. JAM Maximum Count No. No. JAM Maximum Count No.
1 Platen 1-1 mode 99,999,999 43 Copy quantity is set to 12 99,999,999
2 Platen 1-2 mode 99,999,999 or above.
3 ADF2-1 mode 99,999,999 44 Sheet/Cover interleave start 99,999,999
4 ADF2-2 mode 99,999,999 45 – 99,999,999
5 ADF1-1 mode 99,999,999 46 Text/Photo Enhance (Photo) 99,999,999
6 ADF1-2 mode 99,999,999 47 – 99,999,999
7 Staple sort 99,999,999 48 Verti./Horiz. zoom 99,999,999
8 Sort 99,999,999 49 Booklet 99,999,999
9 Group 99,999,999 50 Single step 99,999,999
10 No. of stapling time 99,999,999 51 Un-select Text/Photo Enhance 99,999,999
11 1.0 magnification mode 99,999,999 52 Text/Photo Enhance (Text) 99,999,999
12 RE1 99,999,999 53 Copy density (user set) 99,999,999
13 RE2 99,999,999 54 OHP(copy paper) 99,999,999
14 RE3 99,999,999 55 Sheet/Cover interleave 99,999,999
15 RE4 99,999,999 (thick paper)
16 RE5 99,999,999 56 – 99,999,999
17 RE6 99,999,999 57 Image insert 99,999,999
18 Arbitrary magnification 99,999,999 58 Chapter 99,999,999
19 Zoom 99,999,999 59 Combination 99,999,999
20 2.00 magnification 99,999,999 60 Repeat 99,999,999
21 0.50 magnification 99,999,999 61 Reverse image 99,999,999
22 AMS 99,999,999 62 Non-image area erase 99,999,999
23 APS 99,999,999 63 – 99,999,999
24 AE 99,999,999 64 – 99,999,999
25 Interrupt 99,999,999 65 – 99,999,999
26 Bypass feed 99,999,999 66 – 99,999,999
27 Book copy 99,999,999 67 – 99,999,999
28 Frame erase 99,999,999 68 Print mode 99,999,999
29 Fold erase 99,999,999
30 Shift 99,999,999
31 Reduction shift 99,999,999
32 Thick paper 99,999,999
33 Thin paper 99,999,999
34 Inter-sheet 1 99,999,999
35 Inter-sheet 2 99,999,999
36 OHP (copy paper) 99,999,999
37 Mixed Original 99,999,999
38 Job memory 99,999,999
39 Pre-heat 99,999,999
40 Copy quantity is set to 1. 99,999,999
41 Copy quantity is set between 99,999,999
2 and 5.
42 Copy quantity is set between 99,999,999
6 and 10.
4 - 17
ADJUSTMENT

SC occurrence count (F code)
No. SC Code Maximum count No. No. SC Code Maximum count No.
1 F18-1 9,999 46 F49-3 9,999
2 F18-2 9,999 47 F49-4 9,999
3 F18-3 9,999 48 F49-5 9,999
4 F18-4 9,999 49 F51-1 9,999
5 F28-1 9,999 50 F51-2 9,999
6 F28-2 9,999 51 F51-3 9,999
7 F34-1 9,999 52 F51-4 9,999
8 F34-2 9,999 53 F51-5 9,999
9 F35-1 9,999 54 F51-6 9,999
10 F35-2 9,999 55 F51-7 9,999
11 F36-1 9,999 56 F51-8 9,999
12 F36-2 9,999 57 F51-9 9,999
13 — 9,999 58 F52-1 9,999
14 — 9,999 59 F52-2 9,999
15 — 9,999 60 F52-3 9,999
16 — 9,999 61 F52-4 9,999
17 — 9,999 62 F52-5 9,999
18 — 9,999 63 F52-6 9,999
19 — 9,999 64 F52-7 9,999
20 — 9,999 65 F83-1 9,999
21 — 9,999 66 F83-2 9,999
22 — 9,999 67 F83-3 9,999
23 — 9,999 68 F83-4 9,999
24 — 9,999 69 F83-5 9,999
25 — 9,999 70 F83-7 9,999
26 — 9,999 71 — 9,999
27 — 9,999 72 — 9,999
28 — 9,999 73 F18-5 9,999
29 — 9,999 74 — 9,999
30 — 9,999 75 — 9,999
31 — 9,999 76 — 9,999
32 — 9,999 77 — 9,999
33 — 9,999 78 — 9,999
34 — 9,999 79 — 9,999
35 F22-1 9,999 80 — 9,999
36 F22-2 9,999 81 — 9,999
37 — 9,999 82 — 9,999
38 F28-3 9,999 83 — 9,999
39 F43-1 9,999 84 — 9,999
40 F43-2 9,999 85 — 9,999
41 F43-3 9,999 86 — 9,999
42 F43-4 9,999 87 F37-1 9,999
43 F49-0 9,999 88 F52-8 9,999
44 F49-1 9,999 89 F52-9 9,999
45 F49-2 9,999
4 - 18
ADJUSTMENT

SC occurrence count (E code)
No. E Code Maximam count No.
1 — 9,999
2 E48 9,999
3 E46-0 9,999
4 — 9,999
5 E46-2 9,999
6 E46-6 9,999
7 E46-8 9,999
8 E46-9 9,999
9 E60 9,999
10 E67 9,999
11 E70 9,999
12 E77-1 9,999
13 E77-2 9,999
14 E77-3 9,999
15 E77-4 9,999
16 E77-5 9,999
17 E77-6 9,999
18 E77-7 9,999
19 E77-8 9,999
20 — 9,999
21 E46-3 9,999
22 E46-11 9,999
23 E46-12 9,999
24 E41-1 9,999
25 E41-2 9,999
26 E41-3 9,999
27 E41-4 9,999
28 E47-1 9,999
29 E47-2 9,999
30 E47-3 9,999
31 E47-4 9,999
32 E47-5 9,999
4 - 19
ADJUSTMENT
[7] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced 1. Copy count reset by parts to be replaced
The following settings are used for arbitrary parts or data.
1. Copy count reset <Count Reset Selection>
2. Limit value setting Select 5 Copy count by parts to be replaced in the 25 Mode
3. Part number setting Screen to display Copy Count Screen by Parts to be Replaced
4. Part name setting as an initial screen.
Select the count reset here.
No. Count timing Part name
initial status [Copy Count Screen by Parts to be Replaced]
1 When copy count (paper exit and ADU) Not set
2 (Setting is Copy count of each part EX-LAMP
3 available) No.15 P/N xxxxxxxxx 000300/050000
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 (1) Data number, count value then limit value are displayed
16 on the second row of the message area.
17 (2) The data number can be changed by pressing
18 When stapling select (at back) <STAPLER/R> key.
19 When stapling select (at front) <STAPLER/F> Press and hold key to display next items continu-
20 When Large capacity tray paper feed <TRAY 5> ously.
21 When manual paper feed <BY-PASS> (3) The count/limit value for the selected data No. will be dis-
22 When tray 1 select <TRAY 1> played.
23 When tray 2 select <TRAY 2>
24 When tray 3 select <TRAY 3> (4) Press button to move to Copy Count
25 When tray 4 select <TRAY 4> Reset Screen by Parts to be Replaced.
26 When ADU paper feed <ADU>
27 When main unit paper feed <MB-EXIT>
28 When ADF feed <ADF 1>
<Initial Status>
* Part numbers 1~30 are not set.
* Part names No. 1~17 are not set.
* Refer to the part names of No. 18~30 in the table above.
4 - 20
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
[Copy Count Reset Screen by Parts to be Replaced] 2. Copy count limit setting by parts to be replaced
Each part counter clear YES / NO? Set new limit value for the copy count by parts to be re-
No. 1 1565/5000 placed.
<Count Limit Selection>

Select 5 Copy count by parts to be replaced in the 25 Mode
Screen to display Copy Count Screen by Parts to be Replaced
as an initial screen. Select the limit set here.
[Copy Count Screen by Parts to be Replaced]

Each part counter limit selting
No.15 P/N xxxxxxxxx 00300/050000
(5) Select Yes key to clear the copy count. The screen
returns to Copy Count Screen by Parts to be Replaced
after the count is cleared.
(6) Select No key to return to Copy Count Screen by Parts
to be Replaced without clearing any count.
Step Operation
2 [25 MODE SCREEN]
(1) Data number, count value then limit value are displayed
Press 5 Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced.
on the second row of the message area.
3 [COPY COUNT SCREEN BY PARTS TO BE REPLACED]
(2) The data number can be changed by pressing
Press key to select the data number.
key.
4 Press Count Reset button.
5 [COPY COUNT RESET SCREEN BY PARTS TO Press and hold key to display next items continu-
BE REPLACED] ously.
Press Yes key to clear the count. (3) The count/limit value for the selected data No. will be dis-
6 PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end setting. played.
(4) Press Limit setting key to set the limit value.
Note: Copy Count Limit Setting Screen by Parts to be Replaced
will appear.
The right side of the limit value will be marked as "
copy count exceeds its limit value. *
" if the
4 - 21
ADJUSTMENT
3. Count limit setting 4. Part Number Setting Method
[Copy Count Limit Setting Screen by Parts to be Re- [Part number setting screen]
placed]
Each part counter P/N setting
Each part counter limit setting No.15 P/N xxxxxxxxx 000300/050000
No.1 1565/5000
(1) Using the numeric keys on the screen, enter new parts
(1) Using the numeric key on the screen, enter new limit value. number (P/N).
• Newly entered data will be displayed on the second row of • The input characters are displayed in the part number dis-
the message area. play area on the 2nd line of the message display area.
• The firstly entered number will be shifted to the left end. • The display shifts one space from right to left each time a
(2) Press SET key to return to Copy Count Screen by Parts character is input.
to be Replaced. • When 9 characters have been input, the character on the
Note: farthest left will be deleted each time an additional charac-
The screen will also return to Copy Count Screen by Parts ter is input.
to be Replaced if PREVIOUS SCREEN button is pressed (2) Press SET key to return to Copy Count Screen by Parts
without pressing SET key. In this case, no limit value will to be Replaced.
be changed. Note:
The screen will also return to Copy Count Screen by Parts
Step Operation to be Replaced if PREVIOUS SCREEN button is pressed
1 Enter the 25 mode. without pressing SET key. In this case, no parts number
2 [25 MODE SCREEN]
will be changed.
3 [COPY COUNT SCREEN BY PARTS TO BE REPLACED] Step Operation
Press Limit setting button. 1 Enter the 25 mode.
4 [COPY COUNT LIMIT SETTING SCREEN BY 2 [25 MODE SCREEN]
PARTS TO BE REPLACED] Press 5 Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced.
Enter new limit value using the numeric key. 3 [COPY COUNT SCREEN BY PARTS TO BE REPLACED]
5 Press SET button to execute. Press P/N Setting button.
6 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN button to end setting. 4 [NUMBER SETTING SCREEN]
Use the numerical keys to input the new part
Note: number.
5 Press SET button to confirm the input part number.
The right side of the limit value will be marked as "
copy count exceeds its limit value. * " if the
6 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN button to end setting.
4 - 22
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
5. Part Name Setting Method [8] Setting Key Operator Password

This function sets the password to enter the key operator mode.
[Part Name Setting Screen]
Parts name setting EX-LAMP 1. Password setting screen selection
No.15 P/N xxxxxxxxx 000300/050000 Select 6 Password Setting in the 25 Mode Screen to dis-
play Password Setting Screen as an initial screen.
In this screen, select the password to be set.
[Password Setting Screen]

Password seting mode
Select one of following item
(1) Using the numeric keys on the screen, enter new parts
name.
• The input characters are displayed in the part name dis-
play area on the 1st line of the message display area.
• The display shifts one space from right to left each time a
character is input.
• When 8 characters have been input, the character on the 2. Setting method
farthest left will be deleted each time an additional charac-
Select 1 Set key operator password in Password Setting
ter is input.
Screen.
(2) Press SET key to return to Copy Count Screen by Parts
Key Operator Password Setting Screen will appear.
to be Replaced.
Note:
[Key Operator Password Setting Screen]
The screen will also return to Copy Count Screen by Parts
Key operator password setting
to be Replaced if PREVIOUS SCREEN button is pressed 1111
without pressing SET key. In this case, no parts name
will be changed.
Step Operation
2 [25 MODE SCREEN]
3 [COPY COUNT SCREEN BY PARTS TO BE REPLACED]
Press Part Name Setting button.
4 [PART NAME SETTING SCREEN]
Use the numerical keys to input the new part
name.
5 Press SET button to confirm the input part name.
6 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN button to end setting. (1) Using the numeric key on the screen, enter 4-digit new
password.
• Newly entered number will be displayed on the second
row of the message area.
• The firstly entered number will be shifted to the left end.
(2) Press SET key to execute.
4 - 23
ADJUSTMENT
(3) The screen will return to Password Setting Screen if [9] Setting EKC Master Key Code
PREVIOUS SCREEN key is pressed without pressing SET This function sets EKC master key code.
key. In this case, no password will be changed.
1. Password setting screen selection
Step Operation
1 Enter the 25 mode. Select 6 Password Setting in the 25 Mode Screen to dis-
2 [25 MODE SCREEN] play Password Setting Screen as an initial screen.
Press 6 Password Setting. In this screen, select the password to be set.
3 [PASSWORD SETTING SCREEN]
Press 1 Key operator password setting. 2. Setting method
4 [KEY OPERATOR PASSWORD SETTING SCREEN] Select 2 Set EKC master key code in Password Setting
Using the numeric key on the screen, enter 4-digit Screen.
new password. EKC Master Key Code Setting Screen will appear.
5 Press SET button to execute.
6 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN button to end setting. [EKC Master Key Code Setting Screen]
Note: E.K.C. master key code setting
Set the password to "0000" to enter the key operator mode 11111111
without any password. In other words, without displaying the
field for entering password, Key Operator Screen will appear
when the key operator mode is started.
(1) Using the numeric key on the screen, enter 8-digit new
EKC master key code.
(3) The screen will return to Password Setting Screen if
PREVIOUS SCREEN key is pressed without pressing SET
key. In this case, no EKC master key code will be changed.
Step Operation
2 [25 MODE SCREEN]
Press 6 Password Setting.
3 [PASSWORD SETTING SCREEN]
Press 2 EKC Master Key Code Setting.
4 [OPERATOR KEY PASSWORD SETTING SCREEN]
Using the numeric key on the screen, enter 8-digit
new EKC master key code.
5 Press SET key to execute.
6 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end setting.
4 - 24
ADJUSTMENT-1
ADJUSTMENT
[10] Setting Weekly Timer Master Key [11] Specifying Phone Number of Service
Code Center
This function sets the weekly timer master key code required This function specifies the phone and fax numbers of the serv-
for entering the various weekly timer set mode. ice center which is indicated in the screen if the service call is
issued.
These numbers are also indicated as "Contact Number of
Service Center" of the basic help screen in the user's display.
1. Password setting screen selection
Select 6 Password Setting in the 25 Mode Screen to dis- 1. Specifying phone and fax number of service
play Password Setting Screen as an initial screen.
In this screen, select the password to be set. center
Select 7 Telephone Number Setting in the 25 Mode
2. Setting weekly timer master key code Screen. Service Center Number Setting Screen will ap-
Select 3 Set weekly timer master key code in Password pear.
Setting Screen.
[Service Center Number Setting Screen]
Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen will appear.
Customer support (Telephone) 1/2
[Weekly Timer Master Key Code Setting Screen] 0000000000000000
Weekly timer master key code setting
1111
(1) Specifying phone number of service center

a. Using the numeric key on the screen, enter 16-digit number.
(1) Using the numeric key on the screen, enter 4-digit new b. This number must be 16 digits. Arrange the number with
weekly timer master key code. hyphenation if it is less than 16 digits.
c. Newly entered number and hyphen (if any) will be displayed
on the second row of the message area.
d. The firstly entered number will be shifted to the left end.
e. Press SET key to execute.
(3) The screen will return to Password Setting Screen if
PREVIOUS SCREEN key is pressed without pressing SET f. Select Next setting key to specify the fax number.
key. In this case, no weekly timer master key code will be g. The new phone number will not be effective if Next setting
changed. key is pressed without pressing SET key.
Step Operation
1 Enter the 25 mode. (2) Specifying fax number of service center
2 [25 MODE SCREEN] a. After entering the phone number, press SET key and se-
Press 6 Password Setting. lect Next setting key to move to the fax number entry
3 [PASSWORD SETTING SCREEN] screen. Enter new fax number according to the same pro-
Press 3 Weekly Timer Master Key Code Setting. cedure as that for the phone number.
4 [KEY OPERATOR PASSWORD SETTING SCREEN]
b. Press SET key button to execute.
new weekly timer master key code. Select Next setting key again to return to the phone number
5 Press SET key to execute. entry screen.
6 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end setting.
Reference:
Set the password to "0000" to enter the weekly timer mode
without any password.
In other words, without displaying Weekly Timer Master Key
Code Entry Screen, Weekly Timer Setting Screen will appear
when the weekly timer mode is started.
4 - 25
ADJUSTMENT
Select PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end setting the phone [12] Setting and Displaying Serial
number and return to the 25 Mode Screen. Number
Step Operation This function is used to display, set and change the serial
1 Enter the 25 mode. number of the main machine or optional machines.
2 [25 MODE SCREEN]
Press 7 Phone Number of Service Center Setting.
3 [SERVICE CENTER NUMBER SETTING SCREEN]
1. Serial number display procedure
new phone number and hyphen (if necessary) and Select 8 Serial Number Indication in the 25 Mode Screen.
press SET key. Serial Number Display Screen will appear. The name of
4 Press Next Setting key to move to the fax number the main machine or optional machine will be displayed
entry screen. on the first row of the message area.
5 Using the numeric key on the screen, enter 16-digit On the second row, the corresponding serial number for
new fax number and hyphen (if necessary) and each machine will be displayed.
press SET key. Pressing Next setting key enables to proceed to the next
6 Press PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end setting. item such as main machine → Option tray → RADF →
Finisher.
[Serial Number Display Screen]
Indication of m/c serial number 1/4

Main body : 55FF00002
2. Setting and changing serial number

Press Input No. key in Serial Number Display Screen to
move to Serial Number Setting Screen.
Using the numeric key on the screen, enter 9-digit number
and alphabet.
The firstly entered number or alphabet will be shifted to
the left end.
Press SET key to execute and return to Serial Number
Display Screen.
The screen also returns to Serial Number Display Screen
if SET key is pressed without entering any number or
alphabet. In this case, no data will be changed.
Select PREVIOUS SCREEN key button to simply return to
Serial Number Display Screen.
4 - 26
ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation [13] Displaying ROM Version

1 Enter the 25 mode. This function is used to display ROM version mounted to the
2 [25 MODE SCREEN] machine.
Press 8 Indication of m/c serial number
3 [Serial Number Display Screen]
1. ROM version view method
Check the number shown in the message area.
Select 9 ROM Version Indication in the 25 Mode Screen.
Press Next button to move to the Next Setting item.
4 ROM Version Display Screen will appear.
Press Input No. key to change the number.
5 Using the numeric key on the screen, enter 9-digit The version of each of the main body control board, the
serial number and press SET key. operation panel, the image processing board, and the ADF
6 PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end setting. is displayed on the second line of the message display
box.
[ROM Version Display Screen]
Indication of ROM version
Select PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end this screen and re-

turn to 25 Mode Screen.
4 - 27
ADJUSTMENT
[14] 25 Mode Adjust Item List

Adjust Item (Remarks)
1 Software DIP SW Setting Refer to "List of
Software DIP SW".
2 Paper Size Setting
3 PM count/cycle 1 PM count reset
2 PM cycle reset
4 Data collection Data collection -1 (by each size) 1~12 items
(ADF paper passage count)
Data collection -2 (JAM occurrence count by each point) 1~59 items
Data collection -3 (Copy count by each mode) 1~68 items
Data collection -4 (SC occurrence count: F code) 1~89 items
Data collection -5 (SC occurrence count: E code) 1~32 items
5 Parts counter Optional count for
1 to 30 items
6 Password Setting 1 Key operator password setting 4 digit

2 Key EKC master key code setting 8 digit
3 Key weekly timer master key code setting 4 digit
4 - 28
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
36 MODE
A special operating mode called "36 Mode" has been provided [2] Charging Corona Current Adjustment
with this machine. This is used to make various adjustments. Charging Corona Current Adjustment is not field adjustable.
[1] Setting Method

1. Turn off the main switch.
[3] Transfer Current Adjustment
Transfer Current Adjustment is not field adjustable.
2. Turn on the power switch while holding both the copy quan-
tity setting button 3 and 6 simultaneously.
36 Mode Screen will appear. [4] Separation (AC) Current Adjustment
At this time, the normal copy operation is not available. Separation (AC) Current Adjustment is not field adjustable.
[36 Mode Screen]
[5] Separation (DC) Current Adjustment

Adjustment mode
Select one of following items Separation (DC) Current Adjustment is not field adjustable.
[6] Developing Bias Adjustment

Developing Bias Adjustment is not field adjustable.
3. Press the desired button.

The selected setting screen will appear.
4. Enter data in each setting screen.
5. Press Next setting key if there is more than one screen.
Press the appropriate button if there is any subordinate
screen.
6. Enter data and press SET key (if it exists) to check the
data.
7. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end setting.
8. Turn off the main switch to exit the 36 mode.
9. New data can be adjusted after restarting the machine.
4 - 29
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[7] Charging Grid Voltage Adjustment *1: Standard volage = Drum designate value ± 5 V
Adjust the charging grid voltage. Input range = 0~255
CAUTION: Confirm that the drum counter is zeroed before 1step = 1.6 V
performing this adjustment. Value written on drum plastic flange.
Step Operation (display)
1 Check the standard value of the grid voltage written at
the drum flange.
Connect the tester as shown below.
2 + →Grid pin
- →GND(Earth)
Range →1000 V DC
4 [36 MODE MENU SCREEN]
Press 1 High voltage auto adjustment.
5 [HIGH VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT (changing) SCREEN]
Touch the Next adjustment key until " Grid voltage"
appears in the message display box.
6 [HIGH VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT (GRID) SCREEN]
Press the START PRINT and check the tester value.
Then, stop by the stop/clear button.
7 If the adjustment is necessary, enter a value from the
numeric keypad on the screen, then touch the SET
key. *1
8 To end adjustment, turn off the power.
4 - 30
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[8] Drum Clock / Horizontal Adjustment (1) Vertical magnification adjustment (Printer)
When varying the magnification, adjust the vertical magnifica-
Step Operation
tion using the maximum size of copy paper.
1. If 2 Timing Adjustment is selected using the 36 mode menu
Press 2 Timing adjustment.
screen, the timing adjustment menu screen will appear.
3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN]
Select 1 Drum clock / Horizontal Adjustment using this
Press 1 Drum clock/Horizontal adjustment.
screen.
4 [DRUM CLOCK ADJUSTMENT SCREEN]
Touch the Next adjustment key until "Printer "
[Timing Adjustment Screen]
appears in the message display box.
Timing adjustment mode
Select one of following items 5 Touch the Copy Screen key.
6 Press the PRINT START button, make a copy and
measure the vertical magnification with a ruler.
Standard: ±0.5% max (life size); Within about ±1
mm with respect to 206 mm
7 If the vertical magnification is different to the
standard value, press the C button while pressing
the P button to re-display the vertical magnification
adjustment screen.
8 Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the
screen, then touch the SET key.
9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the vertical magnification
becomes the standard value.
10 Touch the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-display
By touching the Next adjustment key during this adjustment,
the timing adjustment screen.
the copying system, and printer system adjustments can be
selected.
(Example of printer system adjustment screen)

2. Enter the data from the numeric keypad.
Standard:
Drum clock adjustment (printer) ±0.5% max (life size)
Select one of following items Within about ±1 mm with respect to 206 mm
206
3. Touch the Copy Screen key to display the basic screen,

then make a test copy.
4. To repeat adjustment, first press the C button while
pressing the P button to re-display the original
adjustment screen.
4 - 31
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
(2) Vertical magnification adjustment (Scanner) (3) Horizontal magnification adjustment

Step Operation Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
2 [36 MODE MENU SCREEN] 2 [36 MODE MENU SCREEN]
Press 2 Timing adjustment. Press 2 Timing adjustment.
3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN] 3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN]
Press 1 Drum clock/Horizontal adjustment. Press 1 Drum clock/Horizontal adjustment.
Touch the Next adjustment key until "Scanner" appears
Touch the Next adjustment key until "Horizontal
in the message display box.
magnification" appears in the message display
5 Touch the Copy Screen key.
Set the NTC chart on the original glass, then box.
6
press the PRINT START button, make a copy and 5 Touch the Copy Screen key.
measure the vertical magnification with a ruler. 6 Set the NTC chart on the original glass, then press
7 If the vertical magnification is different to the the PRINT START button, make a copy and
standard value, press the C button while pressing measure the horizontal magnification with a ruler.
the P button to re-display the vertical magnification Standard: ±1% max (life size)
adjustment screen. 7 If the horizontal magnification does not conform to
8 Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the the standard, press the C button while pressing the
screen, then touch the SET key. P button so as to re-display the horizontal magnifi-
9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the vertical magnification cation screen.
becomes the standard value. 8 Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the
10 Touch the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-display the screen, then touch the SET key.
timing adjustment screen. 9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the horizontal magnifica-
tion is within the standard range.
10 Touch the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-display the
timing adjustment screen.
Standard:
Horizontal magnification =
within 10% at 1.0
Within 2mm every 200mm
200
4 - 32
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[9] Restart Timing Adjustment (1) Copier system leading edge timing adjustment
Adjust the restart timing (registration) using the procedure Step Operation
shown at right. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
If the 36 mode menu screen is opened, then 2 Timing Adjust- 2 [36 MODE SCREEN]
ment selected, the timing adjustment menu screen will ap- Press 2 Timing adjustment.
pear. 3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN]
Open this screen, then select 2 Restart Timing Adjustment. Press 2 Restart timing adjustment.
The restart timing adjustment screen has the following kinds 4 [Re-start Timing Adjustment SCREEN]
of adjustments. These can be selected by touching the Press the Next Page key until Copier: *** is
Next adjustment key. displayed in the message area.
(*** indicates any optional tray.)
5 Set an A3/11" × 17" original on the platen.
• Copier: collective
6 Press Copy Screen .
• Copier: Tray 1
7 Select the A3/11" × 17" size in the paper size select
• Copier: Tray 2
screen.
• Copier: Tray 3
8 Using the copy quantity setting buttons, set the copy
• Copier: Tray 4 quantity to 1.
• Copier: Tray 5 9 Press the START PRINT button, and visually check
• Copier: By-pass the leading edge timing.
• Printer: collective 10 If the leading edge timing is different to the standard
• Printer: tray 1 value, press the C button while pressing the P
• Printer: tray 2 button to re-display the re-start timing adjustment
• Printer: tray 3 screen.
• Printer: tray 4 11 Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the
• Printer: tray 5 screen, then touch the SET key.
• Printer: By-pass < Input range >
• Printer: Side 2 -99 (slow) to 99 (fast) 1 step = 0.1 mm
12 Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the leading edge timing
[Restart Timing Adjustment Screen (example of copy becomes the standard value.
13 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to re-display the timing
system adjustment)]
adjustment screen.
Restart timing adj. (copier)
+0 +0 (-99 ~ +99) 1step = 0.1mm
For reference:
1. Copier system leading edge timing adjustment
This adjustment is for the very high mode.
• The period from when PS4 (paper feed restart) goes
ON until the write operation starts is adjusted.
2. Printer system leading edge timing adjustment
This adjustment is effective when using E-RDH.
• The period from when PS18 (no feed) goes ON until
the write operation starts is adjusted according to the
size of the paper.
4 - 33
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
(2) Printer system leading edge timing adjustment [10] Paper Feed Loop Adjustment
Step Operation Adjust the loop for each tray using the procedure shown below.
2 [36 MODE SCREEN] If the 36 mode menu screen is opened, then 2 Timing Ad-
Press 2 Timing adjustment. justment selected, the timing adjustment menu screen will
3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN] appear.
Press 2 Restart timing adjustment. Open this screen, then select 3 Paper Feed Loop Adjust-
4 [Re-start Timing Adjustment Panel] ment.
Press the Next Page key until Printer: *** is
displayed. (*** indicates any optional tray.) [Paper Feed Loop Adjustment Screen]
5 Press Copy Screen key.
6 Using the copy quantity setting buttons, set the copy Paper loop adj. (Tray 1 ~ 5)
+0 +0 (-20 ~ +99) 1step = 0.1mm
quantity to 1.
7 Press the START PRINT button, and visually check
the leading edge timing.
8 If the leading edge timing is different to the standard
value, press the C button while pressing the P
button to re-display the re-start timing adjustment
screen.
9 Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the
screen, then touch the SET key.
< Input range >
-99 (slow) to 99 (fast)
1 step = 0.1 mm
10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the leading edge timing
becomes the standard value. Press the Next adjustment key, and select the paper feed tray
* Standard value: Within ±0.5 mm whose loop is to be adjusted.
11 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to re-display the timing
adjustment screen.
Paper feed loop adjustment (Tray1 to Tray5)
Paper feed loop adjustment (Bypass feed)

Standard: ±3mm (Main body: without rotation)
±4mm (Full system: without rotation)
±4mm (Main body: with rotation)
±6mm (Full system: with rotation)
Step Operation
Image 2 [36 MODE SCREEN]
Press 3 Paper feed loop adjustment.
4 Press Copy Screen key.
5 Make a copy and check the paper feed loop.
6 Press the C button while pressing the P button.
7 Enter a value from the numeric keypad, then touch
Paper the [Set] key.
< Input range >
-20 (small) -00 (standard) +99 (large)
1 step = 0.1 msec
8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the paper feed loop is
appropriate.
9 Press the Next adjust key, and select the tray
whose loop is to be adjusted next.
4 - 34
DIAGNOSTICS
[11] Leading Edge Original Erasure [12] Optics Brake Adjustment

Adjustment Optics Brake Adjustment is not field adjustable.
Adjust the leading edge margin using the procedure shown
below.
If the 36 mode menu screen is opened, then 2 Timing Adjust-
ment selected, the timing adjustment menu screen will ap-
pear.
Open this screen, then select 4 Leading Edge Margin Ad-
justment.
[Leading Edge timing Adjustment Screen]
Lead edge timing adjustment

+0 +0 (-20 ~ +50) 1step = 0.1mm
Step Operation
2 [36 MODE SCREEN]
Press 4 Lead edge original erasure adjustment.
4 [Leading Edge Margin Adjustment Screen]
Press the Copy Screen key.
5 Make a copy, and confirm the output.
6 Press the C button while pressing the P button.
7 Enter a value from the numerical keypad, then
touch the SET key.
< Input range >
0 (small) to 99 (large)
1 step = 1 pixel
8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the leading edge margin
falls within the standard range (within 3mm).
9 To end adjustment, touch the PREVIOUS SCREEN key.
4 - 35
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[13] Centering Adjustment If the 36 mode menu screen is opened, then 2 Timing Adjust-
Relation between copy process and Centering pear.
adjustment Open this screen, then select 6 Centering Adjustment.
Reference point [Centering adjustment screen]
Centering adjustment (Writing)

Reading +0 +0 (-32 ~ +32) 1step = 0.1mm
Writing
Trays 1 – 5/By-pass
ADU
(2) (1) (3) Centering

Adjust ADU centering
The centering adjustment screen has the following 12 adjust-
Performs the centering adjust-
ment for all trays/By-pass. ment items. Select an item by pressing the Next adjustment
key.
Adjust by the original scale plate.
* Writing (for collective adjustment)
* Tray 1 (Upper tray)
* Tray 2 (Lower tray)
* Tray 3 (1000 tray)
When adjusting, be sure to obey the following procedures. * Tray 4 (1500 tray)
(1) Centering adjustment for all trays * Tray 5 (Large capacity tray)
Performs the centering adjustment for all trays/By-pass by * By-pass
using laser beam writing position to the drum as reference. * Side 2: collective
(2) ADU centering adjustment * Side 2: Large (ADU : for A3/11" × 17)
Performs the centering adjustment for the back side for the * Side 2: Middle(ADU : for 81/2" × 11"R, A4R)
front copies adjusted in item (1). * Side 2: Small (ADU : for 81/2" × 11", A4)
(3) Original position centering adjustment * Side 2: Very small (ADU : for A5R Europe only)
Adjust the position of the original scale plate by making one
side copy.
Due to this, alignment of the reading portion and writing
portion is ended and the series of centering adjustments is
completed.
4 - 36
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
(1) Each tray Manual feed centering adjustment (2) ADU centering adjustment

1 Enter the 36 mode. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
2 [36 MODE SCREEN] 2 [36 MODE SCREEN]
Press 2 Timing adjustment. Press 2 Timing adjustment.
3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN] 3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN]
Press 6 Centering Adjustment. Press 6 Centering Adjustment.
4 [Centering Adjustment Screen] 4 [Centering Adjustment Screen]
Touch the Copy Screen key. Touch the Copy Screen key.
5 (Adjust Tray 1) 5 (Adjust Large size)
Make a copy under the following conditions. Make a copy under the following conditions.
* One-sided original to one-sided copy mode * Duplicationcopy mode
* Tray 1 (A3/11" × 17") * Tray 1 (A3/11" × 17")
6 Fold the output at the center in the 6 Confirm that the centerlines of the face side and
feeding direction, and check that the left and right reverse side test patterns coincide exactly.
lines coincide exactly. Standard: ±1mm 7 * If the mis-centering is more than ± 2 mm:
7 * If the mis-centering is more than ± 2 mm: Perform mechanical adjustment. (*1)
Perform mechanical adjustment. (*1) * If the mis-centering is no more than ± 2 mm:
* If the mis-centering is no more than ± 2 mm: Press the C button while pressing the P button.
Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8 Press the Next adjust key and select [Side 2 collective]
8 Press the Next adjust key and select [Writing] 9 Enter a value from the numeric keypad, then press
9 Enter a value from the numeric keypad, then press the [Set] key. (Input range -94 ~ +99 1step = 1 pixel)
the [Set] key. 10 Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the mis-centering is within
( Input range -32 to +32 1 step = 1 pixel) ±1 mm.
10 Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the mis-centering is within 11 Perform the same adjustments for the other trays
±1 mm. as well.
11 Perform the same adjustments for the other trays * When the mis-centering is more than ±2 mm:
as well. Perform mechanical adjustment. (*1)
* When the mis-centering is more than ±2 mm: * When the mis-centering is no more than ±2 mm:
Perform mechanical adjustment. (*1) Press the C button while pressing the P button.
* When the mis-centering is no more than ±2 mm: Select the paper size that you wish to adjust
Press the C button while pressing the P button. using the Next adjust key.
Select the paper feed tray that you wish to adjust A4R (81/2" × 11"R) ..... [Side2: Middle]
using the Next adjust key. A4(81/2" × 11") ........... [Side2: Small]
Lower tray ...................... [Tray 2] A5R ........................... [Side2: Very small]
LCT right ........................ [Tray 3] 12 Subsequent adjustments are the same as for Large.
LCT left .......................... [Tray 4] 13 To end adjustment, touch the PREVIOUS SCREEN key.
ST-3500................. ........ [Tray 5]
*1: For details of mechanical mis-centering adjustment
Manual feed ................... [By-pass]
of each tray, refer to "Other Adjustments".
12 Subsequent adjustments are the same as for tray 1.
13 To end adjustment, touch the PREVIOUS SCREEN key.
*1: For details of mechanical mis-centering adjustment

of each tray, refer to "Other Adjustments".
4 - 37
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
(3) Original image centering adjustment [14] Laser Adjustment

Step Operation
1 Place an original correctly on the original glass. Perform adjustment of the two laser outputs.
2 Select the one-sided copy mode then press the If the 36 mode menu screen is opened, then 2 timing adjust-
START PRINT button. ment selected, the timing adjustment menu screen will ap-
3 Visually check the copy. pear.
4 If adjustment is necessary, perform adjustment by Open this screen, then select 7 Laser Adjustment.
moving the scale mounting bracket plate back/forth.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until adjustment is completed. [Laser Adjustment Screen]
LD1 offset
+20 +20 (-99 ~ +99)
The laser adjustment screen has the following 9 adjustment

items. Select an item by pressing the Next adjustment key.
LD1 offset
LD2 offset
LD1 offset thick paper
LD2 offset thick paper
Side pitch offset
LD1 offset 600dpi
LD2 offset 600dpi
LD1 offset thick paper 600dpi
LD2 offset thick paper 600dpi
4 - 38
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
(1) Laser adjustment (gradation adjustment) (2) Laser Adjustment (side pitch offset)
Adjust the laser gradation. Adjust the interval in the sub scanning direction of the laser.
Preparation: Complete Dmax level correction [47 – 13].
Preparation: Complete gradation (Gamma) level correction
Step Operation [47-14].
1 Set the 36 Mode.
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] Step Operation
Press 2 Timing Adjustment. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
3 [Timing Adjustment Menu Screen] 2 [36 MODE MENU SCREEN]
Press 7 Laser adjustment Press 2 Timing adjustment.
4 [Laser Adjustment Screen] 3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN]
Select either LD1 Offset or LD2 Offset with the Press 7 Laser adjustment
Next adjustment key, then press the Copy Screen 4 [LASER ADJUSTMENT SCREEN]
key. (Adjust the LD1 offset/LD2 offset.) Using the Next adjustment key, select the side pitch
5 Load A3/11" × 17" paper into tray 1, press the START offset, , then touch the Copy Screen key.
PRINT button to output the test pattern. 5 Place A3/11"x17" paper in tray 1, then press the
6 Check the test pattern. PRINT START button and output a test pattern.
Standard: Check if the output patterns of the 6 Check the test pattern.
two lasers are uniform and that the low-density Standard: The density of the two parts indicated by
section starts anywhere between the two the arrows must be uniform.
standard lines, as shown in the figure below.
Standard
LD1 LD2
7 Press the C button while pressing the P button to 7 If the test pattern does not conform to the standard,
return to the Laser Adjustment Screen. press the C button while pressing the P button.
8 If the test pattern does not conform to the standard, 8 Enter a value from the numeric keypad, then press
enter a value from the numeric keypad and then press the SET key. Setting range: -99 to +99
the SET key. 9 Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the offset is within the stand-
Setting range: -99 to +99. ard value.
9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 until the offset is within the 10 After adjustment, touch the PREVIOUS SCREEN key.
standard value.
10 Perform the same adjustment for LD1 thick paper
offset/LD2 thick paper offset.
11 When adjustment is completed, press the
PREVIOUS SCREEN key.
12 After this adjustment has been completed, perform
the gamma correction level adjustment [47 – 14].
4 - 39
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
(3) Laser adjustment (gradation adjustment/600dpi) Step Operation

This adjustment is performed when the main unit is also used
[Example of Improper Adjustment]
as a printer.
Preparations:
Light areas: LD1 output
- Complete the laser adjustment (gradation adjustment).
Dark areas: LD2 output
- Complete the Dmax level correction (600dpi) [47 – 113].
Step Operation
1 Set the 36 Mode.
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] Standard
Press 2 Timing Adjustment.
3 [Timing Adjustment Menu Screen]
Press 7 Laser adjustment
4 [Laser Adjustment Screen]
Select either LD1 Offset 600dpi or LD2 Offset
600dpi with the Next adjustment key, then press the
Copy Screen key. (Adjust the LD1 offset 600dpi/
LD2 offset 600dpi.)
5 Load A3/11" × 17" paper into tray 1, press the PRINT
7 Press the C button while pressing the P button to
START button to output the test pattern.
return to the Laser Adjustment Screen.
6 Check the test pattern.
8 If the test pattern does not conform to the standard,
Standard: Check if the output patterns of the
enter a value from the numeric keypad and then press
two lasers are uniform and that the low-density
the SET key.
section starts anywhere between the two
Setting range: -99 to +127.
standard lines, as shown in the figure below.
9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 until the offset is within the
standard value.
10 Perform the same adjustment for LD1 thick paper
offset 600dpi/LD2 thick paper offset 600dpi.
Standard
11 When adjustment is completed, press the
12 After this adjustment has been completed, perform
the gamma correction level adjustment (600dpi)
[47 – 114].
* With this test pattern, the LD1 and LD2 outputs

appear alternately, as shown in [Example of Im-
proper Adjustment] below.
4 - 39 - 1
DIAGNOSTICS
4 - 39 - 2
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[15] RADF Original Stop Position Step Operation

Adjustment 1 Enter the 36 mode.
Adjust the RADF original stop position using the procedure 3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN]
shown below. Press 8 RADF original stop position adjustment.
If the 36 mode menu screen is opened, then 2 Timing Adjust- 4 Touch the Copy Screen key.
ment selected, the timing adjustment menu screen will ap- 5 (One-sided original)
pear. Select copy mode 1-1, then place A3/11"x17"
Open this screen, then select 8 RADF Original Stop Position paper in a tray.
Adjustment. 6 Place an A3/11"x17" original in the ADF, then press
the START PRINT button and make a copy.
[RADF Original Stop Position Adjustment Screen] 7 Check the paper feed timing.
Standard: Within ±1 mm
Original pos. adj. (1 sided) 1/4 8 If the paper feed timing does not conform to the
+0 +0 0 (-99 ~ +99) 1step + 0.39mm
standard, press the C button while pressing the P
button.
9 Using the Next adjustment key, select "One-sided
original", then enter a value from the numeric
keypad and touch the SET key.
Setting range: -99 to +99; 1 step: 0.47 mm
10 Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the paper feed timing is
within the standard range.
11 Touch the Next adjustment key, and select the item
to be adjusted next.
* Two-sided original: Large (A3/11"x17")
* Two-sided original: Medium (A4R/8 1/2"x11"R)
* Two-sided original: Small (A4/8 1/2"x11")
12 (ex. a large two-sided original)
Select copy mode 2-1, then place A3/11"x17"
paper in a tray.
13 Place an A3/11"x17" original in the ADF, then press
the START PRINT button and make a copy.
(The subsequent adjustment is the same as the
adjustment procedure for a one-sided original.)
14 If you wish to perform further adjustment, repeat
step 11 and after.
15 After adjustment, touch the PREVIOUS SCREEN
key.
4 - 40
DIAGNOSTICS
[16] Resetting Standard Data [17] Running Test Mode

Reset the adjusted set values to the standard values (After Perform a running test during a continuous copy operation
production adjustment) using the procedure shown below. using the method described below.
If the 36 mode menu screen is opened, then 2 timing adjust- Open the 36 mode menu, then select 3 Running Mode.
pear.
Open this screen, then select 9 Recall standard data. [Running Test Mode Screen]
[Recall standard data Screen] Running mode
Recall standard data : Drum clock / Horiz.

All thing data restore ?
Step Operation
Step Operation 2 [36 MODE SCREEN]
1 Enter the 36 mode. Press 3 Running test mode.
2 [36 MODE SCREEN] 3 [RUNNING TEST MODE SCREEN]
Press 2 Timing adjustment. Warming-up operation will start if Running mode 1
3 [TIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREEN] to Running mode 5 is pressed. *1
Press 9 Recall standard data. 4 Turn OFF the main switch.
4 [RECALL STANDARD DATA SCREEN] 5 Turn ON the main switch.
Press Next adjust key to select the item to recover. 6 Once warmup is completed, press the
*1 Item to select 7 START PRINT button. The running mode is
5 Check if the selected item is displayed in the activated, and a warming-up operation starts.
message area. 8 Press Stop/Clear button to stop copying.
6 Press NO or PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end this
recovery mode.
*1 Item to select
·Drum clock/Horizontal adjustment data
· Restart timing data
· Paper feed loop adjustment data
· Leading edge original erasure adjustment data
· Optics brake adjustment data
· Centering adjustment data
· RADF original stop position data
4 - 41
DIAGNOSTICS
*1: Contents of the running mode [18] Test Pattern Output

Output a test pattern using the procedure described below.
Running mode 1 If the 36 mode menu screen is opened, then 4 Test Pattern
Running mode 1 is an intermittent copy mode. In this Output Mode selected, the test pattern setting screen will be
mode, after the set number of copy operations has been displayed.
completed, the machine goes into the copy ready sta- Caution: Do not operate for any mode that is not particularly
tus, waits 0.5 sec, then starts the same operation again. specified.
* Running mode 2
Running mode 2 is a paperless intermittent copy mode. [Test Pattern Output Screen]
It makes copies at roughly the same timing as for a
normal copy, without performing paper detection or jam Test pattern output mode
detection. Also, like running mode 1, after the set <00>
number of copy operations has been completed, the
machine goes into the copy ready status, waits 0.5 sec,
then starts the same operation again.
* Running mode 3
Running mode 3 is a paperless mode. It makes cop-
ies at roughly the same timing as for a normal copy,
without performing paper detection or jam detection.
* Running mode 4
Running mode 4 is a paperless endless mode. It auto-
matically sets the copy quantity to infinity. Also, like
running mode 3, it makes copies at roughly the same
timing as for a normal copy, without performing paper
detection or jam detection. Step Operation
** Running mode 5 2 [36 MODE SCREEN]
Running mode 5 is a process running mode. It con- press 4 Test Pattern Output.
sists of running mode 4 plus an operation consisting of 3 [Test Pattern Output Screen]
an optics each-time scan and an automatic paper feed Enter a value from the numeric keypad, then press
the SET key.
tray change.
4 Press the Copy Screen key.
5 [Basic Screen]
*Must remove paper from selected cassettes.
Press the START PRINT button, and output a test
**Must remove paper from all cassettes. pattern.
6 To output a different test pattern, press the C button
while pressing the P button, and repeat steps 3 to 5.
7 To end the test pattern output operation, press the
4 - 42
DIAGNOSTICS
01 Overall halftone
[Check item]
* When the density is set to 70 (halftone)
If white stripes, black stripes, or uneven density can be seen, determine which of the scanner system and the
printer system is abnormal.
* When the density is set to 0 (white)
If the test pattern is fogged, determine which of the scanner system and the printer system (writing section,
process section) is abnormal.
* When the density is set to 255 (black)
If the density is light, determine which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal.
* For details of setting the density, refer to [Pg. 4-53] "Test Pattern Density Adjustment" .
Test pattern
4 - 43
DIAGNOSTICS
02 Gray scale pattern

[Check item]
If the test pattern is fogged or the density is light, determine which of the processing system and γ correction
correction is abnormal. If the copy image is abnormal despite this test pattern being normal, either the image
processing system or the scanner system is abnormal.
Test pattern
4 - 44
DIAGNOSTICS

[Check item]
If you find an abnormality in the test pattern, check to see if the two lasers are emitting light normally.
Test pattern
4 - 45
DIAGNOSTICS

[Check item]
If you find an abnormality in the test pattern, check to see if the outputs of the lasers are uniform.
Test pattern
LD1 LD2
4 - 46
DIAGNOSTICS
11 Beam misalignment check

[Check item]
If you find an abnormality in the test pattern, check to see if position correction of the two laser beams takes
place normally.
Test pattern
4 - 47
DIAGNOSTICS
16 Linearity evaluation pattern

[Check item]
Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal. Items that can
be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, tilt image, and leading edge timing of the
printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the
scanner system is defective.
Test pattern
31mm 237mm Edge of paper
20mm
Edge of paper
190mm
m
0m
28
28
0m
m
190mm
4 - 48
DIAGNOSTICS
30 Read GA built-in pattern

[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the abnormal section is located before the image process-
ing board. If the test pattern is an 8-bit output and is normal, the fault lies in the CCD board before the image
processing board.
Test pattern
4 - 49
DIAGNOSTICS
32 Copy γ GA built-in pattern

[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the electronic RDH board is abnormal.
There are two test patterns which correspond to the 8-bit mode in which the electronic RDH is not used, and
the mode in which it is used, respectively. The test pattern checks the state of the electronic RDH board. If
an abnormality is found when an electronic RDH is used with several copies of the test pattern output, there is
an abnormality in the electronic RDH. In this case, an abnormality in the test pattern excludes any difference
in error dispersion.
Test pattern
4 - 50
DIAGNOSTICS
36 Write GA built-in pattern

[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the cause of an abnormality is located in or after the
image processing board. If the test pattern is abnormal, there is an abnormality in or after the image process-
ing board (PWM function or after).
Test pattern
4 - 51
DIAGNOSTICS
37 Electronic RDH GA built-in pattern

[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to determine if the electronic RDH board or image processing board is abnormal
in the case where the copy image is abnormal despite the 36 mode pattern being normal.
If the 36 mode pattern is normal but the test pattern is abnormal, there is an abnormality in either the elec-
tronic RDH or the image processing board.
Test pattern
4 - 52
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[19] Test Pattern Density Setting [20] Service Data Output

Set the density of the test pattern using the procedure de- Output a service data using the procedure described below.
scribed below. If the 36 mode menu screen is opened, then 4 Test Pattern
If 5 Test Pattern Density Setting Mode is selected using the Output Mode selected, the test pattern setting screen will be
36 mode menu screen, the test pattern density setting screen displayed.
will be displayed. Caution: Do not operate for any mode that is not particularly
specified.
[Test Pattern Density Setting Screen]
[Test Pattern Output Screen]
Test pattern density setting
255 255 (0~255) Test pattern output mode
<00>
Step Operation
2 [36 MODE SCREEN]
Step Operation
press 5 Test Pattern Density Mode. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
3 [Test Pattern Density Setting Screen] 2 [36 MODE SCREEN]
Enter a value (0 (white) to 255 (black))from the press 4 Test Pattern Output.
numeric keypad, then press the SET key. 3 [Test Pattern Output Screen]
4 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key.
Enter a value from the numeric keypad, then press
5 [36 Mode Screen]
Press 4 Test Pattern Output. the SET key.
6 Enter a value from the numeric key pad, then press 4 Press the Copy Screen key.
the SET key. Press the Copy Screen key. 5 [Basic Screen]
Press the START PRINT button, and output a test
7 To output a different test pattern, press the C
pattern.
button while pressing the P button, and repeat steps
3 to 5. 6 To output a different test pattern, press the C button
8 To end the Test Pattern output operation, press the while pressing the P button, and repeat steps 3 to 5.
PREVIOUS SCREEN key. 7 To end the test pattern output operation, press the
4 - 53
DIAGNOSTICS
Service data printing item Classification Data No. Item

The relationship between the No. to be input using the test Normal 009 Charging current
pattern screen and the output contents is shown below. paper 010 Developing bias
400 dpi 011 Transfer current
012 Separation AC
Input No. Description Number of
013 Separation DC
items
014 Grid voltage
40 Field monitor mode *1 46
015 Developing sleeve rotational speed
41 Copy quantity limit for each 30
016 Laser power 1 (MPC1)
replacement part
(Refer to [7] "Copy count for each part
018 PWMOFFSET1
that requires replacement".)
019 PWMOFFSET2
42 Copy quantity count for each 30
Normal 020 Charging current
replacement part paper 021 Developing bias
(Refer to [7] "Copy count for each part 600 dpi 022 Transfer current
that requires replacement".)
023 Separation AC
43 Number of sheets passed through the 2
024 Separation DC
ADF paper
025 Grid voltage
(Refer to [6] "Data collection 1".)
026 Developing sleeve rotational speed
44 Number of jams for each cause 59
45 Number of copies for each operation 68
029 PWMOFFSET1
mode
030 PWMOFFSET2
Thick 031 Charging current
46 Number of SCs for each F code 89 paper 032 Developing bias
(Refer to [6] "Data collection 4".) Common 033 Transfer current
47 Number of SCs for each E code 32
034 Separation AC
035 Separation DC
036 Grid voltage
Thick 037 Developing sleeve rotational speed
*1 List of data items for the field monitoring mode paper 038 Laser power 1 (MPC1)
400 dpi 039 Laser power 1 (MPC2)
Classification Data No. Item 040 PWMOFFSET1
Common 001 Max density error 1 count 041 PWMOFFSET2
002 Max density error 2 count Thick 042 Developing sleeve rotational speed
003 Max density error 3 count paper 043 Laser power 1 (MPC1)
004 γ error 1 count 600 dpi 044 Laser power 1 (MPC2)
005 γ error 2 count 045 PWMOFFSET1
006 Separation claw ON timing 046 PWMOFFSET2
007 Separation claw OFF timing
Common 047 L detection adjustment value
008 Max density control threshold 048 Control (C) ROM version
049 Operation (O1) ROM version
053 Image processing (IP) ROM version
054 Total count
4 - 54
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
47 MODE
[1] 47 /Multi Mode Setting Method Step Operation
1. 47 mode 1 Turn on the main switch while holding down on 4
and 7 of the copy quantity setting button.
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/output
2 [47 MODE (I/O CHECK MODE) SCREEN]
check function) to check and adjust the various signals
Using the copy quantity setting button, enter the
and loads.
code.
3 Check on the input signal check result displayed in
2. Setting method IN:, the second row of the message area.
(1) To start 47 mode 4 To check the output load, press Start Print button.
a. Turn off the main switch. 5 Press Stop/Clear button to end the output check.
b. Turn on the main switch again while holding down on 4 6 For other checks, enter new code using the copy
and 7 of the copy quantity setting button. quantity setting button.
c. Check if the 47 mode is started up when "I/O check 7 Turn off the main switch to exit the 47 mode.
mode" is displayed in the message area.
(2) Input check Reference:
a. Using the copy quantity setting button, enter the code • No data will be displayed on the second row of the mes-
for the desired signal (sensor, etc.) by referring to the I/ sage area when the 47 mode is activated. If any number is
O check code list. entered, it will be displayed.
b. The entered code will be displayed in <>, the second • For moving to the other code, simply enter new code.
row of the message area. • The new code will overwrite the old one.
c. The firstly entered number will be shifted to the left end. • To reset the machine without turning off the power, press
d. Check on the code status displayed with H or L in IN:, Stop/Clear button while holding down P button. (The 47
the second row of the message area. mode will be in the initial state.)
Caution: (Caution)
Compare the input signal status with one displayed in the 47-00 :Exposure lanp
message area. H and L show the signal level inputted in 31:Optics scanning position autmatic correction
the CB (control board). 34:Shading correction
The following screen is displayed when selecting the above
(3) Output check mentioned mode.
a. Using the copy quantity setting button, enter the code
for the desired output load by referring to the I/O check
code list.
b. Press Start Print button.
Depending on the output, a load will be activated or a
signal will be output.
Copy button Code Description

Before pressing Input Input signal level indication
After pressing Output Output load operation/signal
(4) To end 47 mode

a. Press stop/clear button to cancel the operation.
b. Turn off the main switch to cancel the 47 mode.
47-00 : When selecting the "Yes" Lamp and Fan ON.

When selecting the "No"·····Lamp ON.
47-31 : When selecting the "Yes"····Conducting a full optics scan.

When selecting the "No"·····Conducting a slight optics scan.
47-34 : When selecting the "Yes"····Conducting a shading correction.

When selecting the "No"·····Conducting a slight optics scan.
4 - 55
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
3. Multi mode Step Operation

This mode exists within the 47 mode. It enables multiple I/ 1 Enter the 47 mode.
O checks from a single I/O check code. 2 [47 MODE (I/O CHECK MODE) SCREEN]
Using the copy quantity setting button, enter the
4. Setting method code.
3 Press P button.
Follow the methods shown below after starting up the 47
4 Enter the multi number using the copy quantity
mode.
setting button.
5 Press P button.
(1) To check input 6 Check on the input signal check result displayed in
a. Using the copy quantity setting button, enter the check IN:, the second row of the message area.
code for the desired I/O. 7 To check the output load, press Start Print button.
b. The 47 mode code will be displayed in <>, the second 8 Press Stop/Clear button to end the output check.
row of the message area. 9 Turn off the main switch to exit the 47 mode.
c. Press P button.
d. "-" (hyphen) will be displayed, following the 47 mode
Reference:
code in <>.(only codes that support the multi mode can
• To check another multi number in the same code, press
be used)
P button after completing the step 8. Only data shown
e. Enter the desired multi number using the copy quantity
in <> will be cleared, then enter another multi number.
setting button. (Refer to the multi mode list.)
• To return to the normal 47 mode, press Stop/Clear but-
f. The multi number will be displayed, following the 47
ton while holding P button after completing the step 8.
mode code and "-" in <>.
(The screen will return to the initial state in the 47 mode.)
[I/O Check Mode Message Area]
I/O Check Mode

<10-01> IN:-- OUT:--
g. Press P button.
h. Check on the code status displayed with H or L in IN:,
the second row of the message area.
(2) To check output

a. Press the Start Print button.
b. Press Stop/Clear button after the output check is done.
(3) To end multi mode

a. Turn off the main switch to exit the 47 mode.
4 - 56
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[2] Initial Setting [4] L Detection Adjustment
• Adjustment data is reset to factory defaults. • It adjusts automatically by sensing toner density.
1. Setting method • Conduct this adjustment during installation and when
replacing developer.
Step Operation (display) Operation point
Note: Always replace the developer before adjusting.
1 While pressing the page quantity Copy quantity
If developer that is used is adjusted, the toner density
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main setting button
of the developer in use will become the reference,
switch. Main switch
resulting in an incorrect adjustment value.
2 Press “093” by means of the copy Copy quantity
1. Setting method
quantity setting button. setting button
Confirm that 93 appears in the Step Operation (display) Operation point
message display box. 1 While pressing the page quantity Copy quantity
3 Press the START PRINT button. START PRINT buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main setting button
button. switch. Main switch
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
[3] Adjustment Mode List
play portion displays “95”.
• It can display values from adjustment modes of the machine. • A agitator screw in a developing button
• However, adjustment data cannot be changed from this unit rotates, and L sensing sen-
display. sor is automatically read.
1. Setting method • After about 5 minutes, this
Step Operation (display) Operation point adjustment automatically stops,
1 While pressing the page quantity Copy quantity and the OUT item display in the
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main setting button message display box changes
switch. Main switch from [NOW] to [FIN].
Confirm that 94 appears in the
message display box.
button.
4 - 57
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[5] Dmax Level Correction [6] Gamma Correction Level Adjustment
Caution: Be sure to carry out this check before performing Caution: Always perform this adjustment after completing
laser (gradation) adjustment. the laser adjustment (gradation adjustment).
1. Setting method 1. Adjustment method
Step Operation (display) Operation point Step Operation (display) Operation point
1 While pressing the copy quantity Copy quantity 1 While pressing the copy quantity Copy quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main setting button buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main setting button
switch. Main switch switch. Main switch
2 Press “013” by means of the copy Copy quantity 2 Press “014” by means of the copy Copy quantity
quantity setting button. setting button quantity setting button. setting button
Confirm that 13 appears in the Confirm that 14 appears in the
message display box. “113” 600dpi message display box. (114 in the
3 Press the START PRINT button. START PRINT case of 600dpi)
* The drum/developing system button. 3 Press the START PRINT button. START PRINT
operates, and adjustment of * After about 30 seconds, button.
the developing performance adjustment stops automatically,
takes place. and [FIN] appears on the OUT
* After about 30 seconds, item display in the message
adjustment stops display box.
automatically, and [FIN]
appears on the OUT item
display in the message
display box.
4 - 58
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[7] Input Check List

State of display and
Multi signal source
Classification Code Symbol Name
mode L
H
000 CVR CVR FB signal Normal Abnormal
001 TLD Toner level detecting signal Enough toner Less toner
002 DB Internal temperature detecting signal * *
003 TH1 TH1 signal * *
Analog signal 004 TH2 TH2 signal * *
005 Humidity sensor signal * *
006
007 TCSB Dmax MONI signal * *
008 TCSB Dmax signal * *
009 TCSB Drum jamming signal * *
010 PS12,13,15, M No-paper detecting signal <Contents of M> Paper No paper
141,140 -Common to 10, 12, and 19- OFF ON
012 PS16,17, M Tray upper limit detecting 1: Upper Drawer
143,142 2: Lower Drawer
Paper feed 016 M Paper size signal 3: LCT right
<Display for each paper size> 4: LCT left 6: ST-3500
51/2" × 81/2" = 18, -Only to 10-
11" × 81/2" = 17, 81/2" × 11"R = 16, 5: By-pass feed
81/2" × 14" = 14, 11" × 17" = 12 -Only to 16-
019 PS20,21, M Pre-try detecting 1: M/C upper OFF ON
210,200 2: By-pass feed
020 M Paper feed sensor signal
PS14 1: Regist PS
PS18 2: No feed PS OFF ON
PS19 3: Optical synchronization sensor
Paper feed
PS401 4: LCT pass detect sensor
and
PS407 5: LCT feed detect sensor
conveyance 022 PS25 Paper exit sensor signal ON OFF
023 M Interlock signals
PS11 1: Right side plate
PS160 2: LCT right side plate OFF ON
PS158 3: Left side plate
PS24 4: Sensing whether or not the fixing lever is closed
030 M Optics sensor signals
PS7 1: OPT TMG
PS3 2: Shading
Optics PS5 3: Return OFF ON
PS4 4: Regist
PS45 5: APS timing
PS2 6: Center sensor
PS1 7: Over run
4 - 59
DIAGNOSTICS
State of display and

Multi signal source
mode
H L
060 M RADF Interlock signals
PS308 1: ADF open/close interlock
PS303 2: Reversal portion interlock OPEN CLOSE
ADF
and
RADF 064 M RADF Original detecting
PS301 1: No paper detecting 1 NO
PS304 2: No paper detecting 2 PAPER PAPER
PS310 3: Small size paper detecting
076 M Finisher I/O check

PS2 1: Paper leave sensor check
PS3 2: Upper limit sensor check
PS4 3: Entrance sensor check
PS5 4: Stacker pass sensor check
Sorter PS6 5: Paper exit sensor check
and PS7 6: Staple mode paper leave sensor check
Finisher PS8 7: Coordinate plate HP sensor check ON OFF
PS9 8: Paper exit belt HP sensor check
PS11 10: Staple move sensor check
PS12 11: Paper exit move sensor check
PS14 13: Staple (inner side) detect sensor check
PS15 14: Staple (inner side) HP detect sensor check
PS16 15: Staple (front side) detect sensor check
PS17 16: Staple (front side) HP detect sensor check
PS18 17: Shift HP detect sensor check
PS20 19: Stacker no paper detect sensor check
PS21 20: Stapler rotation (vertical) detect sensor check
PS22 21: Stapler rotation (slanting) detect sensor check
MS1 22: Interlock check
080 PS158 Interlock signal OFF ON
082 M Paper detecting signal

PS152 1: ADU Paper feed
PS153 2: ADU reversal detection
PS157 3: ADU gate
PS155 4: ADU paper exit 2
PS156 5: ADU paper exit 3
PS151 6: ADU no paper OFF ON
ADU
4 - 60
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[8] Output Check List

Impossible to install/
Multi change to write in the
mode field
000 L1 Exposure lamp
001 M10 Toner supply motor
002 HV1 M Charging ×
003 HV2 M Transfer ×
004 HV2 M Separation (AC) ×
Analog signal 005 HV2 Transfer + Separation (DC) ×
006 HV2 M Separation (AC + DC) ×
007 HV1 M Grid
008 Dmax / γ LED ×
009 JAM detecting LED
010 HV1 Guide plate
011 HV1 M bias
012
013 Dmax level
014 γ correction level adjustment
015 M Process adjustment
01: The following data in the main body is cleared.
Temporary
B1 (copy count for each size) , F0 (Number of sheets passed ×
through the ADF)
F1 (counter for each mode), J0 (JAM count) , E0 (F count)
E2 (E count) , E3 (adjustment error count)
016
017
018 Dmax level adjustment + γ correction level
019
020 M 1st paper feed solenoid
1: Main body upper 2: Main body lower
3: LCT right (1000) 4: LCT left (1500)
5: By-pass feed
021 M Paper feed motor
1: —
2: LCT (by-pass feed speed)
3: LCT (main body paper feed speed)
4: ST-3500
Paper feed 022 1st paper feed clutch
1: Main body upper 2: Main body lower
3: LCT right (1000) 4: LCT left (1500)
5: By-pass feed 6: Main body upper middle
7: Main body lower middle 8: LCT middle
9: ST-3500
023
024
025 MC3 2nd paper feed clutch
028 SD5 Conveyance up/down SD
029 SD4 Separation claw solenoid
4 - 61
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
mode field
030
031 M12 Optics scanning position automatic correction
032 M5 M Polygon motor 0: 400dpi 1:600dpi rotation
033
Optics 034 Shading correction + AGC + AOC
035
036
037
038 ×
039
040 M1 M Main motor
041 M4 Drum motor
042 M Fan motor
1: Main fan (ON: H rotation / OFF: L rotation)
2: Optical fan
3: Suction fan
4: Image processing fan (ON: H rotation / OFF: L rotation)
5: Electronic RDH fan (ON: H rotation / OFF: L rotation)
6: ADU fan
7: Developing fan
Main body 8: ADU de-curl fan (inner side)
9: ADU de-curl fan (front side)
043 C(T) Total counter
044
045 L2,L3,L4 M Fixing heater lamp
1: Main heater
2: Main heater + sub heater
3: Main heater + sub heater + lower heater
046 M7 Charge cleaning motor
047 M8 Transfer/Separation cleaning motor/separation cleaning motor
048 Operation unit (all are lit)
049
050 M3 M Setting the rotation number of the developing driving motor in ×
400 dpi
051 PCL PCL
Intrinsic 052 TSL TSL
function 053 M35 Developing screw motor
054 M10 Toner automatic replenishing (L detecting)
055 Message test
056 M7 Compulsory returning the charge cleaning motor
057 M8 Compulsory returning the transfer/separation cleaning motor
060 M Drive (RADF)
1: Paper feed motor (normal)
2: Paper feed motor (reverse)
064 M Switch (RADF)
1: Paper feeding plate solenoid
2: Reverse solenoid
RADF 3: Conveyance belt (forward)
4: Conveyance belt (backward)
5: Paper exiting motor
069 M Test mode
1: One side document continuously
2: One side document one by one
3: Both side document continuously
4: Both side document one by one
4 - 62
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
mode field
Finisher I/O check
M1 M 1: Conveyance drive
M7 M 2: Paper exit drive
M14 M 3: Stacker entrance drive
M2 M 16: Roller shift drive (one revolution)
M2 M 17: Roller shift drive (forward)
M2 M 18: Roller shift drive (return)
M8 M 19: Paper exit port drive
M3 M 22: Up-down tray drive up
M3 M 23: Up-down tray drive down
Finisher 075 M12 M 24: Stapler rotation drive (out)
M12 M 25: Stapler rotation drive (in)
M5 M 32: Cordination plate drive
M11 M 35: Stapler drive shift
M10 M 38: Stapler drive (front)
M9 M 40: Stapler drive (rear)
SD5 M 48: Stapler solenoid
SD2 M 49: Printer paper exit solenoid
SD4 M 50: Paper exit port solenoid
SD1 M 51: Gate solenoid
SD3 M 52: Shift solenoid
M 53: "Tray up" running mode
080 M151 ADU paper feed motor
084 ADU load
ADU M 1: ADUPFCL (CL 151) 2:ADU Reversal CL (CL 152)
3: ADU TIMING CL (CL 153)
4: ADU Gate SD (SD 152)
090 PM counter clear
091 Drum counter clear
092 Process initial setting (Not Field Adjustable) ×
Adjustment 093 Field initial setting (data return in delivery from process) ×
process and 094 Adjustment mode list display mode*
others 095 L-detecting reference value automatic adjustment (Developing ×
counter reset)
096 Process delivery completing setting (Cannot be used in the field.) ×
097 M Lighting setting
Temporary 113 Dmax level correction (600dpi)
114 Gamma correction level (600dpi)
160
180
190
Special mode 191
192
193
197 Electronic RDH SIMM capacity check
198 Electrical RDH SIMM check
199
4 - 63
DIAGNOSTICS
1. Electronic RDH SIMM Check

Use the following procedure to judge whether or not SIMM is
satisfactory.
Start
OK
Install the test SIMM
on the electronic RDH board, Test SIMM = GOOD
and execute 47-198.
NG
Install a new SIMM

on the electronic RDH board
Test SIMM =NG
instead of the test SIMM,
OK
and execute
47-198.
NG
Install the new SIMM NG

on a new electronic RDH board, The cause lies in a part other than
and execute 47-198. SIMM or the electronic RDH.
OK
Install the test SIMM OK

on a new electronic RDH board, Test SIMM = GOOD
and execute 47-198.
NG
Test SIMM = NG
4 - 64
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[1] Adjustment for Centering Error 3. Centering adjustment of the lower tray
1. Tools used
• Driver (phillips screw)
• NTC (A3/11"x17")
Fixing screw
2. Centering adjustment of the upper tray
Fixing screw
Step Operation
1 Pull out the lower tray.
2 Loosen 4 screws on the front cover of the tray.
3 Move the cover forward/backward.
4 After adjustment, tighten 4 screws and conduct
copying for measuring centering error.
5 Repeat Procedures 1 through 4 until the centering
Step Operation error is within the standard.
1 Pull out the upper tray.
2 Loosen 2 fixing screws on the center unit.
3 Move the side guide ass'y forward/backward.
4 After adjustment, tighten 2 screws and conduct
copying for measuring centering error.
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 until the centering error
is within the standard.
4 - 65
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
4. Centering adjustment of the by-pass tray 5. Centering adjustment of the LCT tray
Centering error
Adjustment screw adjustment plate Front cover
Fixing screw
Fixing screw
By-pass tray
Fixing screw

1 Loosen adjustment screw and lower the by-pass 1 Pull out the LCT tray.
tray. 2 Loosen screws (one each) on the centering error
2 Move the guide forward/backward. adjustment plates on both sides of the tray and
3 After adjustment, conduct copying for measuring loosen 2 screws on the front cover of the tray.
centering error. 3 Move the adjustment plates forward/backward
4 Repeat Procedures 1 through 3 until the centering until the centering error is within the standard.
error is within the standard.
Standard value: Mis-centering ....... Within 3 mm Standard value: Mis-centering ....... Within 3 mm
Within 3 mm Center of image Within 3 mm Center of image
Center of paper Center of paper
4 - 66
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
6. Centering adjustment of the ADU 7. Centering adjustment of ST-3500
Fixing screw
Upper cover screw
Front cover
Fixing screw
Centering
error Set screws Set screws
adjustment
plate

1 Pull out the ADU. 1 Open the upper cover.
2 Loosen screws (two each) on the centering error 2 Slacken the side guide set screws (four each) at the
adjustment plates on both sides of the tray and front and rear of the tray.
loosen 2 screws on the front cover of the tray. 3 Move each side guide back and forth until the mis-
3 Move the centering error adjustment plate forward/ centering of the paper is within the standard value
backward until the centering error is reduced until range. (Move both guides by the same amount,
within the standard. using the stamped marks on the guide reinforcing
Note: Move left and right plate in the opposite plates (front/rear) and the LCT base plate below
direction. them as a rough guide.)
Standard value: Mis-centering ....... Within 3 mm
Within 3 mm Center of image
Center of paper
4 - 67
DIAGNOSTICS-1
DIAGNOSTICS
[2] 400% Leading Edge Timing and Black

Line Check
This adjustment is not normally necessary but is performed

when faulty timing or black lines occur at a magnification of
4.0X.
Step Operation
1 Load paper into the top tray.
2 Place a copy chart on the original glass and set
the magnification to 400%.
3 Press the START PRINT button, and check the
leading edge timing and check for black lines.
Standard value: ± 3mm or less
4 If outside the standard value, adjust the position
of PS4 (paper feed re-start) on the back panel of
the optical unit.
5 Repeat steps 3 through 4 until within the standard
value.
6 After this adjustment is completed, adjust the
leading edge timing and amount of leading edge
erasure at 100%.
4 - 68
CONTENTS
5. RADF
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................... 5-1
CENTER CROSS-SECTIONAL DRAWING ............... 5-2
EXTERNALS .............................................................. 5-2
DRIVE SECTION ....................................................... 5-3
PAPER FEED SECTION ............................................ 5-4
[1] Composition ................................................... 5-4
[2] Mechanisms ................................................... 5-4
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly ...................... 5-5
[4] Paper Feed Control ...................................... 5-11
CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................... 5-12
[1] Composition ................................................. 5-12
[2] Mechanisms ................................................. 5-12
[4] Conveyance Control .................................... 5-16
REVERSAL SECTION ............................................. 5-17
[1] Composition ................................................. 5-17
[2] Mechanisms ................................................. 5-17
[4] Reversal/Exit Control ................................... 5-18
ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................... 5-20
ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING ............ 5-21
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ........................ 5-22
RADF OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ...................... 5-23
RADF CONTROL BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...... 5-24
RADF TIMING CHART (A4, ONE SIDE ORIGINALS,
THREE SHEETS SET) ...................................................... 5-26
RADF TIMING CHART (A4, TWO SIDE ORIGINALS,
TWO SHEETS SET) .......................................................... 5-26
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. Type 3. Machine Data
Type: ADF with original automatic re- Power supply: 24 V/5 V DC (supplied from the
versal function main body)
Max power
consumption: 90 VA
2. Functions Weight: Approx. 12.5 kg/27.5 lbs
Originals size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R and Machine dimensions:
A5R/11" × 17", 81/2" × 14", 81/2" ×
11", 81/2" × 11"R, 51/2" × 81/2" and
51/2" × 81/2"R 24"
(All sizes can be detected by APS)
Kinds of originals
Ordinary paper: 60 to 90 g/m2 (16lb to 24lb) fine
quality paper
21"
Special paper: Paper feed and conveyance
ability may sometimes be inferior
to those of 60 to 90 g/m2 (16lb to
24lb) fine quality paper.
The following kinds of paper
cannot be used: 8"
4"
4"
* OHP film
* Label paper
* Offset masters
* Pasted originals
4. Maintenance
Original curling: Max 10 mm
Maintenance: Same as the main body
5. Operating Environment
Original Temperature: 10 to 33°C/50 to 91°F
Curling Humidity: 20 to 80% RH
Note: The contents of this manual may be changed without

prior notice for the sake of improvement.
Max number of
Stacked originals: 50 (80 g/m2) (21lb)
Original conveyance
speed:
Mode Original size Feed speed

One-sided original
55 sheets/
to A4/81/2" × 11"
minute
One-sided copy
5-1
CENTER CROSS-SECTIONAL DRAWING
Switching guide
Feed roller
Paper feed
roller Paper exit roller
Registration drive
roller
Original
paper feed
tray Double feed Conveyance roller
prevention Conveyance belt
roller Registration
driven roller
Drive roller
EXTERNALS
Original protection cover
Original paper
feed tray
Paper exit cover
5-2
DRIVE SECTION
Driven roller
Conveyance roller
Conveyance belt
Drive roller
Paper exit motor
(M303)
Registration drive
roller
Conveyance motor
(M302)
Original push
pressure plate
Paper feed motor

(M301)
Double feed
prevention roller
Feed roller
Push pressure motor
(M304)
5-3
PAPER FEED SECTION
[1] Composition
Conveyance motor
Original push (M302)
pressure plate
Drive motor (M301)
Push pressure motor (M304)
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Paper feed Stack automatic feed (upward
feed)
Double feed prevention Double feed prevention roller Push pressure motor
Original size detection Original passage time detection (M304)
method
(Size detected by the number of
count pulses from PS302.)
Push pressure
spring
1. Paper Feed Drive Section
The drive section performs the following kinds of control Original push
when originals are being fed. pressure plate
a. Original push pressure plate pressing and release
operations Swing lever
The drive force from the push pressure motor (M304) is
transferred to the swing lever via the lifting cam.
Cam
The swing lever is mounted on the original push pressure
plate. The drive force from the swing lever causes the
original push pressure plate to move up and down. As a
result, the original push pressure plate alternately pushes
against and separates from the original in the original paper
feed tray. The push pressure spring maintains the paper
feed pressure constant.
5-4
b. Control of the paper feed roller
The paper feed roller is controlled by the paper feed motor
Hinge retaining
(M301). plate
When the paper feed motor rotates in the forward direction,
the drive force is transmitted to the paper feed roller and the
feed roller via the paper feed drive shaft, causing pre-paper
feed to take place.
c. Control of the registration roller

The resistration roller is controlled by the paper feed roller
(M301). When pre-paper feed takes place, the paper feed
roller rotates in reverse, and the drive force is transmitted to
the resistration drive roller and the registration driven roller
via the resistration drive roller shaft, causing paper feed to
take place.
Registration driven roller

removal.
b. Adjustment
(1) Slacken the four set screws of the hinge retaining
plate.
Original push
pressure plate
Paper feed
motor (M301)
Push pressure Hinge retaining plates
motor (M034)

1. Removing and Re-installing the ADF
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the rear main body cover. Set screws Set screws
(2) Disconnect the ADF connector (CN102) from the back
of the machine.
(3) Remove the set screw, then remove the original paper
feed tray.
(4) Open the ADF 90°, then remove the two set screws
from each of the left and right hinges.
(5) Remove the hinge retaining plate, then remove the
ADF.
5-5
(2) Open the RADF unit and set the two jigs (ADF
positioning block) to the positioning piece (front, rear).
ADF Positioning
positioning piece
blocks (front,rear)
ADF (4) Open the RADF unit slowly and tighten the four set
positioning screws of the hinge retaining plate after removing the
block jig.
(5) When the RADF unit is closed, place the two jig
(spacer/A) onto the platen glass opposite to the
positioning piece (rear) and the protrusion (rear).
(3) Close the RADF unit slowly and move the RADF unit
right and left, until the jig comes into contact with the
Positioning
end of the scale plate. piece (rear) Protrusion (rear)
RADF
ADF positioning
block
Scale plate
Jig (spacer/A) Jig (spacer/A)
Front of main
body
5-6
(6) Close the RADF unit slowly. c. Check
(7) Slacken the four height adjustment screws. Clearance between position piece (left side - front) and
platen glass of the RADF unit.
Standard: less than 0.1 mm
(1) Put the two sheet of the copy paper (80g/m2, 200mm
× 20mm) between positioning piece (left side - front)
and, and pull them.
(2) If they are pull lightly, since the clearance is too big,
readjust the height.
Height adjustment
screws
Positioning piece (left side - front)

(8) Close the RADF and press the rear of the unit down so Copy paper
that the positoning piece (rear) and the protrusion
(rear) contact the jigs. Tighten the four screws.
Less than 0.1mm

Platen glass
Clearance between the platen glass and the protrusion

(right side - front) of the RADF unit.
Standard: less than 0.6 mm
(1) Check that the clearance is less than 0.6 mm with a
visual inspection.
Height adjustment
screw
(9) Open the RADF unit and remove the jigs.
5-7
2. Replacing the Paper Feed Rubber and Feed (4) Remove the two set screws and remove the feed roller
Rubber ass'y.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the four set screws, then remove main body Set screw
base plate (A). Set screw
(2) Disconnect the relay connector.
Set screws Feed roller ass'y
Main body
base plate (A)
Set screws
Relay
connector
(5) Remove the stop ring, then remove the one-way clutch.
(6) Remove the two stop rings.
(3) Remove the four set screws and remove the paper Stop rings
feed guide plate (lower) ass'y.
Set screws
one-way clutch
Set screws
Stop ring
Paper feed
guide plate
(lower) ass'y
5-8
(7) Remove the two bearings from the metal bracket, then (11) Re-install the above parts in the opposite sequence to
pull out the feed roller together with the shaft in the removal.
direction of the arrow. Caution:
1. When re-installing each pulley, do not forget to re-
install each pin as well.
2. Ensure that the mounting direction of the rubber is
correct.
Bearing
Bearing
Paper feed roller
(8) Slacken the set screw, and remove the E ring.

(9) Remove each bearing and each pulley from the shaft,
then remove the paper feed roller and feed roller from
the shaft.
(10) Remove the paper feed rubberA/B and feed rubber
from each roller.
Feed roller
Pin
Feed rubber/B
Bearing
Pin
Pulley
Pulley
Paint
mark
Set screw
Bearing
Pin
Pulley
E ring
Paper
feed
roller
Paper feed Pulley
rubber/A
5-9
3. Replacing the Double Feed Prevention Roller Caution:
a. Procedure 1. Insert the six claws of the paper feed guide plate
(1) Remove the four set screws, then remove main body (lower) into the square hole of the paper feed reinforcing
base plate (A). plate securely.
(2) Disconnect the relay connector (CN134). 2. When installing paper feed guide plate (lower) ass'y,
(3) Remove the four set screws and remove the paper connect the coupling securely.
feed guide plate ass'y (lower) from the ADF.
(4) Remove the spring from the paper feed guide plate Paper feed guide plate
(lower). (lower) ass'y
(5) Remove the two set screws, then remove the paper
feed guide plate (lower) from the paper feed guide
ass'y (lower).
Coupling
Set screw
Paper feed guide plate (lower)
Set screw
Square
hole
Square hole
Spring
(6) Remove the stop ring, then remove the double feed
prevention roller while pulling out the shaft.
Stop ring
Shaft

removal.
5 - 10
[4] Paper Feed Control 2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) PS301 (PS301 → RADF CB)
Original detection signal at the paper feed roller entrance
24VDC 103-A1
24VDC 103-A2 [L]: Original exists.
M301 DRIVE A 103-A3 [H]: Original does not exist.
M301
M301 DRIVE A 103-A4
(2) PS304 (PS304 → RADF CB)
M301 DRIVE B 103-A5
M301 DRIVE B 103-A6 Signal which detects that the paper feed tray is empty
[L]: Original exists.
24VDC 103-B8 [H]: Original does not exist.
M304
M304 DRIVE 103-B10 (3) PS305 (PS305 → RADF CB)
Paper feed original detection signal
SGND 104-B1 PS301 [H]: Original does not exist.
PS301 102-1
(4) PS309 (PS309 → RADF CB)
5VDC 104-A4 Signal which detects that the original push pressure
SGND 104-B4 PS304
PS304 102-4
plate is in the home position
[L]: In home position.
5VDC 104-A5 [H]: Not in home position.
101-1 SGND 104-B5 PS305
24VDC 100-11
101-2 PS305 102-5 (5) PS310 (PS310 → RADF CB)
PGND 100-12
5VDC 100-10 101-4 Signal which detects a paper size of A5R/51/2" × 81/2"
5VDC 104-A9
SGND 100-6 101-5
SGND 104-B9 [L]: A5R/51/2" × 81/2"
PS309
DF TXD 100-1 101-6 PS309 102-9 [H]: Original does not exist.
DF ACK 100-8 101-7 (6) DFRXD (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)
DF RXD 100-3 101-8 5VDC 104-A10
DF REQ 1007 101-9 SGND 104-B10 PS310 Serial data line which transmits the operation status of
PS310 102-10 the main body CB to the RADF
CB
RADFCB (7) DFREQ (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)
RADF operation start request signal
Paper feed takes place as a result of the transfer of drive force b. Output signals
from M301 (paper feed) to the paper feed roller and the feed (1) M301 DRIVE A, A, B, B (RADF CB → M301)
roller. M301 is controlled by the RADFCB (RADF control M301 (paper feed) ON/OFF drive signal
board).
1. Operation 24V
a. Original pressing operation 0V
When the RADF receives a control signal from the main
body, M304 (push pressure) goes ON, and the original (2) M304 DRIVE (RADF CB → M301)
starts to be pressed against the paper feed roller by the M304 (push pressure) ON/OFF drive signal
original push pressure plate. When PS301 (original set) [L]: M304 ON
goes ON → OFF (light cutoff → transmission), M304 stops. [H]: M304 OFF
The original push pressure plate pressing/release operations (3) TXD (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)
take place for each original. Serial data line which transmits the operation status of
the RADF to the CB.
b. Paper feed operation (4) ACK (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)
When PS309 (up/down) goes ON, M301 goes ON after the Clock signal for signal synchronization when
specified period, and the paper feed operation starts. (pre- communication is taking place between the RADFCB
paper feed) and the main body CB.
PS305 (paper feed) detects the leading edge of the original
as a result of M301 going ON, then after the specified period
M301 rotates in reverse, and the original is conveyed onto
the platen glass. (re-paper feed)
5 - 11
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1] Composition
Conveyance belt
Drive roller
Driven roller
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Conveyance belt rotation Forward/reverse bidirectional
rotation method
*1 Original stopping Stopper-less control method
Scale plate Fixed type
*1: Stopper-less control PS302

a. During paper feed
The original received from the paper feed section is conveyed Scale plate
to a point 2 mm away from the scale plate by the forward Original
rotation of the conveyance belt, then stops. In this case, the
conveyance belt stops rotating in the forward direction after
the specified number of pulses from when PS302 (original
passage) detects the trailing edge of the original.
5 - 12
b. During reversal [3] Disassembly and Re-assembly
During original reversal, the original received from the 1. Screws That Must not be Removed
reversal section is conveyed to a point 2 mm away from the Do not remove the feed driven roller pressing force
scale plate by the reverse rotation of the conveyance belt, adjustment screws and original push pressure plate
then stops. In this case, the conveyance belt stops rotating adjustment screws.
in the reverse direction after the specified number of pulses
from when PS307 (original reversal) detects the leading
edge of the original.
PS 307
Drive roller
Scale plate Do not

remove. Do not
Original remove.
2. Replacing the Conveyance Belt

a. Procedure
(1) Remove the three set screws, then remove main body
base plate (B).
Main body base Set screws

plate (B)
5 - 13
(2) Remove the two set screws fixing the front of the base (5) Remove the conveyance belt.
plate ass'y.
(3) Remove the two set screws and remove positioning
piece/F.
Positioning Base plate

piece/F ass'y Conveyance belt

removal.
(4) Pull the tension board/F ass'y in the direction of the 3. Replacing the Drive Roller
arrow, then remove the driven roller. a. Procedure
(1) Remove the five set screws, then remove the body base
plate (C).
(2) Remove the three set screws, then remove the body
Tension board/F ass'y
base plate (B).
(3) Remove the conveyance belt. (Refer to 2.Replacing the
Driven roller conveyance belt)
Body base plate (B)

Set screws
Body base
plate (C)
Set screws
5 - 14
(4) Slacken the two hex socket screws then remove the (3) Slacken the four set screws of the conveyance motor
drive roller in the direction of the arrow. (M302).
(4) Press the tension gauge (full scale 300g) against the
Hex socket Drive roller center of the timing belrt.
screws (5) When the belt bend value is 5 mm, adjust the tension
adjusting screw so that it is within specifications.
Standard: 200g ± 20g

(when belt bend value is 5mm) Tension adjusting screws
Tension gauge
Conveyance pulley
Set screws
removal.
4. Adjusting the tension of conveyance drive

timing belt
a. Procedure
Set screw
(1) Remove the ADF unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the five set screws, then remove the Body
base plate (C).
(6) Tighten the set screw of the conveyance motor.
Body base plate (C)
removal.
Set screws
5 - 15
[4] Conveyance Control 2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) PS305 (PS305 → RADFCB)
Paper feed original detection signal
24VDC 103-A7
M302 DRIVE A 103-A9 [H]: Original does not exist.
M302
M302 DRIVE A 103-A10
(2) DFRXD (MAIN BODY → RADFCB)
M302 DRIVE B 103-A11
M302 DRIVE B 103-B1 Serial data line which transmits the operation status of
the main body CB to the RADF
(3) DFREQ (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)
b. Output signals
(1) M302 DRIVE A, A, B, B (RADF CB → M302)
M302 (paper feed) ON/OFF drive signal
24V
5VDC 104-A5 0V
24VDC 100-11 101-1 SGND 104-B5 PS305
PGND 100-12 101-2 PS305 102-5
5VDC 100-10 101-4 (2) TXD (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)
SGND 100-6 101-5 Serial data line which transmits the operation status of
DF TXD 100-1 101-6 the RADF to the CB.
DF ACK 100-8 101-7 (3) ACK (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)
DF RXD 100-3 101-8
DF REQ 1007 101-9
Clock signal for signal synchronization when
communication is taking place between the RADFCB
CB
RADFCB and the main body CB.
When an original is fed from the paper feed section, it is set

in the copy position. The original is conveyed as a result of
the transfer of the drive force of M302 (conveyance) to the
drive roller.
M302 is controlled by the RADFCB (RADF control board).
1. Operation
a. Conveyance operation (during paper feed)
When PS305 (paper feed) detects the leading edge of the
original, M302 goes ON after the specified period, then the
conveyance operation starts.
b. Conveyance operation (during reversal)

When PS306 (paper exit) detects the trailing edge of the
original, M302 rotates in reverse after the specified period,
and stop after the specified period from reverse PS goes
ON.
5 - 16
REVERSAL SECTION
[1] Composition
Paper exit cover
Switching guide
Conveyance roller
Paper exit roller
[2] Mechanisms
When the original reversal solenoid is OFF, the switching
Mechanism Method guide is in the lower position at the conveyance roller side.
Reversal U-turn reversal As a result, the original is exited.
Reversal roller rotation One direction only
*1 Reversal/exit switchover Switching guide Reversal external Switching guide
Paper exit cover Opening/closing type (Opens to Conveyance roller
right)
*1: Switching guide

Switchover between original reversal and exit is done by
the switching guide. The switching guide is linked to the
original reversal solenoid (SD301) via the switching guide
shaft and a cam.
OFF When the original reversal solenoid goes ON, the switching
ON guide separates from the conveyance roller. As a result, the
Conveyance roller
ON original is reversed then fed once again to the conveyance
OFF belt side.
ON
Switching guide
Conveyance roller
OFF
Original reversal
solenoid (SD301)
Switching guide
5 - 17
[3] Disassembly and Re-assembly [4] Reversal/Exit Control
1. Adjusting the Original Reversal Solenoid
(SD301)
a. Procedure 24VDC 103-B2
(1) Remove the five set screws and remove main body 24VDC 103-B3
base plate (C). M303 DRIVE A 103-B4
M303 DRIVE A 103-B5 M303
(2) Remove the three set screws and remove main body M303 DRIVE B 103-B6
base plate (D). M303 DRIVE B 103-B7
Main body Main body base

plate (D) 24VDC 103-B9
base plate (C)
SD301
SD301 DRIVE 103-B11
Set
screws 5VDC 104-A6
SGND 104-B6 PS306
PS306 102-6
5VDC 104-A7
SGND 104-B7 PS307
PS307 102-7
24VDC 100-11 101-1
PGND 100-12 101-2
5VDC 100-10 101-4
SGND 100-6 101-5
DF TXD 100-1 101-6

Set screws DF ACK 100-8 101-7
DF RXD 100-3 101-8
DF REQ 1007 101-9
CB
RADFCB
(3) When original reversal solenoid (SD301) is on/off,

adjust installation position of the SD301 so that the Reversal/exit takes place as a result of the transmission of
distance of the switching guide and conveyance roller the drive force of M303 (paper exit) to the paper exit roller.
is within specifications. Switchover between reversal and paper exit takes place as
a result of the UP/DOWN motion of the switching guide by
Conveyance roller SD301 (reversal). M303 and SD301 are controlled by the
RADFCB (RADF control board).
b
1. Operation
a
a. Reversal operation
In the two-sided original mode, the original that is conveyed
from the conveyance section after the copy has been made
is reversed in the reversal section, and the reverse side
copied.
Switching
Original guide In the reversal section, the switching guide separates from
reversal the paper exit roller side as a result of SD301 going ON. As
solenoid Set a result, the original is guided once again to the conveyance
Switching
(SD301) screws
guide section side.
Conveyance roller
Standard: a: 19.5 ± 0.5mm (Solenoid ON) b. Paper exit operation

b: less than12mm (Solenoid OFF) The original that was conveyed from the conveyance section
is sent to the conveyance roller as a result of M303 going
ON.
(4) Re-install the above parts in the opposite sequence to In this case, SD301 is OFF, so the switching guide is at the
removal. Before re-installing main body base plate (D), paper exit roller side, and the original is exited as it is.
however, open the paper exit cover.
5 - 18
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) PS306 (PS306 → RADFCB)
Paper exit original detection signal
[H]: Original does not exist.
(2) PS307 (PS307 → RADFCB)
Reversal original detection signal
[H]: Original does not exist.
(3) DFRXD (MAIN BODY → RADFCB)
Serial data line which transmits the operation status of
the main body CB to the RADF
(4) DFREQ (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)
b. Output signals
(1) M303, A, A, B, B (RADFCB → M301)
M303 (conveyance) ON/OFF drive signal
24V
0V
(2) TXD (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)

Serial data line which transmits the operation status of
the RADF to the CB.
(3) ACK (MAIN BODY → RADF CB)
Clock signal for signal synchronization when
communication is taking place between the RADFCB
and the main body CB.
5 - 19
ADJUSTMENTS
[1] Preparations RADF Mode (large size) Adjustment
1. Remove dirt from the platen glass. 12. Touch the Next adjustment key until "RADF original
2. Obtain the following items. stop position adjustment (two-sided original: Large)"
* Original with a leading edge timing edge appears in the message display box.
* 150 mm metal scale 13. Press the Copy Screen key and enter the "Two-sided
* Copy paper (A3/11" × 17"/A4/8 1/2" × 11") original to one-sided copy" mode.
14. Press the START PRINT button and make a copy.
[2] Original Stop Position Adjustment 15. Measure the original leading edge timing, and if
adjustment is not necessary press the Next adjustment
1. While pressing Copy Quantity Setting buttons 3 and 6,
turn ON the main switch. key and adjust the next item. (Standard value: Within
2. Select 2 Timing Adjustment from the 36-mode menu 1 mm)
16. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
screen.
17. While checking the numerical value in the message
3. Select 8 RADF Original Stop Position Adjustment.
display box, change the set value using the numeric
Original pos. adj. (1 sided) 1/4 keypad on the screen. (1 step = 0.39 mm)
+0 +0 0 (-99 ~ +99) 1step + 0.39mm 18. Touch the Copy Screen key, then press the START
PRINT button and make a copy, and measure the
leading edge timing.
19. Press the C button while pressing the P button, and if
adjustment is necessary return to step 17.
Likewise, perform the medium size and small size
adjustments of the RADF mode. (Standard value:
Within 1 mm)
When Performing RADF Mode (medium size) Adjustments

Message display box
RADF original stop position adjustment (two-sided original:
Medium)
Copy mode
Two-sided original to one-sided copy mode
4. Place an A3/11" × 17" size original in the original paper
Original paper size: A4R/81/2" × 11"R
feed tray of the RADF, and place A3/11" × 17" copy
paper in the paper feed tray.
RADF Mode (small size) Adjustment
5. Touch the Copy Screen key, and enter the "One-sided
Message display box
original to one-sided copy" mode.
RADF original stop position adjustment (two-sided original:
6. Press the START PRINT button and make a copy.
Small)
7. Measure the original leading edge timing, and if
Copy mode
adjustment is unnecessary proceed to step 13.
Two-sided original to one-sided copy mode
(Standard value: within 1 mm)
Original paper size: A4/81/2" × 11"
ADF Mode Adjustments

Upon completion of adjustment, touch the PREVIOUS SCREEN
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
key.
9. While checking the numerical value in the message
display box, change the set value using the numeric
keypad on the screen then touch the SET key. (1 step
= 0.39 mm)
10. Touch the Copy Screen key, then press the PRINT
START button and make a copy, and measure the
leading edge timing.
11. Press the C button while pressing the P button, and if
adjustment is necessary return to step 9.
5 - 20
ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
7 6
2 % #
5
8
3
@
1 ^
0
!
$
9
1. Switch Sensor 2. Load

1 PS301 Original detection PS ! M301 Original feed Motor
2 PS302 Original transmission PS @ M302 Original conveyance Motor
3 PS303 Original exit cover detection PS # M303 Original exit Motor
4 PS304 No Original PS $ M304 Original push pressure Motor
5 PS305 Original feed PS % SD301 Original reverse SD
6 PS306 Original exit PS
7 PS307 Original reversal detection PS 3. Others
8 PS308 ADF open/close detection PS ^ RADFCB RADF Control board
9 PS309 Push pressure plate up/down PS
0 PS310 A5R detection PS
5 - 21
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
125(W:3 PIN) 142(BK:3 PIN)

126(W:3 PIN)
143(W:4 PIN)
124(W:3 PIN)
123(R:3 PIN) 113(W:6 PIN)
121(W:3 PIN) 127(W:3 PIN)
128(W:2 PIN)
116(R:3 PIN)
112(W:6 PIN)
141(BK:4 PIN) 131(W:8 PIN)
133(W:12 PIN)
134(W:3 PIN)
111(W:6 PIN)
129(W:3 PIN)
115(W:2 PIN)
101(W:9 PIN)
RADF CB
104(W:20 PIN)
102(W:10 PIN)
103(W:22 PIN)
5 - 22
RADF OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM-1
111-1
24V DC 103-A1 R
111-2
24V DC 103-A2 R
111-3
ORIGINAL
M301 DRIVE A 103-A3 BN PAPER
_ 111-4 M301
M301 DRIVE A 103-A4 BN FEED
M301 DRIVE B 103-A5 BN
111-5 MOTOR
_ 111-6
112-1
24V DC 103-A7 R
112-2
24V DC 103-A8 R
M302 DRIVE A 103-A9 BN
112-3 ORIGINAL
_ 112-4 M302 CONVEYANCE
M302 DRIVE A 103-A10 BN
112-5
MOTOR
_ 112-6
M302 DRIVE B 103-B1 BN
131-1 113-1
24V DC 103-B2 R R
131-2 113-6
24V DC 103-B3 R R
M303 DRIVE A 103-B4 BN
131-3
BN
113-2 ORIGINAL
_ 131-4 113-3 M303 EXIT
M303 DRIVE A 103-B5 BN BN
131-5 113-4
MOTOR
M303 DRIVE B 103-B6 BN BN
_ 131-6 113-5
M303 DRIVE B 103-B7 BN BN
115-2
24V DC 103-B8 R ORIGINAL
M304 PUSH PRESSURE
115-1 MOTOR
M304 DRIVE 103-B10 BN
131-7 116-1 ORIGINAL

24V DC 103-B9 R R
SD301 DRIVE 103-B11
131-8
BN
116-2 SD301 REVERSAL [How to see the diagram]
BN
SOLENOID 1. The signals shown reflect levels present
under normal idleing conditions with
the main switch turned ON.
134-1 141-1 2. Wiring symbols in the figure are
5V DC 104-A1 R 121-1 ORIGINAL
134-2 141-2 as follows.
PS301 102-1 O 121-2 PS301 SET (1) [Symbol]
SGND 104-B1 B
134-3 141-3
121-3 SENSOR
50-1
V V
5V DC 104-A4 R 122-1 Connector

ORIGINAL Faston
Wire (Violet)
PS304 102-4 W 122-2 PS304 NO PAPER PGC
SENSOR (2) [Color code]

SGND 104-B4 B 122-3
BN - Brown B - Blue
R - Red V - Violet
O - Orange GY- Gray
RADF CB 5V DC 104-A5 R 123-3 Y - Yellow W - White
ORIGINAL GN - Green BK- Black
PS304 102-5 Y 123-2 PS305 PAPER FEED LB - Light blue P - Pink
SGND 104-B5 B 123-1 SENSOR
Example: Y/GN represents
green yellow striped pattern.
(3) RC is ribbon cable.
5V DC 104-A2 R 124-3 (4) Signal flow
ORIGINAL The solid black circle ( ) among
PS302 102-2 BN 124-2 PS302 PASSAGE the connector symbols ( )
SGND 104-B2 B 124-1 SENSOR indicates the direction of signal flow.
Example)
Direction of
CB
signal flow
5VDC
133-1 142-1
5V DC 104-A6 R R 125-1 ORIGINAL PS1 PS1
133-2 142-2 SGND
PS306 102-6 W W 125-2 PS306 EXIT
SGND 104-B6 B
133-3
B
142-3
125-3 SENSOR
133-4 143-1
5V DC 104-A7 R R 126-1
ORIGINAL
133-5 143-2
PS307 102-7 GY GY 126-2 PS307 REVERSAL
133-6 143-4 SENSOR
SGND 104-B7 B B 126-3
133-7
5V DC 104-A8 R R 127-1
133-8
UNIT
PS308 102-8 V V 127-2 PS308 OPEN/CLOSE
133-9 SENSOR
MAIN BODY SGND 104-B8 B B 127-3
133-10
5V DC 104-A3 R R 128-1 EXIT COVER
133-11
24V DC 100-11 O 101-1 PS303 102-3 Y Y 128-2 PS303 OPEN/CLOSE
PGND 100-12 BK 101-2 SGND 104-B3 B
133-12
B 128-3 SENSOR
PGND 100-10 BK 101-3
5V DC 100-6 R 101-4
SGND 100-4 101-5 5V DC 104-A9 R 129-1
B
UP/DOWN
100-1 W 101-6 DF TXD PS309 102-9 GY 129-2 PS309
SENSOR
100-8 DF ACK SGND 104-B9 B 129-3
GY 101-7
DF RXD 100-3 Y 101-8
DF REQ 100-7 V 101-9
5V DC 104-A10 R 120-1
PS310 102-10 V 120-2
A5 SIZE
PS310
SENSOR
SGND 104-B10 B 120-3
5 - 23
RADF TIMING CHART-1 (A4/81/2" × 11", ONE SIDE ORIGINALS, THREE SHEETS SET)
Time (sec) (sec)

Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Item
F 10mS 10mS 10mS
M301 28step 28step 28step
Paper feed motor
R 81step 81step 81step
F
35step 35step
M302 Conveyance motor 67step
147step 380mS 67step
R
F
M303 Original exit motor
265step 265step
R
SD301 Original reversal SD
30mS 30mS 30mS
M304 Push press motor
PS309 Up/Down PS
PS302 Original passage PS
PS305 Paperfeed PS
PS306 Original exit PS
PS307 Original reversal PS
Copy ON
RADF TIMING CHART-1 (A4/81/2" × 11", TWO SIDE ORIGINALS, TWO SHEETS SET)
Time (sec) (sec)

Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Item
F
M301 Paper feed motor 28step 28step
R
10mS 79step 79step
10mS
F 35step
M302 Conveyance motor 67step
90mS 90mS 90mS 90mS
+67step +67step +67step +67step 67step
R
10mS 10mS 10mS 10mS
F
M303 Original exit motor 20mS
20mS 20mS 165mS 20mS 265step
R 1212step 1212step 1212step 1212step
+67step
SD301 Original reversal SD

30mS 30mS
M304 Push press motor
PS309 Up/Down PS
PS302 Original passage PS
PS305 Paperfeed PS
PS306 Original exit PS
PS307 Original reversal PS
Copy ON
5 - 26
MITA COPYSTAR AMERICA, INC.
Headquarters: Western Region:
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008 14101 Alton Parkway,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008 P.O.Box 57006, Irvine,
TEL : (973) 808-8444 California 92618-7006
FAX : (973) 882-6000 TEL : (714) 457-9000
FAX : (714) 457-9119
New York Show Room:
149 West 51st street, Southeastern Region:
New York, NY 10019 1500 Oakbrook Drive,
TEL : (212) 554-2679 Norcross, Georgia 30093
FAX : (212) 554-2625 TEL : (770) 729-9786
FAX : (770) 729-9873
Northeastern Region:
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008 Southwestern Region:
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008 2825 West Story Road,
TEL : (973) 808-8444 Irving, Texas 75038-5299
FAX : (973) 882-4401 TEL : (972) 550-8987
FAX : (972) 570-4704
Midwestern Region:
225 Spring Lake Drive, Dallas Parts Distribution Center
Itasca, Illinois 60143 & National Training Center:
TEL : (630) 250-7447 2825 West Story Road,
FAX : (630) 250-8787 Irving, Texas 75038-5299
TEL : (972) 659-0055
FAX : (972) 570-5816
MITA COPYSTAR CANADA, LTD.

6120 Kestrel Road,
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1S8
TEL : (905) 670-4425
FAX : (905) 670-8116
MITA COPYSTAR MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.

Av. 16 de Septiembre #407
Col. Santa Inés,
Delegación Azcapotzalco
México, D.F. C.P. 02130
TEL : 3-83-27-41
FAX : 3-83-78-04
MITA COPYSTAR SOUTH AMERICA S.A.

Av. Mitre 1345 Florida (1602)
Pcia, Buenos Aires, Argentina.
TEL : (54) 1-730-1070
FAX : (54) 1-760-2071
©1998 MITA INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD.

MITA and are registered trademarks of MITA INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD.
Printed in U.S.A.

Ai6060S 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ai6060S 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PointSource

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and

WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient

CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is

General prohibited action.

General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

•Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding

• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped.

• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner

2. Precautions for Maintenance

• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..............................

• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a

•Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers.

• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as

•Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away

•Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be

•Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage

•Remove toner completely from electronic components. ........................

•Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or

• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions

• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause

• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents

TONER SUPPLY UNIT ........................................... 2-J-1 CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................... 2-R-1

4. ADJUSTMENT 47 MODE .................................................................. 4-55

OUTLINE AND COMPOSITION

Image processing unit Polygon mirror

Optical data Electrical signal Electrical signal

PCL Charging Developing

Cleaning Separation ← Transfer corona

IMAGE READ MECHANISM

Light source (halogen lamp) 2nd mirror

1st mirror Lens 3rd mirror

[1] Outline 1. White correction

[5] Brightness/Density Conversion [7] Text/Dot Pattern Identification

[9] Magnification Processing 2. Horziontal magnification change processing

1. Horizontal magnification change processing

Original read position D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 E2 – E1

Data position when E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 255

[10] Reversal Processing [15] Image Compression Processing

[11] Copy γ Correction [16] Memory

[13] Write Density Control

[14] Error Diffusion Processing

Collimator lens unit 1 Beam combining prism

Fine adjustment prism 2

Collimator lens unit 2

Compression prism 1 Compression prism 2

Fine adjustment prism Fine adjustment prism

Cylindrical lens 1 (cy1) Polygon mirror

fθ lens 1st mirror Cylindrical lens 2

3rd mirror OPC drum

Index mirror Index sensor

[2] Collimator lens [6] Polygon mirror

[3] Beam combining prism

[4] Compression Prism